initial commit of ebook 38447HEADmain

1 files changed, 11014 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/38447.txt b/38447.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a441017
--- /dev/null
+++ b/38447.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11014 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of Adventures in Swaziland, by Owen Rowe O'Neil
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: Adventures in Swaziland
+       The Story of a South African Boer
+
+Author: Owen Rowe O'Neil
+
+Release Date: December 30, 2011 [EBook #38447]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ADVENTURES IN SWAZILAND ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Juliet Sutherland, Richard Prairie and the
+Online Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+
+
+
+[Illustration: HAND WRITTEN DEDICATION]
+
+[Illustration: SWAZI MOTHER CARRYING HER BABE
+
+Like most of the South African natives, the Swazis carry all burdens
+on their heads, the women invariably being the beasts of burden.
+Babies are the only things the women ever carry on their backs, this
+being because they keep their children with them while doing the
+housework. The splendid stature and erect carriage of Swazi women is
+directly due to carrying all weights on their heads]
+
+
+
+
+  ADVENTURES
+  IN SWAZILAND
+
+  THE STORY OF A SOUTH AFRICAN BOER
+
+  BY
+
+  OWEN ROWE O'NEIL
+
+  WITH MANY ILLUSTRATIONS
+  FROM PHOTOGRAPHS
+
+[Illustration: Publisher's Mark]
+
+  NEW YORK
+  THE CENTURY CO.
+  1921
+
+  Copyright, 1921, by
+
+  THE CENTURY CO.
+
+  Printed in U. S. A.
+
+
+  TO MY FATHER
+  COUNSELOR, FARMER, AND WARRIOR
+  THIS HUMBLE RECORD IS DEDICATED
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS
+
+
+  CHAPTER I                                                        PAGE
+
+  HOW THE O'NEILS CAME TO THE TRANSVAAL--BOERS WITH IRISH NAMES--OOM
+  PAUL'S REFUSAL TO BUY DELAGOA BAY--THE BOERS BREAK FOR FREEDOM--THEIR
+  BLOODY BATTLES WITH THE SAVAGE TRIBES--THE GREAT TREK--DINGAANZULU'S
+  TREACHERY--THE DINGAAN DAY CELEBRATION                              3
+
+
+  CHAPTER II
+
+  RIETVLEI, THE "VALLEY OF REEDS"--THE O'NEIL HOMESTEAD--PIONEER
+  HARDSHIPS--THE WAR AGAINST MALEUW, "THE LION"--"SLIM GERT" O'NEIL
+  BREAKS THE POWER OF THE MAKATEESE KING--JAFTA, KING OF THE MAPORS--MY
+  TROUSERS NEARLY COST ME AN EYE--OUR TOY FACTORY AND MIMIC BATTLES--OOM
+  TUYS GROBLER TELLS OF SWAZILAND AND KING BUNO, "THE TERRIBLE"      12
+
+
+  CHAPTER III
+
+  MY DESIRE TO VISIT KING BUNO--HOW I WON THE TRIP ON A BET--A BOER RACE
+  MEET--"BLACK HAND TOM," THE HOPE OF RIETVLEI--KLAAS'S RIDE TO SAVE HIS
+  SKIN--FATHER GIVES PERMISSION FOR MY VISIT--BELFAST CELEBRATES THE
+  BOER VICTORY                                                       31
+
+
+  CHAPTER IV
+
+  I LEAVE FOR MY FIRST VISIT TO SWAZILAND--MOTHER WARNS ME ABOUT OOM
+  TUYS--WHY THE BOERS PAID TRIBUTE TO KING BUNO--QUEEN LABOTSIBENI, THE
+  BRAINS OF SWAZILAND--BUNO'S VISIT TO OOM PAUL KRUGER--OUR RECEPTION IN
+  SWAZILAND--EZULWENI, THE "VALLEY OF HEAVEN"--BUNO'S RIFLE--SIBIJAAN
+  AND I EXPLORE BY NIGHT                                             44
+
+
+  CHAPTER V
+
+  SHEBA'S BREASTS AND THE PLACE OF EXECUTION--ZOMBODE AND THE ROYAL
+  KRAAL OF QUEEN LABOTSIBENI--COMMON AND ROYAL GROUND--WE REACH KING
+  BUNO'S KRAAL AT LEBOMBO--GIN FOR THE KING--BUNO, THE REGAL SAVAGE--I
+  PRESENT A RIFLE TO THE KING--LOMWAZI TAKES ME TO LABOTSIBENI--THE OLD
+  QUEEN IS WORRIED OVER TUYS' ACTIVITIES--THE SHOOTING-MATCH WITH THE
+  KING--TUYS AND I MANAGE TO MISS A FEW HUMAN TARGETS               57
+
+
+  CHAPTER VI
+
+  TUYS ORDERS ME TO REMAIN IN CAMP DURING THE CELEBRATION--I VISIT THE
+  ROYAL KRAAL--FEASTING, DANCING, AND COMBATS TO THE DEATH--BUTCHERY OF
+  YOUNG WOMEN--BUNO AND TUYS WRESTLE FOR GOLD--HOW TUYS BECAME RICH--A
+  "LEGAL EXECUTION" IN SWAZILAND--THE  UNFAITHFUL WIFE EXPIATES HER
+  SIN--HOW TUYS SHOOTS--FATHER GATHERS INFORMATION BY MENTAL SUGGESTION
+                                                                    73
+
+
+  CHAPTER VII
+
+  I VISIT SWAZILAND AGAIN--BUNO'S ILLNESS--AN APPEAL FROM THE KING--THE
+  RACE AGAINST DEATH--UMZULEK MEETS US--THE DYING KING--BUNO MAKES TUYS
+  GUARDIAN OF HIS PEOPLE--THE LAST ROYAL SALUTE OF THE IMPIS--THE
+  DEATH-DEALING PUFF-ADDER--BUNO DIES LIKE A TRUE SAVAGE KING--TZANEEN,
+  THE ROYAL WIDOW, SUSPECTS MURDER--THE QUEENS MEET--TUYS ESCAPES THE
+  FUNERAL SACRIFICE                                                 92
+
+
+  CHAPTER VIII
+
+  THE ROYAL FUNERAL--THE "THUNDER OF THE SHIELDS"--NOT AFRAID TO
+  DIE--THE WITCH-DOCTOR'S BLOODY WORK--WHAT LABOTSIBENI WANTED--THE
+  BURIAL OF THE INDUNAS--RAIN-MAKING AND THE "RAIN STONE"--BUNO'S BURIAL
+  IN THE CAVES--WITCH-DOCTORS PREVENT OUR ENTERING THE CAVES--LABOTSIBENI
+  SENDS FOR GIN                                                    110
+
+
+  CHAPTER IX
+
+  SIBIJAAN'S SPORTIVENESS ALMOST COSTS HIS LIFE--HOW TUYS BECAME THE
+  FRIEND OF BUNO--LABOTSIBENI ENDORSED AS REGENT OF SWAZILAND--UMZULEK
+  PLOTS TO SEIZE THE THRONE--THE BOERS INVADE SWAZILAND--TUYS DICTATES
+  PEACE BETWEEN THE QUEENS--UMZULEK GETS HIS LESSON                129
+
+
+  CHAPTER X
+
+  WAR WITH ENGLAND--SIEGE OF BELFAST--OUR BOYISH IMPI ATTACKS THE
+  BRITISH--GHOSTS DEFEAT US--JAFTA'S FRIENDSHIP--ENGLISH TROOPERS DO THE
+  "SPORTING THING"--UMZULEK STILL PLANNING DEVILTRY--DEATH OF KLAAS, OUR
+  JOCKEY--FATHER SENDS ME AWAY TO GET AN EDUCATION                 150
+
+
+  CHAPTER XI
+
+  BACK TO RIETVLEI FROM HARVARD--I LOCATE IN ERMELO--TUYS BRINGS NEWS
+  THAT SEBUZA IS TO BE CROWNED KING OF SWAZILAND--I DECIDE TO MAKE A
+  PICTURE RECORD OF THE CORONATION--THE TREK TO ZOMBODE TO GET THE ROYAL
+  PERMISSION--SNYMAN PLAYS GHOST AND ALMOST GETS KILLED--VISIT TO
+  MBABANE, CAPITAL OF SWAZILAND                                    163
+
+
+  CHAPTER XII
+
+  I MEET LABOTSIBENI AGAIN--FLATTERING A SAVAGE QUEEN--EXPLAINING THE
+  "LITTLE BLACK MAGIC BOX"--CURING RHEUMATISM WITH TOOTH-PASTE,
+  VASELINE, AND HAIR OIL--WOMEN AS CURRENCY--GIN, GOLD, AND COWS PAY FOR
+  THE PICTURE RIGHTS--THE "FLU" STRIKES--JENNIE, THE "BLAAU APP," AND
+  THE PEACOCKS' TAILS                                              188
+
+
+  CHAPTER XIII
+
+  I START FOR NEW YORK--THE RELIGIOUS ATMOSPHERE ON SHIPBOARD--"FLU"
+  ATTACKS THE JAVANESE--THE MISSIONARIES REFUSE TO HELP--SHARKS AS
+  SCAVENGERS--THE LITTLE MOTHER'S END--EVILS OF LIQUOR--ASSEMBLING OUR
+  PARTY IN NEW YORK--PASSAGE AS FREIGHT--ST. LUCIA AND A LITTLE
+  EXCITEMENT--THE THIN MAGISTRATE--RELEASED ON BAIL                206
+
+
+  CHAPTER XIV
+
+  OBSTINATE STOWAWAYS--FREE TOWN AND A FIGHT--BAY RUM AS A
+  BEVERAGE--SUGDEN LETS OFF SMOKE-BOMBS--CAPE TOWN, A PARTY, AND SOME
+  ANZACS--OOM TUYS ADVISES HASTE--THROUGH SOUTH AFRICA--AMERICANS AND
+  BOERS IN ERMELO--A HURRIED VISIT TO SWAZILAND FOR INFORMATION--MYSTERY
+  OVER THE CORONATION--ROYAL GIN FOR LABOTSIBENI--DEBESEEMBIE DRINKS AND
+  TALKS                                                            226
+
+
+  CHAPTER XV
+
+  OUTFITTING FOR SWAZILAND--OUR COOK BECOMES "GUNGA DIN"--LOMWAZI'S
+  MESSENGER--OFF FOR ZOMBODE--ROSSMAN GOES HUNTING--TOO MUCH RAIN--THE
+  OXEN DIE AND ARE REPLACED BY DONKEYS--SNEAKING LIQUOR THROUGH
+  MBABANE--EZULWENI MOSQUITOES RIVAL NEW JERSEY'S--WE ARE UNPOPULAR IN
+  ZOMBODE--MANAAN'S DAMAGE SUIT AND SETTLEMENT                     247
+
+
+  CHAPTER XVI
+
+  LABOTSIBENI REFUSES TO SEE ME--SUGDEN AND MY MEN ESCAPE
+  ASSASSINATION--A FRUITLESS CONFERENCE--WE FLEE TO LEBOMBO--OOM TUYS
+  TURNS UP--WE CONFER WITH QUEEN TZANEEN AND LOCHIEN--FIVE-AND-TEN-CENT-
+  STORE JEWELRY HAS PERSUASIVE POWERS--SUGDEN FALLS ILL--WE BUILD HIS
+  COFFIN--SEBUZA RETURNS FROM HIS SANCTIFICATION                   268
+
+
+  CHAPTER XVII
+
+  L'TUNGA'S "MUTI" CURES THE SICK WHITE MAN--SEBUZA CHOOSES HIS WIVES--I
+  RECEIVE A MESSAGE FROM HIS MAJESTY'S HIGH COMMISSIONER FOR
+  SWAZILAND--A FLYING TRIP TO MBABANE--THE GOVERNMENT REFUSES TO
+  SANCTION SEBUZA'S CORONATION--HOW WITCH-DOCTORS SMOKE DAGGA      292
+
+
+  CHAPTER XVIII
+
+  WITCH-DOCTORS OF SWAZILAND--HOW THEY BROUGHT A FAMINE--L'TUNGA'S
+  SCHOOL OF WITCH-DOCTORING--THE "POISON TEST" TO SETTLE OWNERSHIP--THE
+  PROFESSIONAL WITCH-DOCTOR'S EQUIPMENT--L'TUNGA DECIDES A MURDER
+  CASE--SOME GENUINE CURES                                         310
+
+
+  CHAPTER XIX
+
+  WEARISOME DELAY IN CORONATION--WAR SUGGESTIONS FROM UMZULEK--MY PLAN
+  TO BLUFF LABOTSIBENI--THE BLUFF IS CALLED--A TICKLISH SITUATION--
+  LABOTSIBENI REFUSES TO SURRENDER THE THRONE--OUR DEMONSTRATION
+  FAILS--NIGHT MURDERS PROVOKE WAR                                 331
+
+
+  CHAPTER XX
+
+  LEBOMBO THREATENED WITH ATTACK--TZANEEN FLIES TO US FOR
+  PROTECTION--VICTORY FOR SEBUZA--LABOTSIBENI'S MYSTERIOUS
+  DEATH--LOMWAZI SPARED FOR EXECUTION LATER--FUNERAL SACRIFICE OF THE
+  OLD QUEEN--QUEEN TZANEEN IN STATE--WE ARE FORCED TO JOIN THE ROYAL
+  IMPI                                                             355
+
+
+  CHAPTER XXI
+
+  OUR SANCTIFICATION IN EXILE--HARDSHIPS IN THE HILLS--OOM TUYS SAVES
+  LOMWAZI'S LIFE--THE CELEBRATION--LOMWAZI FORMALLY SURRENDERS THE
+  THRONE--WE ARE INDUCTED INTO THE ROYAL IMPI--MBABANE SENDS FOR
+  INFORMATION--WE ESCAPE THROUGH PORTUGUESE TERRITORY TO AMERICA   371
+
+
+
+
+LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
+
+
+  Swazi mother carrying her babe                     _Frontispiece_
+                                                        FACING PAGE
+
+  Map of Swaziland                                               32
+
+  Map showing section of South Africa                            33
+
+  The result of the national sport                               48
+
+  Interior of military barracks                                  49
+
+  Princesses and maid taking a morning bath                      68
+
+  Young princesses amiably engaged in hair-dressing              68
+
+  Swazi girls                                                    69
+
+  Pudana, favorite to the old Queen Labotsibeni                  69
+
+  An actual combat in which the man on the left was slain        76
+
+  A type of dress worn by the royal executioner                  77
+
+  Lomwazi, son and prime minister to the old Queen               77
+
+  Queen Tzaneen, mother of the crown prince                     112
+
+  Queen Tzaneen with some Zulu princesses                       113
+
+  Umzulek, a resourceful and influential exile                  113
+
+  Swazi warriors and women dancing                              128
+
+  Princesses of royal birth                                     129
+
+  Queen Labotsibeni, mother of King Buno                        196
+
+  Lomwazi and his council of Indunas, or war chiefs             197
+
+  The stream that divides the royal from the common ground      204
+
+  Type of Afrikander cattle                                     205
+
+  Swazi women at home                                           205
+
+  On the way to the royal kraal at Zombode                      256
+
+  The second trip into Swaziland                                256
+
+  Mother feeding her baby                                       257
+
+  Maiden singing to the Crown Prince Sebuza                     257
+
+  Dr. O'Neil and companions are received by Queen Tzaneen       282
+
+  Dr. O'Neil, Queen Tzaneen, Dr. Sugden, and Mr. Crespinell     282
+
+  Wives of the prime minister to Sebuza                         283
+
+  Queen Tzaneen and Lochien                                     283
+
+  Princesses at the sacred bathing pool                         304
+
+  A scene at the royal bathing pool                             305
+
+  Interior of the royal kraal                                   320
+
+  Chief witch-doctor of Swaziland                               320
+
+  A school of witch-doctors                                     321
+
+  A Swazi seminary or school for young witch-doctors            321
+
+  Crown Prince Sebuza in festival dress                         336
+
+  Crown Prince Sebuza                                           337
+
+  Lochien, commander-in-chief of Prince Sebuza's impis          352
+
+  Warriors of Prince Sebuza's impis starting out to battle      352
+
+  One of the royal impis                                        353
+
+  Priests building the sacred fire                              360
+
+  A view of the kraal                                           361
+
+  Mr. Crespinell at home among his black brethren               376
+
+  Dr. Sugden, Prince Lomwazi, and Dr. O'Neil                    376
+
+  Dr. O'Neil, Mr. Crespinell, and Dr. Sugden after their
+    induction into the royal impi                               377
+
+
+ADVENTURES IN SWAZILAND
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I
+
+How the O'Neils came to the Transvaal--Boers with Irish names--Oom
+Paul's refusal to buy Delagoa Bay--The Boers break for freedom--Their
+bloody battles with the savage tribes--The Great Trek--Dingaanzulu's
+treachery--The Dingaan Day celebration.
+
+
+I was born only a few days trek, or march, from the Swazi border and
+even as a youth made numerous trips into Swaziland. Through my uncle,
+Oom Tuys Grobler, known as "The White King of Swaziland," I was
+practically adopted by the savage rulers of that country and have
+always been received with the greatest honor and consideration by the
+various members of its royal family. My family have always been
+interested in Swaziland and there was seldom a time when one of my ten
+brothers was not hunting or visiting there. As one of the O'Neils of
+Rietvlei, which means "The Valley of Reeds," any of us were welcome.
+
+It may seem strange that Boers should bear the name O'Neil, but this
+is not out of the ordinary in the Transvaal. There are many Boer
+families, most of them prominent in South Africa, who have Irish
+names. My father's first wife was a Madden and our homestead at
+Rietvlei is only about seven miles from the town of Belfast, which our
+family founded and named. The record is not clear how these Irish
+names are found among the Boers, but the fact that many Boers have
+Celtic names refutes the statement that most of the Irish who fought
+against the British in the Boer War were renegades from the United
+Kingdom.
+
+My father is Richard Charles O'Neil, known among our people as "Slim
+Gert," or "Slick Dick" as it would be Americanized, the title being a
+tribute to his astuteness and good business sense. He was for six
+years minister of finance in the cabinet of the late Oom Paul Kruger,
+who has come to be regarded as one of the really great South Africans,
+his fame being greater to-day than at the time of his death. Father
+split with Oom Paul over the Delagoa Bay question and resigned from
+his cabinet. At that time the Portuguese offered to sell Delagoa Bay
+to Oom Paul for twenty thousand pounds. This was shortly before the
+Boer War. Father strongly advocated the purchase, since it would give
+our people an outlet on the coast, the Bay being a fine harbor. Oom
+Paul, however, emphatically refused to buy.
+
+"It would only give our enemies, the English, a chance to attack us
+from the sea," he said, ending the cabinet conference. "Now they can't
+get to us through Portuguese territory."
+
+To-day Delagoa Bay could not be bought for twenty million pounds.
+
+My grandfather was John James O'Neil, a direct descendant of the
+O'Neil who fled from Ireland in the time of Oliver Cromwell, and it
+was he who chose Rietvlei as the family farm. When I say "farm," I use
+the term in the Boer sense, since Rietvlei includes more than 100,000
+acres of the most fertile land in the Transvaal and is quite large
+even for South Africa, the country of vast distances.
+
+As one of the survivors of "The Great Trek," my grandfather had
+suffered the most intense hardships and escaped dangers that are
+almost unbelievable to-day. This trek was the wholesale migration of
+Boers who were dissatisfied with British rule and had decided to carve
+out a country for themselves in what was then wildest Africa.
+
+The original Boers were the descendants of the Huguenots who were
+expelled from France to Holland and eventually went overseas. They
+made their chief settlement in what is now Cape Town, then a port of
+call for the far-flung commerce of the Dutch, who were at that time
+the dominant maritime nation. The British took Cape Town from the
+Dutch in 1806, but returned the colony to Holland a few years later.
+Finally, in 1815, the Dutch ceded Cape Town to the British for a sum
+said to be six million pounds.
+
+Up to that time the settlers of the Cape Colony had only branched out
+as far as the Great Fish River. This was the limit of safety, since
+beyond lay trackless wastes and millions of savage natives noted for
+their hostility and cannibalism. Practically all these settlers were
+the ancestors of the present Boers.
+
+As is occasionally the case in present times, it was the missionaries
+who caused the trouble that led to the breaking up of the old Boer
+homes in Cape Colony. A number of these religious gentlemen came out
+from England and lived for a short time in the Colony. On their return
+to London they misrepresented facts to the king to such an extent that
+a number of restrictive laws and regulations were passed. These made
+life impossible for the Boers, who have always been a freedom-loving
+people.
+
+Finally about ten thousand of the burghers got together and commenced
+their exodus from Cape Colony into the unknown territory beyond the
+Great Fish River. The Zulus and Basutus met the first party, there was
+a bitter fight, and every Boer man, woman and child was massacred. In
+many cases, when the men realized that there was no hope, they killed
+their own womenfolk so that they might not fall into the hands of the
+savages.
+
+This bloody tragedy did not deter the determined Boers. Other parties
+followed, and soon these pioneers founded various settlements. Every
+foot of their advance was gained by fighting, and the Boer conquest of
+the Transvaal and Orange Free State may well be said to have been won
+by the blood of freemen. Some of these expeditions settled in Natal
+and founded the city of Pietermaritzburg, named after their great
+leader, Pieter Maritz.
+
+It was during the year 1830 that my grandfather joined the Great Trek
+and left Cape Colony with a large expedition led by Piet Retief and
+Piet Potgier. The party had much trouble with the Zulus, its progress
+being a continuous fight. On reaching the Vaal River, Potgier and
+Retief came to loggerheads and agreed to separate. Each had his own
+opinion as to where they ought to go, and each followed his own idea.
+My grandfather remained with Retief and thereby nearly lost his life.
+With my grandfather was his brother, Richard Charles O'Neil, after
+whom my father was named.
+
+Piet Retief was killed by the Zulus, and this massacre is now history,
+almost sacred history, in the Transvaal. It seems that Retief led his
+party into what is now Natal and there undertook to come to some basis
+of peace with the savages. A truce was declared, and he went to the
+Zulu royal kraal and saw their great chief, Dingaanzulu. The chief
+agreed to cede certain territory to Retief if the Boer would recover
+for the Zulus certain cattle stolen from them by another savage
+nation. This land was to be the first of the new Republic of Natalia,
+which my grandfather and Retief planned to found.
+
+Retief recovered the cattle and with one hundred burghers visited the
+Zulu royal kraal and returned them to Dingaanzulu. After the cattle
+were driven in the Zulu chief sent for the Boer leader, ostensibly to
+arrange about the land grant. He insisted that the Boers were now his
+friends and, as such, should leave their weapons outside the royal
+kraal and enter unarmed. The ruthless Zulu chief said that this would
+be "an evidence of the good hearts of the white men."
+
+With great foreboding Retief did as he was asked. With his hundred men
+he went into the kraal and found Dingaanzulu in the most friendly
+frame of mind. After fraternization the chief told the Boers that a
+great celebration had been prepared in their honor, and that night
+there was feasting, dancing, and much speech-making in front of the
+great fires.
+
+I have often heard what happened next. It is history with us and
+tradition with the Zulus, Swazis, and other natives of our section of
+the Transvaal. The story was first told me by an old Zulu who was a
+sort of farm-helper at our home when I was a little fellow. He claimed
+to have been there, and from his evidence I believe he was.
+
+"There was a great feast and all the fires were lighted," he said.
+"Many cattle had been killed and all the royal impis (regiments) were
+in full costume. These were the picked men of all Zululand, and they
+danced for a long time before the fires.
+
+"Dingaanzulu sat with the white leader, and they drank tswala (kaffir
+beer) together. Often they would shake hands, and it was as though
+they were brothers. All the other white men sat near the fires in
+front of the king. They, too, had much tswala and plenty to eat.
+
+"When it was quite late and the moon shone through the flames of the
+dying fires, many of the royal impi gathered behind those who were
+dancing and waited for a sign from Dingaanzulu. Soon this came, and
+then the killing! Dingaanzulu stood up and threw his leopard-skin
+cloak about his shoulders. This was the sign. The waiting warriors
+dashed through the dancers and threw themselves upon the white men.
+Assegais flashed, and the Boer leader dashed to his men. These held
+together and fought the impis with bare hands. Some of the white men
+were very strong and tore assegais from the warriors and fought with
+them, stabbing, and stabbing, and stabbing!
+
+"But there were hundreds, even thousands, of Zulus to each white man,
+and the fight could not last long. All the white men were killed, and
+some were stabbed scores of times before they died. I do not know how
+their leader died, but we found him with a broken assegai in his hand
+and seven dead warriors about him."
+
+As soon as Dingaanzulu had murdered Retief and his band, he sent his
+impis to kill all the remaining members of the expedition. My
+grandfather and his brother were in charge of the main encampment, or
+laager, at Weenan, which means "Weeping," or "Place of Sorrow." The
+wagons had been formed into a hollow square, and the Boers finally
+drove off the Zulus after a fight lasting several days. Hundreds of
+the savages were killed, and the Boers lost a large number of men who
+could ill be spared.
+
+Then my grandfather and his party settled in the district surrounding
+Majuba Hill. His brother founded the place known as "O'Neil's Farm" at
+the foot of Majuba, while my grandfather established and named the
+village of Belfast on the top of the hill. Following this he moved to
+Potchefstroom, and from there north-east, where he established the
+Republic of Lydenburg. These various little republics were
+discontinued, or rather merged into the modern form of government,
+when the Boers became sufficiently numerous and communications were
+established.
+
+After the establishment of the Republic of Lydenburg my grandfather
+discovered Rietvlei, the "Valley of Reeds," which has been the O'Neil
+homestead ever since.
+
+The massacre of Retief and his devoted band is celebrated yearly by a
+three-day holiday in the Transvaal and Orange Free State. The
+celebration is in the nature of a memorial service, followed by
+rejoicing. About every eighty miles throughout the Boer country a spot
+is designated, and the burghers, with their families, trek to this
+place. This trek is symbolic of the "Great Trek" in which their
+ancestors died. On the first day of the celebration there is a sham
+battle in which the fight at Weenan is acted again, and the last two
+days are given over to religious services and the festivities.
+
+All self-respecting Boer families join in the Dingaan Day celebration,
+many of them coming scores of miles to do so. The children are taught
+the story of "the day" in the schools, and it is probably the most
+important civic celebration of the year.
+
+Piet Potgier's party was entirely wiped out, none surviving attacks
+made by the combined impis of the Zulus and Basutus.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II
+
+
+Rietvlei, the "Valley of Reeds"--The O'Neil homestead--Pioneer
+hardships--The war against Maleuw, "The Lion"--"Slim Gert" O'Neil
+breaks the power of the Makateese king--Jafta, King of the Mapors--My
+boyhood and "Jass"--Sibijaan, "The Skunk," becomes my pal--My first
+trousers nearly cost me an eye--Our toy factory and mimic battles--Oom
+Tuys Grobler tells of Swaziland and King Buno, "The Terrible."
+
+
+Rietvlei is one of the most beautiful accidents of nature I have ever
+seen. To properly appreciate this wonderful Valley of Reeds, it should
+be approached across the high veldt. To reach it in this way is to
+receive a thrill that is seldom felt when viewing any scene. It is set
+like a jewel in the wilderness of the veldt and seems more like a
+sunken oasis than anything else. Time and time again I have been
+almost startled when I suddenly saw Rietvlei.
+
+As you ride across the high veldt you are struck by its utter
+barrenness and the thousands of ant-hills on all sides. The wild
+grasses, browned by the sun, are higher than your horse's belly and
+far in the distance are the barren hills. The veldt, with its altitude
+of about seven thousand feet, is much like the plains of Arizona, New
+Mexico, and Texas. It is almost desert. Hundreds of times I have
+crossed this veldt on my hairy Boer pony and always the same thing has
+happened. Several times, sometimes scores of times, springbok,
+blesbok, or duiker, the antelopes of the veldt, have jumped to their
+feet and scampered off through the tall grass. My pony would give one
+leap and then dash madly after them. If I was day-dreaming, I was
+likely to find myself unhorsed and facing a chase after my active
+steed. However, one gets used to such interruptions and it was seldom
+that I did not enjoy the chase. It is no use to think that a Boer pony
+can be prevented from pursuing these antelope; he is trained to do it
+from the first time he feels a saddle, and his quickness often makes
+it possible for the shot that provides fresh meat that night in camp.
+
+After miles and miles of veldt, with the distant hills seeming to
+recede as one goes on, the fascination of space loses its grip and the
+fatigue of monotony follows. About the time I would begin to feel like
+a sailor adrift in mid-ocean the blessed relief would come--I would
+reach Rietvlei!
+
+My pony would come to a sudden stop on the rim of a great precipice
+and thousands of feet below I would see the Valley of Reeds with the
+settlement that meant home. The high veldt breaks off abruptly, as
+though cut with a giant knife, exactly like parts of the Grand Canyon
+of the Colorado in America. Since the beginning of time the little
+rivers of Rietvlei have worn down the veldt until they have hollowed
+out thousands and thousands of acres. From the cool high veldt to the
+fertile green Valley of Reeds is a wonderful change, and it takes a
+full hour to climb down the winding trail.
+
+My grandfather, John James O'Neil, was the first white man to see
+Rietvlei and he immediately decided that he need look no further for
+his home. He at once settled there and went through many hardships to
+found his home. The natives inhabiting the valley were the Mapors,
+then a powerful and hostile tribe. My father built our present home,
+which is of white limestone, iron, and wood, all of which had to be
+brought some six hundred miles by ox-teams. It was many years before
+the house was completed, but my father intended it as the permanent
+home of the O'Neils and it will stand for centuries.
+
+The hardships endured by my grandfather and father were such as would
+have daunted less stern men, but they were Boers and all Africa knows
+them to be the greatest pioneers the world has ever seen. Jafta, king
+of the Mapors, whose royal kraal was about forty-eight miles from my
+home, was my family's greatest enemy. Both my grandfather and father
+were constantly at war with him and were forced to maintain a large
+force of fighting men to repel his attacks. There was always the
+threat that Jafta would overwhelm the little band of doughty Boers in
+the valley, and the white men practically lived with their guns in
+their hands.
+
+Those were anxious days for the womenfolk. All supplies had to be
+brought in from the coast, and the wagons were months on the way.
+Sometimes they would be gone for nearly a year and during all this
+time the women never knew but that some hostile native tribe had
+overwhelmed the devoted burghers and killed all their men. Dogged,
+dauntless, and determined, the men won through time after time, until
+there broke out the great war fomented by Maleuw, king of the
+Makateese. He was known as "The Lion" and was a very able savage,
+brave, cunning, and a born leader of men.
+
+Maleuw became obsessed with the idea that the white men should be
+driven out, and with this object provoked a war with Jafta, king of
+the Mapors. It seems that Jafta, although he had been carrying on his
+private feud against the white men, did not care to join Maleuw and
+refused to aid him. The Makateese were the most warlike nation at that
+time, probably owing to the inspiration of "The Lion," and they swept
+down on the Mapors with the expressed intention of exterminating them.
+
+The war was most sanguinary. No prisoners were taken, and it soon
+began to look as though the Mapors would be wiped out. The white men
+made no effort toward peace, taking the view that the more of their
+enemies were killed the safer life would be for them. Soon Jafta and
+his troops were in full flight, and then the white men found
+themselves facing another and more real danger. With Maleuw victorious
+he could rally additional armies, and this meant he would be powerful
+enough to drive the white men out and probably kill most of them.
+
+Under my father, Slim Gert O'Neil, a council of war was called at
+Rietvlei and the leading Boers and some of the British settlers
+attended. Chiefs of the Basuto and Swazi nations were sent for, and it
+was decided to save the remnants of the Mapor nation and in so doing
+break the power of "The Lion" and his Makateese armies. Umbandine was
+king of Swaziland at that time.
+
+King Maleuw found himself attacked by a large army made up of Boers,
+British, Basutos, Mapors, and Swazis, and there were several fierce
+battles. In some manner the Makateese had obtained a number of rifles
+and there was much loss of life on both sides. This war ended with the
+utter crushing of Maleuw and his army, and since then the Makateese
+have never threatened the peace of the Transvaal. The final battle was
+the storming of Maleuw's kraal, which was a veritable fortress on the
+top of a steep hill about five hundred feet high.
+
+The hill is now known as "Maleuwkop," in memory of the old "Lion." It
+was practically impregnable to a native army using only savage
+weapons. The "palace" proper was on the top of the hill and was
+entirely surrounded by walls of thorn trees and prickly-pear cactus.
+These thorn trees are most formidable, the thorns being about three
+inches long and sharp as needles. The Boers call them "haakensteek,"
+which is translated into "catch-and-stick." The British call them
+"wait-a-bit" thorns, and under either name they are equally dangerous.
+
+Outside the thorn wall there was a row of huts in which the picked
+warriors of Maleuw lived. Below the huts came another thorn wall and
+another row of huts. There were eight or ten such settlements, each
+guarded by its own wall. I have heard many tales of the battle, which
+lasted all day. Finally the white men broke through the various thorn
+walls, and that was the end of the Makateese peril. My father in
+telling of the fight has often said, "If we had had one
+field-gun--only a little one--we could have blown 'The Lion' out of
+his lair and saved many lives."
+
+Shortly after this war I was born at Rietvlei. I was the youngest of
+ten sons and spent my entire childhood without white playmates, except
+for my sister, Ellen, always my favorite. One of my earliest
+recollections is of seeing King Jafta when he paid ceremonial visits
+to my father. Under the conditions upon which the Boers agreed to help
+him against the Makateese, Jafta had ceded certain rich territories to
+Oom Paul Kruger. This land President Kruger sold to my father, who
+made an agreement with Jafta whereby the savage but now
+king-in-reduced-circumstances was allowed to remain in possession for
+a certain length of time. It was in connection with this agreement
+that Jafta would visit Rietvlei at certain intervals.
+
+I was only a little child then, but I can remember the fallen king
+well. Owing to his lack of power he could not make much of a showing,
+but it was necessary that he maintain his kingly dignity on these
+visits. He would be accompanied by the last of his officers and a
+small impi, or regiment, and my father would treat with him exactly as
+though he were the powerful chief of former times. Jafta remembered
+this later and repaid us by giving us valuable assistance during the
+Boer War, at the time when the British were overrunning our lands.
+
+The ceremonies attending Jafta's visits were always about the same.
+His courier would come ahead to announce his arrival, and my father
+would send word that he was pleased to see him and that his party
+should approach. Then Jafta, entirely naked except for an old silk hat
+my father had given him, would stride into the garden and when my
+father came out of the house would make an oration. My father would
+listen most respectfully and then would reply, always addressing the
+deposed king as "Nkoos," which has the same meaning to our kaffirs as
+"Your Majesty the King" has to the average Britisher.
+
+The silk hat was very important in Jafta's eyes. It meant much more
+than a mere personal adornment. My father always wears silk hats, even
+when traveling about the farm, and Jafta attached much significance to
+the one he wore and always guarded it most carefully. In fact, one of
+the greatest honors he could confer on any of his officers was to make
+one of them official guardian of the hat when he was not wearing it.
+This was the savage conception of the coveted post of "Keeper of the
+Crown Jewels" that is found in some present-day monarchies.
+
+However, Jafta finally came on more evil days. Owing to certain
+outside influences which were brought to bear upon him and to which he
+acceded, it became necessary to take severe measures, and he and his
+small band of followers were removed from the territory my father had
+loaned them. This was rather sad, because this land had been the site
+of the royal kraal of the Mapors since time immemorial.
+
+Nevertheless, we have continued to employ Mapors on the farm and have
+a number of families there now. My old nurse was a Mapor woman. She
+was faithfulness personified, and I led her a merry dance. Her only
+garment was a loin cloth made of a duiker skin, and on account of her
+scant clothing my older brothers nick-named her "Jass," which means
+"overcoat." Jass was the mother of several little Mapors, the scars on
+her forehead showing their number. Like all the other savages in the
+Transvaal, the Mapors practice scarification to a great extent. The
+women are scarred either on the forehead or breasts, while the men are
+entitled to a scar on the forehead for each enemy they have killed.
+
+Until I was sent to boarding-school in Grahamstown, that is, until I
+was well into my teens, my only companions were little kaffir boys. My
+best pal was Sibijaan, whose name means "The Skunk," and even today he
+is my body servant when I am at home. How we came to possess him is
+illustrative of conditions in the district surrounding Rietvlei.
+
+Sibijaan and two other little kaffirs were brought to our home early
+one morning by a neighbor of ours who had captured them on our
+property. It seems they belonged to some tribe that had recently been
+wiped out by the Zulus and had been fleeing north to get away from the
+death that caught their people. I have never seen so miserable a trio
+as these poor little natives. They were almost starved and were
+unutterably dirty. In addition, they were in a state of most pitiable
+terror. They regarded the white men with bulging eyes and seemed only
+to want a place to hide.
+
+Since they had been captured on our farm, they belonged to us. My
+mother was at home at the time, and the neighbor and she had a pretty
+argument as to the disposal of the captives. I listened to all of it,
+keeping one eye on the little boys and wondering how I would feel if I
+were in their place.
+
+Finally my mother agreed that the neighbor should have the largest of
+the three, since he was big enough to be of some use in herding cattle
+and sheep. The two little fellows were to belong to us, and subsequent
+events proved that we had much the best of the bargain. The one taken
+by our neighbor soon escaped, while our captives quickly became
+devoted to us and are with us yet. The elder of the two was Sibijaan,
+and my mother gave him to me for my own servant and playmate. Several
+of my brothers happened to be spending a few days at the farm at this
+time and they gave Sibijaan his name. Dick did the naming when he
+said, "The little nigger would make a skunk blush with envy. Let's
+call him The Skunk!"
+
+Sibijaan and I soon had definite tasks assigned to us. On a Boer farm
+no one rests--all have their work, even to the women and children. We
+were sent out to mind the sheep, of which my father had thousands, and
+were given about a dozen other little kaffirs as assistants. I was
+about seven years old at this time, big and strong for my age.
+
+During those years there was a great lack of traders in our section of
+the Transvaal. This was due to the continuous wars in which the native
+tribes fought one another and now and then raided a Boer farm. Traders
+had been killed and their goods stolen, and none ever stopped at the
+Valley of Reeds. This meant that my father had to outfit expeditions
+and make the long journey to the coast and back again, if we were to
+have any of the civilized necessities or luxuries.
+
+Our neighbors would join in these expeditions, and often there would
+be a score of ox-wagons and several score Boers in the parties. I
+remember these expeditions well for many reasons--my mother used to
+spend anxious months during my father's absence and about this time
+there was an expedition which brought me my first pair of trousers.
+These, in turn, were the cause of my receiving an injury to one of my
+eyes from which I never fully recovered. My father had been away for
+seven months this time and we had begun to fear that hostile natives
+had attacked the caravan and done him some harm. Many and many such an
+outfit had been wiped out by the Zulus, Makateese, or other hostile
+tribes, and there never was any assurance that the few rifles of the
+Boers could stop the rush of the savage impis.
+
+On this occasion Sibijaan and I were minding a small herd of sheep on
+the little plateau that overlooks the heart of Rietvlei. We were quite
+busy trying to drive the flock to a better feeding-ground when
+Sibijaan suddenly stopped and listened.
+
+"Strangers coming!" he shouted. "I smell oxen and wagons. White men
+coming up the Rietvlei!"
+
+We looked in the direction he indicated and saw a cloud of dust
+creeping along the rough road. A second later a man in a silk hat,
+riding a familiar horse, emerged from the dust. Even at that distance
+I could see the rifle across his saddle. It was Slim Gert O'Neil, my
+father.
+
+Sibijaan and I, followed by all the other little kaffirs, raced to the
+wagons, where my father swung me on his horse and greeted me most
+affectionately. A few moments later occurred the first really great
+event of my life--I received my first trousers! My father took me back
+to one of the wagons and presented me with a stout pair of corduroys.
+I was overjoyed and danced up and down, Sibijaan and the other little
+savages joining me, as though at a celebration. Now, I felt, at last I
+am a real white man, and the distance between my black playmates and
+myself seemed to become immense.
+
+A little later I had slipped into the trousers and was proudly
+marching at the head of my little impi. We saw the wagons into the
+home kraal and then went back to our sheep. I was the hero of the hour
+among my playmates, and this led to the injury that has affected my
+eye ever since.
+
+Sibijaan, who had always shared with me the leadership of our impi,
+lost caste when I donned the trousers and instinctively became the
+kaffir. This hurt him, and late in the afternoon he made me the
+following proposition:
+
+"Klein Baas (meaning 'Little Boss')," he said, in his pathetic
+earnestness forgetting to address me by my native name, "Mzaan
+Bakoor," "you have been wearing the trousers all day. Don't you think
+it is my turn to wear them? We are both indunas (leaders) of our impi;
+it is not right that one should be better than the other. Let me wear
+the trousers until sundown and show our men that we are
+brothers-in-arms!"
+
+This seemed reasonable to me. Sibijaan and I had shared our joys and
+woes for several years and there was no reason for my refusing him the
+honor of wearing the wonderful corduroys. We changed. I put on his
+beads and he got into my corduroys. Then came a perfect exhibition of
+the kaffir temperament. Sibijaan became insufferably arrogant. He gave
+orders to our impi, and for a moment I thought he was going to try and
+command me. The more he lorded it over the others, the more sullen and
+angered they became.
+
+Of course the inevitable happened. Several of the little lads demanded
+that they be allowed their turn at wearing the trousers, the badge of
+authority, as it were. Sibijaan refused.
+
+"No, no, you cannot wear them!" he shouted. "Now I am a man; I am
+almost white! I am a man and you are little boys! Who am I that I
+should take notice of such dirt?"
+
+But he did. This last insult was too much. The indignant lads attacked
+Sibijaan, and in a second there was a squirming mass of black legs,
+arms, and bodies, with my precious trousers in danger of destruction.
+We all had assegais, or short stabbing spears, and regardless of these
+I dashed into the melee. Death or wounds were little things compared
+to the loss of those trousers.
+
+When the fight was over I had been stabbed in the eye, but I had the
+trousers! Practically every boy had at least one wound, and one of the
+little fellows died before we got him back to the house where he could
+have attention. Owing to lack of proper medical care my eye was
+allowed to get well without expert attention and will always show the
+effects of this trouser-fight. From then on, however, I wore the
+trousers.
+
+I shall always remember my father's comment on this happening. He
+asked me how the row had started and who had stabbed the boy to death.
+It was practically impossible to determine the latter, and I explained
+why. He listened in his quiet way and then gave me a talking to.
+
+"Yours is the guilt for the death of that boy," he said. "You forgot
+you were a Boer and lowered yourself to the level of a Mapor! When you
+gave Sibijaan the trousers you became as the dirt under his feet.
+White men wear clothes; kaffirs go naked. Does my son, the son of Slim
+Gert O'Neil, want to be a nigger?"
+
+Only in one other way did Sibijaan threaten my supremacy as the
+undisputed leader of our impi. This was due to his extraordinary knack
+in handling clay in the making of models of all kinds.
+
+Not far from the house, along the bank of the river, there was a large
+clay-bank. I established a toy factory there and we made all sorts of
+clay toys, including idols, oxen, horses, and models of everything we
+handled in our daily life. To make it a contest Sibijaan and I, with
+our followers, used to compete with Klaas and his in the excellency of
+our models. My sister, Ellen, was the judge. Klaas, by the way, was
+the other little kaffir who was captured at the same time our neighbor
+brought Sibijaan to us.
+
+Klaas would make a number of things, and his followers would duplicate
+them. Then he would challenge us to do better, and we would get to
+work. Many and many a day we spent in this toy factory, and the
+competition was keen. Soon, however, Sibijaan began to outstrip all of
+us in the excellency of his models. He was so much better at the play
+than I was that I soon found myself ashamed to place my models against
+his.
+
+I found myself again in danger of losing caste and soon hit upon an
+idea that saved my face. Now the Boers are a deeply religious people.
+In our home we always had morning and evening prayers and the fact
+that we were scores of miles from the nearest church was the only
+reason that we did not attend one. Not long before the toy factory
+began to be a sore spot with me, a minister of the Dutch church had
+visited Rietvlei. He was visiting the outlying districts of the
+Transvaal and performing marriages and christenings. Naturally, the
+minister held services, the most interesting part being the sermon. He
+spoke with great force and many gestures, all of them most emphatic.
+Like all the Boers, he was bearded and had shaggy brows. I found his
+sermon most entertaining, although I understood little of what he said.
+
+However, the sermon gave me an idea. I decided I would be a minister
+and the very next day commenced preaching. There was a ruined kraal,
+formerly the residence of a long-dead cannibal chief, on a little hill
+near home. I summoned Sibijaan, Klaas, and all the others of our impi
+to attend services there, and then proceeded to deliver a loud
+harangue to them. As I spoke in Dutch, with now and then a Mapor
+phrase, they did not understand much of what I said, but I made up for
+this by my forceful delivery. The natives are never more happy than
+when delivering an oration, the words illustrated with full-arm
+gestures, and I found my audience most appreciative. Religious
+services as I conducted them appealed to the savage mind, and
+Sibijaan's superiority as an artist faded to nothing.
+
+Shortly after the minister's visit, my uncle, Oom Tuys Grobler, came
+to stay with us for a time. He had come from Swaziland and brought
+wondrous tales of battles there. I do not remember what war was going
+on, but Oom Tuys made us believe that war was the chief occupation of
+the Swazis. He used to while away the long evenings by telling me
+about King Buno and his mother, Queen Labotsibeni. To my childish mind
+Buno appeared as the embodiment of all things savage and ruthless,
+while his mother was not much better. I was fired with the desire to
+visit Swaziland and see the great King Buno, and I asked Oom Tuys to
+take me with him on his next trip. He did not refuse, but tried to
+discourage me by relating weird stories of how white boys were
+sacrificed and eaten by the Swazi warriors. These tales did not
+impress me very much, since I felt that I would be safe with my uncle,
+who was known throughout the Transvaal as the only Boer King Buno
+trusted.
+
+These tales of battle inspired Sibijaan, Klaas, and myself with
+military ardor, and soon we prepared to play the game of war. This was
+only the play of little black boys led by a white, but out of it came
+my native name. I am called "Mzaan Bakoor" by all the natives of our
+section of the Transvaal. The name means "He of the Great Ears," or
+"He Who Hears Everything." How I earned the name illustrates our
+method of warfare.
+
+Klaas would lead one force, and Sibijaan and myself the other. Our
+weapons were long reeds and pellets of clay. The pellets would be
+fixed on the end of the reed and thrown with a full-arm swing. They
+would travel like a stone from a sling, and after a short time we
+became very proficient in their use. We could hit our target more
+times than not, and I well remember that one of these clay pellets
+made a dangerous missile.
+
+The battle would start at long range, and sometimes would continue for
+hours before we got to grips. When we were satisfied with the
+long-range execution, we would rush together and attack one another
+with our hands. Sibijaan invented the method followed in this
+close-range fighting. Adversaries would pair off, each grasping the
+other by the ears. Then would ensue an ear-pulling match which was
+only decided when one of the warriors cried quits. Because I seemed
+able to stand any amount of this torture, they called me "Mzaan
+Bakoor," and the name has been mine ever since. This method of
+ear-pulling was another tribute to Sibijaan's cunning, for both his
+ears had been bitten off in the trouser-fight and it was practically
+impossible for any one to hang on to the remains!
+
+In addition to herding the sheep, we boys were in charge of a herd of
+about two hundred little calves. Our chief work with these was to
+prevent them getting to their mothers, the milch cows of the farm.
+Each morning and evening the calves were allowed to spend half an hour
+with their mothers, but the rest of the time they had to go without
+milk.
+
+Milking time was always a busy period for us. The cows were kept in
+kraals, or open enclosures, and each morning we would have to catch
+them for the milkers. This was done with a rope-loop on the end of a
+long stick. When the cow was captured the rope would be passed around
+a post, the cow being drawn in and securely tied. The suckling calf
+was then brought to its mother, and this soothes the animal. As soon
+as the cow was quiet, her hinds legs and tail were tied together and
+she was ready for milking.
+
+The milker would get ready, and then we would have to drive the calf
+away and keep it away with a long stick until the milking was
+finished. It was all a primitive and strenuous performance, but these
+Afrikander cattle are very wild and cannot be handled.
+
+Another busy period for us would be during the sheep-shearing season.
+The sheep are divided into lots and classes, being ear-marked, and it
+used to be our work to keep them together and make ourselves generally
+useful. Another duty which fell to us was the leading of the ox-teams,
+for, in fact, the boys of my impi could be used for every service not
+requiring the strength of a man.
+
+During all these busy boyhood days I lived practically the outdoor
+life of a savage. My early education was given me by my mother and my
+father's private secretary, an Englishman with a university training.
+I was quick to learn my lessons, chiefly because success meant speedy
+escape to the wild pastimes of the little savages who were my
+companions. Practically all our sports had to do with war and the
+hunt, so that I grew up to regard death as only an incident in the
+life of a warrior and not an event to be feared or worried about.
+
+However, on my first visit to Buno, then king of Swaziland, I saw
+death in a form that shocked me by its needless brutality and utter
+wastefulness.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III
+
+My desire to visit King Buno--How I won the trip on a bet--A Boer race
+meet--"Black Hand Tom," the hope of Rietvlei--Klaas's ride to save his
+skin--Father gives permission for my visit--Belfast celebrates the
+Boer victory.
+
+
+My absolute conviction that no one in the world owned a faster horse
+than "Black Hand Tom," my father's favorite, earned me my first visit
+to Swaziland. This was during the summer after the Great Drought, when
+the bloody rule of King Buno had become the shame of South Africa.
+
+Day after day I had heard tales about Swaziland that fed my desire to
+go and see some of these things, and Oom Tuys never forgot to make my
+hair stand on end with his stories about his friend, Buno, and his
+warriors. I was just in my teens and the desire to visit Swaziland was
+the one thing I lived for. Whenever Tuys came to visit my father I
+would get him aside and beg him to take me with him on his next trip.
+Indeed, I kept after him until I became a nuisance. Each time he would
+promise, and then find a good reason for putting me off until some
+time later. His evasions only whetted my appetite for Swaziland, but
+it was a kind fate, combined with a little boy's abiding faith in his
+father, that finally won the day for me.
+
+Like all the Boers, my father was a great horse fancier and took pride
+in several fast animals that he had bred at Rietvlei. Looking back, I
+realize that these must have been very good horses, their forebears
+being imported stock of the best European blood.
+
+It was in the summer of 1897 that my father arranged a race meet at
+Belfast, about eight miles from our home. This was the nearest town,
+and the race was to be the crowning event of a sort of festival
+lasting several days. Previously my father had caused the word to get
+abroad that he had several of the fastest horses in the Transvaal, but
+that he was keeping them under cover, hoping for a chance to win some
+races at large odds. Of course all Boers are good sportsmen and keenly
+interested in racing; in addition, there were a number of sporting
+Englishmen who noted the fact that Slim Gert O'Neil was training
+horses in the Valley of Reeds.
+
+The result was what my father anticipated. Word was sent to him by the
+sporting crowd in Johannesburg that they did not believe that any of
+his horses were "worth the powder to blow them to hell"--as the
+message was delivered by Oom Tuys. My father took this to heart and
+sent back word that the Johannesburgers were invited to bring their
+race horses, "if they had any worthy of the name," to the race meet at
+Belfast. There was a little further correspondence, which bordered on
+insult on the part of the Johannesburgers, and the arrangements were
+completed for the meet.
+
+[Illustration: SWAZILAND
+
+Drawn by Dr. Owen Rowe O'Neil]
+
+[Illustration: SECTION OF SOUTH AFRICA
+
+Showing Swaziland and its relative position to other states]
+
+My father sent Mapor and Swazi runners to all the Boer farms within a
+week's trek of Rietvlei, announcing the races and inviting his friends
+to "come and see what a country-bred can do against the pick of the
+Transvaal and Orange Free State." It was a great day for all us little
+fellows when we moved on Belfast. All but a few old women left
+Rietvlei, and we arrived in Belfast to find thousands of strangers
+thronging the town.
+
+Boer farmers had trekked in from almost a hundred miles away, and I
+have never seen so many great bearded men in my life. With their great
+slouch hats and heavy boots, they could be seen swinging along the
+streets in all directions. There were literally thousands of kaffirs,
+Mapors, Swazis, Makateese, and Zulus, who belonged to the various
+parties of Boers and who kept close to them as they wandered about
+Belfast.
+
+Some of the native tribes were at war at that time, I remember, and
+there was some fear that there might be an outbreak in the town. This
+fear was quelled, however, when word was passed that the first kaffir
+who raised a hand would be shot on sight by the nearest Boer. He would
+have been, too, because the Boers never hesitate when dealing with the
+blacks. Always our people have been firm in their dealings with the
+natives, with the result that they have a wholesome respect for us. It
+is the English, newly arrived in the Transvaal, who make all the
+trouble with the kaffirs. Particularly do the English and American
+missionaries create dissension among them. They give the kaffirs
+mistaken ideas about their importance in the scheme of things and lead
+them to believe that they are as good as white people. Taking it all
+in all, they have created more trouble than they have done good. The
+missionaries seldom change their teachings, but the Englishmen soon
+wake up and after they have been in our country for about a year know
+how to treat the natives.
+
+There was no trouble in Belfast, although it was said that there were
+several combats outside the town in which about a score of blacks were
+killed and wounded.
+
+Our arrival for the races must have been quite an impressive event. My
+father on his great horse, wearing his silk hat, led the procession.
+Then all his sons and several of the girls followed, on horses also,
+and then came my mother in a light road-wagon. After her came our
+horses, led by Mapors, and behind them came several hundred of our
+retainers, all decked out in their festival costumes and carrying
+their short spears and knob-kerries, or fighting clubs.
+
+Oom Tuys met us at the edge of the town. He was riding a great roan
+horse and was accompanied by a number of father's friends. From his
+gestures I knew that he was excited, and I slyly pressed my horse
+forward until I could hear what he was saying.
+
+"The Johannesburgers have brought their best," he told father. "Slim
+Gert, you will have to have all the luck in the world to beat their
+horses. Never have I seen better! They have also brought much money
+and are waiting for you to bet. Will you bet with them? I advise you
+not to. They have the best jockeys in the Transvaal, too!"
+
+"We shall see; we shall see," was all father would say.
+
+"They are at the hotel and they wait for you," Oom Tuys went on. "I
+told them that I would bring you to them."
+
+My father seemed to start at this, and I saw him look sharply at Tuys.
+Then the color mounted in his cheek.
+
+"Who are they that I should go to them?" he asked indignantly. "Why
+should an O'Neil of Rietvlei wait on these common gamblers from
+Johannesburg? If they want to see me, let them come to my house!"
+
+My father had a house in Belfast where he transacted business and
+often spent the night when it was too late or too rainy to return to
+the Valley of Reeds.
+
+Soon we reached the center of the town and found thousands waiting to
+welcome us. All the Boers knew Slim Gert O'Neil and his sons, and we
+received an ovation. We passed through the town to father's house, and
+the horses were placed in the small kraal at the rear. He looked them
+over, Oom Tuys also being a keenly interested observer, and then went
+into the house. We boys remained outside, and it was one of the
+proudest moments of my life. So proud was I that I felt impelled to
+tell all the town boys what I really thought about father's horses and
+in particular about the speed of "Black Hand Tom."
+
+"He is so fast," I assured them, "that he outruns bullets. Only the
+lightning can catch him, and I am not any too sure about that!"
+
+Some of the boys jeered at my claim, and thereupon ensued a small
+battle. My impi backed me up, and it began to look as though some one
+would be badly hurt when Oom Tuys dashed out of the house and
+scattered us.
+
+"Mzaan Bakoor, you little devil!" he shouted, catching me by the ears.
+"Why do you make so much fight? Why do you tell such lies? 'Black Hand
+Tom' will only eat the dust of these Johannesburg horses. They are
+race horses!"
+
+Now this was sacrilege. To hear my uncle, the great "White King of
+Swaziland," say such a thing gave me such a shock that I forgot to
+kick his shins for tweaking my ears. Then came my inspiration! Brought
+up among sportsmen, I seized my chance.
+
+"If 'Black Hand Tom' is so slow, then you bet against him. I dare
+you!" I said.
+
+"Of course I will. I am no fool!" Tuys assured me.
+
+"All right, Oom Tuys, then you bet with me first," I said. "If 'Black
+Hand Tom' wins his race, you must take me with you to see King Buno
+the next time you go. I dare you to make your promise good. If
+father's horse loses, I'll never ask you to take me to Swaziland again!"
+
+Tuys let me go and hesitated a moment. I taunted him and dared him to
+take my bet, and he finally agreed.
+
+"If 'Black Hand Tom' wins, you leave for Swaziland with me in two
+weeks," he promised.
+
+We went into the house and found several of the Johannesburg gamblers
+there, waiting to talk to my father. They were drinking gin and
+whiskey, and I remember marveling at their wonderful clothes. Never
+before had I seen such waistcoats or such cravats, and their great,
+soft, light-colored hats were a revelation to me. I particularly
+noticed that they all smoked long black cigars, wore huge diamonds,
+and talked in loud coarse voices.
+
+Soon father's secretary came into the room. In his quiet English way
+he told them that his master did not care to see them that night and
+would talk to them in the morning. The races were to be next day and
+the gamblers left the house quite disgruntled. As they went out of the
+door I heard one of them say, "Never mind, we'll get his money
+to-morrow!"
+
+Shortly before prayers that night I told my father what this man had
+said, but he only smiled in his dry way.
+
+"Don't worry, Owen, my lad," he said. "Your father is not always such
+a fool as he might look. To-morrow night may have another tale to tell!"
+
+However, I went to bed much troubled that night. We seemed such
+country people compared to these flashy horsemen from the great city
+of Johannesburg. I tried to sleep though quite unhappy at the thought
+that father might be mistaken, but his quiet confidence somehow
+reassured me to a certain extent. My father was a very great man to
+me--the greatest in the world--great even when compared to Oom Paul
+Kruger, our idol. It seemed impossible that his horse should not be
+the best and, comforted by my faith, I finally fell asleep.
+
+Oh, the glories of the next day, the day of the races! Even before
+breakfast we boys trudged to the race track and watched several horses
+working out. Two of them were from Johannesburg, and even their
+blankets failed to hide the fact that they were fast. In addition to
+their white trainers, each horse seemed to have almost a dozen kaffirs
+in attendance, and all about the track were hundreds of black and
+white men watching the trials.
+
+On all sides of the track, also, could be seen the wagons of the Boer
+farmers who had trekked in to the meet. Slender spirals of smoke were
+rising from each group, showing that breakfast was being prepared.
+There must have been hundreds of wagons, and the whole territory about
+the race track was one great camping-ground.
+
+We returned to the house to find father and Oom Tuys out in the kraal
+carefully examining our horses. I remember how father ran his hands
+lovingly over the sleek body of "Black Hand Tom." The horse would
+allow few to approach him, but he nuzzled my father's hand, as though
+to say, "I'm fit for the race of my life. I will not fail Slim Gert!"
+
+After breakfast, instead of taking our horses to the track, my father
+had them worked out along the road which ran by the house. Later I
+learned that this was a disappointment to the gamblers from
+Johannesburg. They had hoped to see "Black Hand Tom" on the track
+before the race, so as to get a line on him.
+
+Shortly afterward my father and Oom Tuys rode over to the track, and
+we all trooped after. Early as it was, crowds were beginning to gather
+and I never saw so many people in my life. I was surprised at the
+number of white men there. I knew that there were millions of blacks
+in our country, but was greatly astonished to see so many of our color.
+
+Father rode among the wagons surrounding the track, greeting his
+friends and everywhere receiving a joyful welcome. Each one asked him
+about his great horse, and his answer invariably was, "He is ready to
+do the very best he can. The rest is with God!" This seemed to satisfy
+the Boers, and I know it was all I wanted to hear. I immediately
+announced to all the lads with me that the race was as good as won.
+
+Oom Tuys took occasion to remind me of our bet and chaffed me, saying,
+"Now you will never see King Buno!" This made me wrathy. It was
+unspeakable that he should doubt that father's horse could do anything
+but win!
+
+While at the track I remembered a little talk I had planned to have
+with Klaas. Owing to an uncanny knack with horses, the little beggar
+had been trained as our jockey and was to ride "Black Hand Tom" in the
+great race. Sibijaan and I returned to the house and looked him up. We
+found him chumming with the horse, and called him out of the stable.
+
+Now Klaas was smaller and lighter than either Sibijaan or myself and
+stood no chance with us in combat of any sort. We took firm hold of
+him--Sibijaan by his arms and I by his ears--and then I delivered my
+ultimatum:
+
+"You see all these white men, Klaas," I said. "They are thieves. They
+have come here to steal all the Ou Baas's (Old Boss's) money. You've
+got to ride your best to-day. 'Black Hand Tom' is the best horse.
+He'll win if you ride him right. If you lose, Sibijaan and I will kill
+you! Won't we, Sibijaan?"
+
+My fellow conspirator most emphatically agreed. He made motions that
+illustrated a neat and expeditious way of cutting Klaas's throat and
+of visiting other unpleasant deaths upon him. Klaas was properly
+impressed.
+
+"If I don't win the race I am willing to die!" he said, and with this
+understanding we returned to the track. I found my father surrounded
+by the Johannesburg gamblers, and squeezed my way into the group to
+find much betting going on. With Boer shrewdness, father was demanding
+and getting good odds. He took the stand that "Black Hand Tom" had
+never been raced and had never won a race, while the horses of the
+others were tried campaigners of great reputation. The gamblers
+grumbled, but finally gave odds, until father stood to win or lose
+thousands of pounds.
+
+Finally race time came. I suppose there never was such a crowd as
+swarmed about that track. It was about three quarters of a mile
+around, and the entire circumference was lined with people. The whites
+were all grouped about the start and finish line, while all the
+remaining space was one deep belt of black men. There were literally
+tens of thousands, among them many women.
+
+The distance of the race was four times around the track. Excitement
+was intense when the horses came out on the track. It was a perfect
+day, the sky cloudless and the air like diamonds in its sparkling
+clearness. "Black Hand Tom" was the last horse out, but the minute he
+appeared, with Klaas perched on his back and all decked out in the
+O'Neil colors, there was a roar from the crowd.
+
+I was at the starting-line, Sibijaan at my side, and we were fairly
+dancing with excitement. A moment later the horses--nine of them--were
+strung out along the line and the starting began. Three attempts were
+made, our horse always being the last over the line. This was criminal
+in my eyes, and both Sibijaan and I shouted threats of sudden death to
+Klaas.
+
+On the fourth try they were off and the race was on. If I live to be
+as old as Queen Labotisibeni, I shall never forget the agony of that
+race! Round and round the horses went, first one and then another in
+front. At the end of the first lap "Black Hand Tom" was last. We
+shouted ourselves hoarse, hurling imprecations at Klaas. At the end of
+the second lap our horse was next to last, and then Sibijaan and I
+knew exactly how we would despatch Klaas as soon as we could get hold
+of him.
+
+Then came the sensation of the day, of the age! At the first turn of
+the third lap "Black Hand Tom" swung wide and began to pass the other
+horses. One by one he caught them and went by. Each time he passed one
+the crowd fairly roared its head off. As they swept by on the
+beginning of the last lap there were only two horses ahead of ours,
+and they seemed tiring. At the first turn "Black Hand Tom" passed one
+and then, on the back stretch, went by the other! The crowd fairly
+split the heavens. A moment later "Black Hand Tom," the greatest horse
+in the world, tore over the winning line a good three lengths in the
+lead! Absolute pandemonium broke loose. I remember catching hold of
+Sibijaan and dancing up and down like a lunatic. Every one seemed to
+be doing the same thing.
+
+We tore through the mob to where our horse stood entirely surrounded
+by crazy Boers and as many natives as could get close. There was
+father, quiet and self-contained, with his silk hat on his head at the
+usual angle. He was as undisturbed as though nothing had happened and
+seemed more anxious to get out of the crowd than anything else. From
+all sides his friends crowded in on him, shaking his hand and patting
+the great horse. Klaas, still in the saddle, wore the air of a
+conquering hero, and some enthusiastic Boer had presented him with a
+lot of money which he held closely clutched to his thin stomach.
+
+Father spied me and smiled the ghost of a smile. He reached out his
+hand, and when I took it said, "Well, you have won your trip to Buno's
+kraal!" This was the first inkling I had that he knew about the bet,
+and later I learned that he had agreed to my going because he felt my
+faith in him and "Black Hand Tom" deserved the trip.
+
+That night there was a glorious celebration in Belfast. Great fires
+were lighted in the streets and much gin and whiskey was consumed. The
+kaffirs danced until the small hours and their chants filled the air.
+We boys were part of it all, and Klaas was the hero of the hour. In
+fact, so great a hero was he that Sibijaan and I were glad to bask in
+his reflected glory. The little beggar fully enjoyed his hour of
+triumph and it was well he did, for we soon took him down a few pegs
+when we got him back to Rietvlei.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV
+
+I leave for my first visit to Swaziland--Mother warns me about Oom
+Tuys--Why the Boers paid tribute to King Buno--Queen Labotsibeni, the
+brains of Swaziland--Buno's visit to Oom Paul Kruger--Our reception in
+Swaziland--Ezulweni, the "Valley of Heaven"--Buno's rifle--Sibijaan
+and I explore by night.
+
+
+About a fortnight later Oom Tuys and I left for Swaziland. I shall
+always remember getting ready for the trip. For days and days I added
+to my little outfit, until by the time Oom Tuys was ready to start I
+had accumulated enough dunnage to fill a wagon. When the bluff old man
+looked it over he turned to my mother and said, "Well, you are going
+to lose your son. Owen is going to spend the rest of his life in
+Swaziland; he is taking enough things to last him for the next hundred
+years!"
+
+Then he calmly sorted out my kit, leaving me about one tenth of what I
+had intended taking along.
+
+"We travel light, my boy," he said. "We travel fast and take but one
+wagon, and that a little one."
+
+A day later we were off. Our caravan consisted of Tuys and me on
+horses, a light cart drawn by six mules, and half a dozen kaffir
+servants. Of course Sibijaan went with us, and was elected to the job
+of driving the mules. The other boys were foot-passengers, their job
+being to keep the mules moving and do the camp work.
+
+My mother knew Oom Tuys of old and gave me a serious talking to the
+night before we left.
+
+"My son," she said, putting her arms about me, "you must not follow
+Oom Tuys too closely. He is wild and sometimes as bad as King Buno
+himself. You will see many things that we Boers would not permit here,
+and you must not take these things too much to heart. Remember that
+you are an O'Neil, and take good care of yourself!" Then she kissed me
+good-by with a fervor that was quite unusual. We Boers are an
+unemotional people--that is, on the surface.
+
+Oom Tuys's periodical visits to King Buno had always been a mystery to
+me. I had heard that they concerned some sort of a tribute to the
+savage king, but my father never encouraged my requests for details.
+"That is Oom Tuys's business," he would say. "Ask him why he is the
+servant of Buno!"
+
+I did, just as soon as we were well on our way. However, I did not use
+father's words. Even big men hesitated to take liberties with Tuys,
+and I was only a boy. It was a wonderful day, and as we rode across
+the veldt into Swaziland Tuys told me the whole story of how he became
+known as "The White King of Swaziland."
+
+"Mzaan Bakoor, for I shall call you that while we are in Swaziland,
+just as you shall call me 'Nkoos'," he said, "I go each moon to pay
+King Buno the tribute. Oom Paul sends me, and I always take two
+thousand gold sovereigns and quantities of gin and champagne."
+
+This explained the mysterious cases in the wagon, the contents of
+which I had not yet dared to ask about.
+
+"Buno is a very great man," Tuys went on. "He is a great king and has
+as many warriors as the blades of veldt grass. His impis are
+countless, and just recently he has married Tzaneen, a princess of the
+Zulus.
+
+"Here is how it happened that we Boers must pay him tribute. His
+father, Umbandine, built up the Swazi power until he had enough
+warriors to be dangerous to us and to all the surrounding tribes. Even
+the Zulus feared him. Now Buno, guided and advised by his mother,
+Queen Labotisibeni, has kept the Swazi impis up to the greatest
+possible fighting strength, and he is the one savage chief we Boers
+have to reckon with. He is my friend, and Oom Paul depends upon me to
+keep him satisfied and prevent him from making war on our people.
+According to the agreement between Oom Paul and Buno, we pay Buno the
+gold and gin each month, and I am the one who brings it to him.
+Lately, however, he has objected to so much gold and wants more gin.
+Buno says he can only look at the gold, but he can drink the gin. This
+time I am taking an extra supply of gin."
+
+Tuys explained to me the politics of Swaziland and seemed to think
+that Queen Labotisibeni was the brains behind King Buno's
+administration. The wanton cruelties of which Buno was guilty were
+contrary to the wishes of his mother, but she only mildly protested
+against them, since they helped to maintain the king's authority.
+According to Tuys, death was the punishment for all offences, and Buno
+often butchered his people for no reason at all.
+
+A short time before our visit to Swaziland, King Buno had gone to
+Pretoria to see Oom Paul. For some time Buno had been sending
+complaints and objections about various matters to the President, and
+Tuys would carry these to Pretoria. Finally Oom Paul became
+exasperated and commanded Tuys to bring Buno to him.
+
+"Bring Buno here," said Oom Paul, "and I will talk to him like a Dutch
+uncle. We pay too much now, and if he does not soon behave himself, I
+shall send a commando or two into his country and make a new king in
+Swaziland!"
+
+Buno's visit to Pretoria is a classic in the Transvaal and shows the
+kind of man our old President was. Tuys told Buno that Oom Paul was
+too ill to come to visit him and that he begged that the king of
+Swaziland honor him by coming to Pretoria. It took much persuasion on
+the part of Tuys, for Buno thought he was too important a person to
+visit Oom Paul. Finally Tuys soothed his royal dignity and they
+started out for Pretoria.
+
+It was a remarkable party. Buno took with him ten thousand of the
+picked fighting men of the household troops, and these wore all their
+savage finery. Being of the royal impis, they wore the great white
+headdresses and carried shields with the king's mark emblazoned
+thereon. Their costumes were the last word in savage gorgeousness.
+Each man was armed with the knob-kerrie, assegai, knife, and shield.
+
+At this time the railway from Pretoria to Delagoa Bay was under
+construction and had already reached Middleburg. The party found a
+special train waiting for them at this place and Buno had his own
+private car. None of the Swazis had ever seen a train before and their
+astonishment at the great "iron horse," as they immediately called the
+engine, was almost pathetic. When they first saw the engine, seemingly
+breathing smoke and fire, they were terrified, and Tuys had to
+reassure them to prevent a panic. Then a number wanted to prostrate
+themselves before the engine and worship it, so that it was a most
+difficult thing to prevent their being run over. According to the
+various accounts of these incidents Tuys had his hands full. Buno,
+however, refused to be much impressed with the engine or train and
+complained bitterly because he was not given enough gin.
+
+It was a wonderful sight when the train pulled out of Middleburg.
+Buno, with Tuys and the royal party, was in the private coach behind
+the engine, and the ten thousand warriors were packed in a score of
+open trucks behind. Naturally they all stood, and it was extraordinary
+to see the thousands of savages in full dress, with wonderment and
+fear written on their faces, as the train swept by. The trip lasted
+all night, and when morning came the train pulled into Pretoria. At
+the station a coach and pair of fine horses waited for King Buno and
+Tuys. They got in, and then Tuys's natural deviltry asserted itself.
+He slyly poked the driver in the ribs with his revolver and commanded
+him to drive as fast as he could. A second later they were off at a
+gallop.
+
+[Illustration: THE RESULT OF THE NATIONAL SPORT
+
+Two bulls have been killed by a warrior armed only with a short
+stabbing spear. The bulls are surrounded by a regiment of Swazis with
+spears pointing inward. The bulls become infuriated, and when made as
+angry as possible, the chosen warrior dashes into the arena and
+fights them. He has but one choice--either to kill the bulls or be
+killed by the spears of his comrades-in-arms. Sometimes more than two
+bulls are used, thus making the sport more exciting and the measure of
+the warrior's prowess greater--if he wins. Following the contest, the
+bulls are eaten at a great feast]
+
+[Illustration: INTERIOR OF MILITARY BARRACKS
+
+A warrior making war decorations. Through a peculiar process, hides
+are treated and worked into shape as braid, which they wear cross-wise
+around the waist]
+
+Now the doors of the trucks were not yet opened and the warriors were
+gazing in awe at the station, the largest building they had ever seen.
+Suddenly the cry was raised that their king was being stolen! They
+began throwing themselves out of the trucks, shouting battle-cries and
+brandishing their knob-kerries and assegais. There was a wild rush to
+catch up with the galloping carriage and more than a score of white
+railway employees and officials were killed in the melee.
+
+Mad with fear that they were losing their king, the whole ten thousand
+of them raced down the streets, and Pretoria thought it was being
+captured by the savages. Soon, however, they caught up with the
+carriage, and shortly after fell into orderly array and marched on to
+Oom Paul's house.
+
+The old President had risen early, as he always did, and was sitting
+on the stoop of his simple, flat-roofed home, drinking coffee and
+smoking his pipe. The carriage drove up and the warriors fell into
+regimental formation as Buno and Tuys got out. As they started for the
+little gate the ten thousand men gave the royal salute, their feet
+coming down on the roadway with the sound of thunder, their shrill
+whistle echoing from the low eaves of the house.
+
+Oom Paul did not move from his low chair. Pipe in mouth, he looked
+beyond Tuys and Buno, just as though they had been ordinary kaffirs.
+There was an embarrassing moment--that is, it was embarrassing to the
+visitors--and then the old man slowly took his pipe out of his mouth
+and spoke. I have never heard what he said, but according to accounts
+he made good his threat to talk to Buno "like a Dutch uncle".
+
+"He gave us the very devil," is the way Tuys tells about it. "Oom Paul
+told us both that we were children, and bad children at that! He said
+that he was minded to soundly spank us both, and he was so fierce
+about it that I thought he was going to do it."
+
+The outcome of the interview was that King Buno went home a chastened
+and contrite monarch and there were no more complaints from Swaziland.
+This shows the extraordinary character of Oom Paul and explains why he
+was so highly regarded by all, Boers and English alike.
+
+Trekking with Oom Tuys was a thoroughly delightful adventure. He had
+planned the trip into Swaziland so that at night we made camp at some
+Boer farm, and everywhere he was received with open arms. Each night
+there was a little jollification in which Tuys was the center of
+interest. He always pushed me forward, and the simple Boers made much
+of me, all of them knowing my father and having the highest regard for
+him. Although we traveled fast there was little hardship. It was after
+the rains and the whole veldt was a bright green, with the little
+thorn trees in bloom.
+
+We found the Vaal River fordable and the going was easy. Whenever we
+were unable to reach a farm-house for meals, we fared well on our own
+biltong and rusks. The biltong, so much eaten in the Transvaal, is
+dried beef which is usually cut into strips and chunks and eaten
+without cooking. Rusks are the biscuits all Boers make, and we ate
+well, having enough of both.
+
+Shortly before reaching the Swaziland border we were met by several
+fine looking Swazi warriors. I immediately noted their superiority to
+the kaffirs I had known. They were about six feet tall, perfectly
+proportioned, and carried themselves with a swinging dignity quite
+unusual among the Mapors and other natives.
+
+Oom Tuys introduced me to them and they met me as man to man, giving
+me the same salute they had accorded my uncle. They told Tuys that
+their king was waiting for him and that he had planned a celebration
+in our honor.
+
+"You hear that, Mzaan Bakoor?" Tuys asked. "We are going to be royal
+guests and you will see the real Swaziland. Watch me and do as I do in
+all things, and you shall have much to tell when we get back to
+Rietvlei."
+
+As we came up the wide trail to the border of Swaziland, I saw several
+hundred warriors at the top of the hill. As soon as we came close to
+them they began to wave their knob-kerries and shields. Down the slope
+came the deep bass of their voices as they chanted a welcome, the
+sound being suddenly cut off short as they brought their feet down in
+the heavy stamp they use when dancing. They were our escort--all
+picked men of the household impi--and their leader was a noted warrior
+who was an old friend of Tuys.
+
+After a short halt for this officer to deliver a brief address of
+welcome, Tuys ordered our party to proceed. I noted that he treated
+the officer with scant courtesy, and he explained this by saying,
+"Here I am a king; he is lucky if I even look at him!"
+
+A little later we dropped into the Valley of Heaven. This is really
+the most delightful valley in Swaziland. It is well watered, and
+thousands of the natives have their kraals there. Swaziland is a
+broken country, alternating between veldt of from two to five, and
+even six thousand feet, and there are small rivers everywhere, flowing
+from west to east. Each of these rivers has cut out its own valley,
+but the Valley of Heaven is the most fertile and beautiful of all.
+Trees, sometimes in clumps but more often singly, are found along the
+banks of the rivers and each kraal is practically surrounded by big
+and little ones.
+
+Our progress down the Valley of Heaven was practically a parade. At
+each kraal or village, a village being a collection of kraals, we
+would be greeted by hundreds of warriors and children. The women would
+usually remain in the background, but were quite in evidence. Young as
+I was, I could not help noting that they were the finest looking
+savages I had ever seen. These women have perfectly proportioned
+bodies and stand erect, with their heads thrown back. They are the
+women of a proud nation, and they show it. I particularly noticed
+their splendid shoulders, these and their erect carriage being due to
+carrying all burdens on their heads.
+
+At each village the local chief would offer us tswala, or kaffir beer,
+and we were lucky to be important enough to be able to refuse to
+drink. If we had taken all that was offered, we would have been
+drowned long before the end of the first day in the Valley of Heaven.
+The fact that our escort consisted of picked warriors from the royal
+troops and that Oom Tuys was known to be the intimate of their king
+made it permissible for us to refuse to associate with the little
+chiefs along the line of march.
+
+Camp on the last night before reaching the royal kraal at Zombode was
+pitched in the valley, and we saw the sun set over the plateau on
+which King Buno made his headquarters. After supper that night Oom
+Tuys confided to me a great secret.
+
+"Buno has asked me a thousand times to bring him a rifle," he said,
+"but always I have refused. As you know, the Swazis, like other
+kaffirs, are not allowed to have guns. Death is the punishment we deal
+out to those who sell rifles to these savages. Now Buno has his heart
+set on owning a rifle, and the last time I saw him I promised that I
+would get him one.
+
+"In the cart I have a Mauser with about five thousand cartridges, and
+the outfit is for Buno. You will want to come to Swaziland many times
+in the future, so I am going to make Buno your friend for life. I am
+going to allow you to present the Mauser to him!
+
+"No one will know how he got it and you will be as big a man in
+Swaziland as I am, once you have given the rifle to Buno. Now what do
+you think of your Uncle Tuys?"
+
+Naturally, I was very grateful, since I had already begun to feel the
+lure of Swaziland and dearly wanted to be a little king there myself.
+
+That night was memorable for several reasons. Soon after dark Sibijaan
+and I climbed up the trail a little way and looked up the valley. Here
+and there we could see fires burning at the various kraals and quite
+often the wind brought us the pungent smell of wood-smoke. The sky was
+clear as it only is in South Africa and the stars glittered with all
+the hard brilliance of diamonds. However, we did not remain long
+admiring the beauties of the Valley of Heaven.
+
+Down below us we suddenly saw what seemed to be a dark cloud of men
+coming up the road. Discreetly we hid in the brush along the trail and
+watched them go by. They were warriors in full costume, their faces
+hard and set in the dim light. There was only the sound of their feet
+on the road and their silence was unnerving. The Swazi warrior
+chanting and dancing in the sunlight is awesome enough, but when he
+becomes a silent swift-moving shadow of the night, he is terrifying.
+Particularly is this true when you are only a small boy and know that
+the shadow is fully armed and is deplorably careless with his weapons!
+
+Sibijaan was shaking with terror, and as soon as the shadows passed on
+we started back to camp. Neither of us spoke. We didn't need to. We
+knew that we wanted Oom Tuys and without a word started for him.
+
+A moment later we saw another band of warriors coming swiftly up the
+trail, so again we hid. As we dived into our little camp a third band
+passed. I was very glad to find Oom Tuys smoking by the fire, and for
+the first time in my life I realized that a fire is a friendly thing.
+
+Tuys noted that we had been hurrying and asked the reason. I told him
+about the shadows on the trail.
+
+"It is well that you hid," he said. "It would have been better yet if
+you had not been so foolish as to wander about at night. Don't you
+know that sudden death is always walking abroad at night in Swaziland?
+Have I not told you?"
+
+Then he explained that practically all Swazis travel at night,
+whenever possible, so as to avoid the heat. He said that those we had
+met were going to Zombode, as the king had issued a call for his
+warriors to attend the celebration in our honor. That night I waked
+several times, cold with an unnamed fear, and was comforted by seeing
+the massive bulk of Tuys sleeping nearby. His steady breathing seemed
+a guarantee of safety and I would drift back to sleep feeling that the
+shadows on the trail were far removed from me.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V
+
+Sheba's Breasts and the Place of Execution--Zombode and the royal
+kraal of Queen Labotsibeni--Common and royal ground--We reach King
+Buno's kraal at Lebombo--Gin for the king--Buno, the regal savage--I
+present a rifle to the king--Lomwazi takes me to Labotsibeni--The old
+queen is worried over Tuys's activities--The shooting match with the
+king--Tuys and I manage to miss a few human targets.
+
+
+Next morning we waked to find several hundred more warriors
+surrounding our camp. A more important chief was in command, and when
+Tuys had made a brief but leisurely toilet, he talked to him. Again
+Tuys was given kingly honors, which he accepted with marked
+condescension. This chief informed him that King Buno was waiting for
+him and had sent greetings to "his white brother." Many dramatic
+gestures accompanied this announcement, and I was quite impressed with
+the manner of the chief. He was a fine figure of a savage and had a
+great number of scars on his forehead, showing that he had killed many
+enemies.
+
+We broke camp shortly after and started on the short climb to the top
+of the plateau. With our escort we made a party of about five hundred,
+and I felt very proud to be riding with Oom Tuys at the head of so
+imposing a procession.
+
+When we reached the top, Tuys reined in and pointed across the Valley
+of Heaven to where two rounded peaks rose about a thousand feet above
+the river.
+
+"You see those?" he asked. "Those mountains are Sheba's Breasts and
+are known everywhere in Swaziland. Beyond them is the Place of
+Execution. If you look closely, you can see that sharp cliff to their
+left."
+
+The rounded peaks looked exactly like a woman's breasts and were very
+striking. There are many tales about them and they are supposed to be
+the home of spirits of all kinds. I could see the cliff Tuys spoke of.
+It appeared to be a sheer drop of many feet.
+
+The plateau was much like the high veldt in our country. Except for
+the tall grass and a few rocks raising their rugged tops here and
+there, it was absolutely barren. These rocks look like little black
+islands in a vast rolling sea of dull brown. Back of this are the bare
+mountains, rugged and naked in their rocky barrenness.
+
+We came to a little stream, which appeared to head up in these hills;
+then suddenly a great collection of huts seemed to spring up out of
+the plain. Hundreds of poles projected above them, and soon we saw a
+number of kraals. There were a few patches of trees, their green being
+the only relief from the dull brown of the scene. We seemed to come
+suddenly on the settlement because its huts and kraals were of the
+same color as the grass, which gave them a fine camouflage.
+
+This was Zombode, formerly the royal kraal of King Umbadine.
+
+"Queen Labotsibeni, his royal widow, lives there now," Tuys told me.
+"All Umbadine's other widows live there, too. I think there are about
+twenty of them. When we get close you will find that the big mountain
+behind is already throwing its shadow over the place. It will be
+cooler then."
+
+Soon we came to the shadow and it was very pleasant to get out of the
+scorching sun. This mountain was a sort of natural fort and protected
+Zombode from attacks from the west. East of Zombode was a rolling
+grass-covered plain.
+
+Close to the outlying kraal was a small stream. We did not cross this.
+
+"That marks the line between the common and royal ground," Tuys
+explained. "We will follow it and push on to Lebombo, Buno's kraal. If
+we wished to call on Labotsibeni, we would wait here until we received
+permission to cross this water. Then we would camp on the royal ground
+and she would send for us."
+
+By this time I could see scores of Swazis running out of their kraals
+to inspect us. A chief, accompanied by a score or so of warriors, came
+to meet us. We kept on, and he caught up to us by running. Tuys paid
+no attention to him and advised me to do the same. One of our servants
+told him that "The White King" was going to visit his brother, King
+Buno, and I looked back to see the chief and his men watching us as we
+went on.
+
+About three or four miles farther on, over the same barren brown
+country, we came to another stream. This is about midway between
+Zombode and Lebombo. Lebombo came out of the ground exactly like
+Zombode and was situated in exactly the same way at the foot of a high
+mountain, facing the East. It was simply another Zombode.
+
+"That's where Buno lives," said Tuys. "The big kraal in the center is
+his, and all the little ones belong to his indunas. Each of the
+indunas has a number of wives and is the leader of an impi of about a
+thousand men. King Buno has twenty-six wives and I don't know how many
+children."
+
+As we went on I could see the people coming out to meet us, the small
+boys running swiftly and shouting as they ran. Here also there was a
+little stream separating the common from the royal ground. By the time
+we reached this dividing line several indunas had come to meet us, and
+we forded the water and pitched camp on the royal ground.
+
+Tuys went to the wagon and soon appeared with a quart of gin. This he
+gave to the most imposing of the chiefs, who seemed to be a sort of
+special representative of the king.
+
+"Tell the great king that his white brother comes with presents and
+the tribute," he said. "Tell him that our king, Oom Paul, sends
+greetings and prays that his health is good and that he will live
+forever!"
+
+"Nkoos, it shall be done!" the induna answered, saluting with his
+shield and knob-kerrie.
+
+Then he retired swiftly to the royal kraal.
+
+Less than ten minutes later he came back and said, "The great King
+Buno, ruler of Swaziland and leader of countless warriors, bids you
+approach!"
+
+Oom Tuys stepped into our tent and called me inside. He gave me the
+rifle and handed Sibijaan a heavy bag of cartridges. Then he loaded a
+dozen of our escort with more cartridges and bottles of gin. Thus
+loaded down, we set out to call on the most powerful and savage king
+in South Africa.
+
+After passing the triple walls of the kraal we found King Buno
+standing in front of the royal palace, or rather, hut. He shook hands
+warmly with Tuys, who handed him the gold. I noted how easily Buno
+handled it. He was a strong man. While he talked with Oom Tuys I had
+an opportunity to look him over.
+
+King Buno was well over six feet and must have weighed at least two
+hundred and thirty or forty pounds. He was very deep chested and had a
+body like an ox. His legs were well shaped and very muscular. Of
+course he was too fat, but this was explained by the fact that the
+Swazis consider corpulence a sign of aristocracy and are proud to
+"carry weight."
+
+Without doubt, Buno was the most powerful savage I had ever seen. He
+was every inch a king, and he knew it. While I was admiring him he
+suddenly turned and looked at me. His eyes were the cruelest I have
+ever looked into, and it came over me with a rush that he must be
+quite as black as he was painted. I was only a boy, but I could feel
+the cruel brutality of this savage the minute he looked at me.
+
+Tuys motioned me to come forward.
+
+"O King, this is Mzaan Bakoor, my nephew, who has come all the way
+from Rietvlei to bring you the rifle you desire!" Such was his
+introduction.
+
+Buno shook hands with a grip like a vise and took the Mauser from me.
+He seemed to gloat over the weapon for a moment, and then spoke:
+
+"The king thanks you, Mzaan Bakoor, little white chief," he said, and
+his voice was deep and melodious. "You are the near relation of my
+friend; you shall be the friend of the king. All my subjects shall be
+your slaves!"
+
+Then he fondled the rifle a moment, throwing it to his shoulder and
+going through the motions of shooting.
+
+"It is a good rifle," he said, using the native term of "mroer," "and
+to-day we shall try it. Already I know how to shoot, and this
+afternoon we shall have a shooting match. I shall show you how the
+king can shoot!"
+
+There was a little more conversation about the rifle and Buno was much
+pleased at the quantity of cartridges we had brought. He was as
+delighted with the Mauser as a child with a new toy. Later that day I
+found myself regretting that the weapon was not a toy.
+
+At length Buno said something to Tuys that I did not hear. The latter
+turned to me and said, "I have some business to transact with the
+king. You go back to our camp and wait for me."
+
+I would have given much to know what this business was. Tuys and Buno
+had been in some queer deals together and I felt that they were
+planning another. Both were reckless and lawless, and, backed by the
+thousands of Buno's impis, they were able to do anything they had a
+mind to, at least in Swaziland.
+
+Tuys and Buno dropped to their knees and crawled into the royal hut,
+and I returned to our camp. Sibijaan was as curious as I was and made
+an attempt to pass in the rear of the king's hut with the intention of
+hearing something. He did not get far and came back with speed, for he
+had run into a six-foot Swazi warrior with an evil eye who appeared to
+be on guard.
+
+Boylike, I was hungry when we reached camp and was glad to see that we
+were to have fresh-killed beef for dinner. I was munching a rusk when
+Sibijaan hopped into the tent, his eyes flashing with excitement.
+
+"O Mzaan Bakoor, there is an induna asking for you!" he said. "He says
+he comes from Queen Labotsibeni and must see you!"
+
+Outside I found a young chief who looked very much like Buno. He had
+the same great body and hard eyes and carried himself with the same
+"swank" affected by the king.
+
+"Mzaan Bakoor, little white induna," he said in the same rumbling
+melodious bass so common among the Swazis, "I am Lomwazi, brother of
+the king and son of Queen Labotsibeni. My mother would see you and has
+asked that I beg you to visit her. She waits for you!"
+
+Realizing that it was not fitting that an O'Neil should run at the
+command of a kaffir queen, I told Lomwazi that I would go when "the
+shadow of that tree strikes the tent." I estimated this would be in
+about half an hour, and I was right. Lomwazi, great induna that he
+was, squatted outside the tent until I was ready. He evidently
+expected that I might offer him gin or some present, but I decided it
+would be poor policy to do so, since I intended giving gin to
+Labotsibeni.
+
+As soon as Sibijaan told me that the time was up I went out and found
+Lomwazi with an escort of half a dozen warriors waiting for me. Sure
+that Buno's friendship would protect us, I followed Lomwazi without
+hesitation. As we went along I noticed the deference paid us and
+realized that Lomwazi must be a power in the land.
+
+We found Queen Labotsibeni in a nearby kraal, which she used when
+visiting Lebombo. It was a sort of guest kraal placed at her disposal
+by King Buno. There were huts sufficient for all her retinue, among
+which were some of the other widows, whom she ruled with a heavy hand.
+
+Labotsibeni was very stout and tall, even when sitting down, as she
+was when I first saw her. She had an intelligent face, with the same
+eyes, though not so cruel, as Buno and Lomwazi. Her beautifully shaped
+hands were much in evidence, and I don't recall having ever seen
+cleaner or better manicured fingers. Like the other women in
+Swaziland, she was practically naked, except for a covering draped
+from the waist. Her hair was piled high on the top of her head and was
+bound so that it looked like a melon. When she spoke I noted that her
+teeth were perfect. This, of course, is the rule in Swaziland, since
+these people take care of their teeth from earliest childhood. They
+never finish eating without carefully rubbing their teeth with charcoal
+or some fine sand. If the Swazis have no fixed religious observances,
+they certainly are religious in the care of their teeth.
+
+Labotsibeni had not lost her sight this first time I saw her, and she
+looked me over for a full minute before speaking. Then she motioned to
+me to be seated and addressed me:
+
+"Nkoos, little white induna," she said, "you come to Pungwane (the
+native name for Swaziland) as the friend of our great white leader.
+Oom Tuys is the trusted friend of my son, the king, and you shall be
+trusted likewise. Our friend always brings presents; thus do we know
+that his heart is true to us!"
+
+I accepted the hint and produced the quart bottle of gin I had brought
+for her. She grasped it greedily, and the interview was interrupted
+until she had gulped down what I estimated to be nearly a pint. Her
+capacity for gin was extraordinary, I learned later, although all the
+Swazis will drink alcoholic liquors without restraint. They have
+absolutely no sense with gin or whiskey, and only stop guzzling when
+the supply runs out or they are completely paralyzed.
+
+After taking her drink, Labotsibeni wiped her lips on a leaf--one of a
+pile she had at her side--and then spoke:
+
+"Oom Tuys comes to pay the tribute," she observed, "but my son and he
+have other plans they will carry out. You are close to the great white
+man. What are these plans?"
+
+I then realized what she was after. Of course I knew nothing about
+what new deviltry Buno and Tuys were hatching, but I realized that it
+would not do for me to appear to be on the outside. I would lose
+prestige.
+
+"Oom Tuys and the king plan great things for the people of Swaziland,"
+I solemnly assured her. "It is not for me to say what they will do.
+When we have left Swaziland the king will tell you everything. Until
+then I must remain silent."
+
+This cryptic statement did not seem to satisfy the old queen and she
+several times reverted to her question in our subsequent conversation.
+Lomwazi was also present at the interview, but only spoke to agree
+with his mother. Behind her in the shadow of the hut sat several of
+her maids. They watched their mistress keenly and hastened to assist
+her when she rose as a signal that the interview was over.
+
+The impression Labotsibeni gave me was that she was very cunning and
+intelligent. I could readily understand the common belief that she was
+the "brains behind the throne" in Swaziland.
+
+Tuys was waiting for me at our camp and was much interested to learn
+that I had been to see the queen mother. He was amused to hear that
+she was anxious to know what business he and Buno were planning.
+
+"So she is worried, eh?" he observed. "Well, that's good for her! She
+has kept Buno tied to her apron-strings too long, and I suspect she is
+playing into the hands of the Britishers. We must keep Buno as a
+friend of our people. If we don't, we shall find the English behind
+the Swazis in the next war."
+
+After dinner, during which Tuys told me more stories about Buno and
+his cruelty, we attended the shooting match. I don't suppose there was
+ever another like it. It was a most terrible exhibition of savage
+beastiality and ought to have been called the "murder match," instead
+of a shooting contest.
+
+When we arrived at Buno's kraal we found him walking excitedly up and
+down, the rifle in his hands. Standing near him were a score or more
+of his indunas, and we were struck at once by their look of
+apprehension. Lined up on either side of the wide roadway leading to
+the royal kraal were thousands of warriors. More than a dozen impis
+were in line, every man in his full war costume. Their knob-kerries
+were held at the ready, their shields across their bodies, and each
+had shifted his assegai to the position used in battle.
+
+The lines of savage warriors stretched away from the kraal for
+hundreds of yards. It was the first time I had ever seen the impis of
+the king on parade and it was a most impressive sight. There was a
+slight breeze and the white plumes on their heads danced in the
+sunlight. What struck me most was the splendid build and stature of
+these men. They were all six feet or more and their black skins fairly
+shone. Most of them wore leopard-skins caught about the waist and on
+one shoulder.
+
+My rapid inspection was broken by the king. He greeted us
+vociferously, and I immediately saw that he was on fire with the gin
+he had drunk. No sooner did he raise his hand in salutation than the
+impis gave the royal salute. Their deep shout ended with the crash of
+twenty thousand feet brought down together. The earth fairly shook.
+
+I realize now that this salute was a tribute to the cruelty of the
+ages. In just such a manner did the gladiators salute Nero with their
+"Morituri te salutamus!" A few moments after the salute I realized
+that these men were also about to die.
+
+"Come on, Oom Tuys, come and let the king see how well you can shoot!"
+Buno shouted. "I have provided the only targets worthy of your
+skill--you who are noted for your shooting among a race of white men
+who have conquered all with their rifles! I will shoot first, and then
+you shall beat me!"
+
+Then he turned suddenly to me.
+
+"And you, too, Mzaan Bakoor, little induna! You, too, shall shoot
+against the king! First I will shoot, then Oom Tuys, and then you.
+Each will shoot this many shots," and he held out four clips of five
+cartridges each.
+
+[Illustration: PRINCESSES AND THEIR MAID TAKING A MORNING BATH]
+
+[Illustration: YOUNG PRINCESSES AMIABLY ENGAGED IN HAIR-DRESSING
+
+These are of exceptionally high birth and of remarkable beauty. Either
+would probably be worth fifty head of cattle and could only be bought
+for that number. Women are the standard of currency among the Swazis,
+the average low-caste woman, if young and sound in limb, being worth
+five head of cattle. The price of women increases according to their
+birth and beauty]
+
+[Illustration: SWAZI GIRLS
+
+This picture shows the large navel which is common to most women,
+particularly to those of aristocratic birth]
+
+[Illustration: PUDANA, FAVORITE TO THE OLD QUEEN LABOTSIBENI
+
+He is a charming little fellow and the most privileged personality in
+all Swaziland, being the only male allowed to attend all interviews
+and conferences]
+
+The indunas gathered about and I could see the horror in their faces.
+They knew what was coming, but even then I did not suspect. Tuys
+looked startled and gazed at Buno as though he could not understand.
+Down the lines the plumed heads still nodded and after a moment there
+was silence.
+
+The savage king slipped a clip into his Mauser, the metallic click
+intensified by the silence. He raised the rifle, sighting down first
+one line of warriors and then the other. The next instant a shot rang
+out and a plumed Swazi pitched forward and lay writhing in the
+sunlight. As Buno threw another cartridge into place, two warriors
+stepped out and stabbed the fallen warrior.
+
+Four more shots rang out, and at each a plumed head came down, with
+shield and assegai crashing as they struck the ground. Each warrior
+was stabbed as he lay, the killers quietly stepping back into the ranks.
+
+It was the most ghastly spectacle I had ever attended. We Boers have
+always had to fight for our lives and farms, so that sudden death was
+no novelty to me. But such a slaughter as this!
+
+Buno completed his twenty shots and made three misses. These angered
+him and he shouted out the equivalent of "I'll get you next time!"
+
+Then came Tuys's turn. He had been thinking rapidly and I had a faint
+hope that he would find some way out.
+
+"O King, it is not fitting that your warriors should die by my rifle,"
+he said hurriedly. "You are king and their lives are yours; I am but
+your guest and it is not right that brave men should be killed by one
+who loves only peace. Let us shoot at other targets. Let us kill
+cattle so that there may be a feast to-night."
+
+Buno's face darkened. His bloodshot eyes flashed and for a second I
+thought he would strike Tuys.
+
+"The king commands! Buno, king of the Swazis, commands!" he shouted in
+a hoarse voice. "Shoot! Shoot and kill more than I did, if you can!"
+
+I was holding Tuys's rifle and he came over to where I was standing. I
+was so sick with it all that I hardly heard him when he spoke to me
+hurriedly in Dutch.
+
+"We must go through with it," he whispered. "Kill as few as you can.
+Shoot them in the head and they'll die quickly!"
+
+A second later Tuys raised his rifle. Each shot that hit meant death;
+there was no need of stabbing when he shot. Buno taunted him at each
+shot, and in spite of being the best shot in the Transvaal Tuys was
+able to miss as many as possible without arousing the suspicions of
+the bloody king.
+
+When he had finished my turn came. I could hardly hold the heavy
+rifle. Buno fairly abused me, for he was raging by this time. One
+taunt I well remember.
+
+"O Mzaan Bakoor, you of the great ears!" he shouted, his voice now a
+hoarse growl. "Show the king that you can shoot as well as you hear.
+Oom Tuys cannot shoot. You beat him!"
+
+So unsteady was I that I could not have held the rifle firmly if I had
+wanted to. I shot, and never were twenty shot so many. My score was
+much worse than Tuys's, but the memory of that murder match will never
+die!
+
+Buno was jubilant over his victory. He seemed to think that he had
+shamed the white men before his people and his indunas also gloried in
+his victory. I think they were rather glad that they had not been
+asked to serve as targets.
+
+I thought we were done with killing for the time being and wanted to
+return to camp and rest. I was suffering from shock and felt that I
+must lie down. But this was not the end. Buno was not yet satisfied.
+He challenged Tuys to shoot at running targets! Tuys tried to talk him
+out of the idea and suggested that they had better go and get some
+gin. But Buno would not be put off.
+
+He led the way to a point a short distance from the kraal, where there
+were clumps of bushes and long grass. Warriors were made to dodge in
+and out of these bushes while their king potted them. This required
+much better shooting, and the men turned and twisted in and out of the
+brush like mad things. Buno found that he could not kill enough to
+satisfy his brutish desire and soon tired of the "sport." Tuys,
+however, had to take his turn, and he was able to miss even more
+frequently than before. Sick as I felt, I was rather amused at Tuys
+missing these poor savages. I have often seen him stop an antelope in
+full flight, and we have a saying that "only a bullet travels faster
+than a springbok."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI
+
+Tuys orders me to remain in camp during the celebration--I visit the
+royal kraal--Feasting, dancing, and combats to the death--Butchery of
+young women--Buno and Tuys wrestle for gold--How Tuys became rich--A
+"legal execution" in Swaziland--The unfaithful wife expiates her
+sin--How Tuys shoots--Father gathers information by mental suggestion.
+
+
+I finally returned to our camp much upset by the orgy of slaughter and
+sorry that I had forced Tuys to take me with him on this trip. He
+remained with Buno until time for supper and then came into camp to
+eat. I noticed that, although he was ordinarily a big eater, Tuys had
+little appetite that night. However, he drank quite heavily and left
+soon after dusk with a number of bottles of gin. As he went he advised
+me to remain in camp.
+
+"You are not used to this country, lad," he said, roughly but kindly.
+"To-night there will be a big celebration and much drunkenness. When
+the king is drinking he is likely to be careless and things may happen
+that you would not like to remember. You stay in camp and I'll be back
+before long."
+
+I promised Tuys to do as he asked, in spite of the fact that I was
+very curious to see what might take place. As night came on hundreds
+of fires were lighted and I could hear the Swazis beginning to sing.
+Every now and then shouts reached us, and there seemed to be every
+indication that it would be a wild night. Curiosity impelled me to
+send Sibijaan out on a scouting expedition. He was also eaten up with
+curiosity, but wanted me to come along. However, I still remembered my
+promise to Tuys and would not go.
+
+After a little Sibijaan returned, his eyes wide with excitement.
+
+"Thousands and thousands of warriors are at the royal kraal," he
+announced. "There are great fires everywhere and every one is drinking
+tswala. The warriors are dancing and the king's fire is the biggest of
+all. The witch-doctors are there, too, and are going to make magic
+to-night!"
+
+I was intensely interested in all this. It seemed a shame that I was
+going to miss it. On second thoughts I decided that I was foolish to
+have made the long trek into Zombode if I did not see the whole
+celebration. I wanted to be able to tell those at home all about it,
+so I decided to sneak out of camp and watch a while.
+
+Playing at war had taught me to hide as much as possible, and soon I
+slipped out of the tent and started for the royal kraal. There seemed
+to be thousands of natives all about me, each band gathered around a
+fire. They were dancing and singing and eating, particularly eating.
+The Swazi always eats whenever possible, and a number of cattle had
+been slaughtered to provide a feast in honor of Oom Tuys.
+
+I crept closer to the royal kraal and soon could see the glow from the
+king's fire. It was surrounded by hundreds of huts and many kraals,
+but I managed to get close enough to see the flames. A dense mass of
+warriors were on three sides of the fire, and on the other I could
+discern Buno and Tuys. All the warriors were dancing and chanting, and
+it was an awe-inspiring sight. In a little while the dancing stopped
+and two warriors sprang before the king and began to fight. I was
+close enough to see their actions and hear the blows when knob-kerrie
+struck shield with a hollow thump.
+
+The fight was short. One suddenly fell, struck down with a cunning
+blow from his opponent's knob-kerrie, and a second later I saw the
+winner stab the prostrate figure again and again with his assegai. A
+moment later another pair fought, and this battle ended as did the
+other with the death of the loser. There were several more fights,
+each ending fatally. At each victory wild shouts would go up from the
+bloodthirsty audience. For a small boy it was a thrilling show.
+
+After the last combat there was a pause. Soon the murmuring of the
+expectant thousands died down and I felt that they were waiting for
+more excitement. A moment later a number of girls, all naked, were led
+out from behind the royal hut. They were lined up in front of Buno and
+Tuys, and I could see the witch-doctor talking to the king. This
+lasted a few minutes and then the former began to dance, doing what
+might be called the "Dance of Death."
+
+Suddenly he halted, then dived at one of the girls and threw her
+roughly to her knees. The others fell back hurriedly and several
+warriors caught hold of the girl and stretched her on the ground.
+Another man joined the group and the girl began to shriek, her voice
+seeming to echo from hut to hut. It was a shriek of utter despair, and
+I could feel myself tremble.
+
+The man stood high above the girl and raised his right hand above his
+head. I could see the flash of steel, for he held a great curved
+knife. A moment he stood thus, the girl shrieking all the while. The
+crowd seemed to catch its breath and I felt as though I should choke.
+Down flashed the knife, and the victim shrieked louder and more
+shrilly than ever. It was enough! I turned and fled blindly. I don't
+know how I got there, but I blundered into camp shaking like a leaf
+and threw myself on my blankets.
+
+Next morning Tuys told me, quite casually, that Buno had entertained
+him by having some girls cut open while they still lived. I then knew
+that I had not been dreaming. Despite Tuys's advice, I had seen
+something I "would not like to remember." Tuys told me of other things
+that happened at the celebration, and I am thankful I did not see
+them. They cannot be told, but for utter cruelty, cruelty of the most
+depraved and bestial kind, they are without equal.
+
+That day only the women were about until nearly noon. The king and his
+warriors were sleeping off the debauch of the night before. Shortly
+after midday Tuys took me with him to the royal kraal, where we found
+Buno showing little evil effects of the orgy. I noticed that Tuys wore
+his great leather hunting-coat with wide pockets, and I was surprised
+at this because it was a warm day. However, I soon learned the reason.
+
+[Illustration: AN ACTUAL COMBAT IN WHICH THE MAN ON THE LEFT WAS SLAIN
+
+In war the Swazis fight after a method all their own. The opposing
+impis, or regiments, draw up on either side of the battlefield and
+after much dancing, yelling of battle-cries, and other excitement,
+individual warriors dash into the middle-ground challenging individual
+opponents from the other side. These meet and fight it out to the
+death. The combats are divided into three phases. The first consists
+of fighting with the long knob-kerrie; the second, with the short
+knob-kerrie; and the final, which is the death blow, with the short
+spear]
+
+[Illustration: A TYPE OF DRESS WORN BY THE ROYAL EXECUTIONER]
+
+[Illustration: LOMWAZI, SON AND PRIME MINISTER TO THE OLD QUEEN
+
+He acted as Regent to the Swazi nation]
+
+Buno was very agreeable and even joked with me about my poor shooting
+of the day before. He little knew how proud I was that I had shot
+badly. Tuys and he were on the best of terms and joked with one
+another, each boasting of his strength. Finally Buno ended the
+pleasantries with a challenge.
+
+"Let us go to the rock, Oom Tuys," he said, "and we'll soon see who is
+the strongest man in Swaziland. This time I know I can throw you, and
+you will make small profit out of this trip."
+
+"That remains to be seen, O King," Tuys warned him. "I feel stronger
+than ever to-day, but it seems to me that you are quite shaky. Don't
+you think you'd better wait a day or two before tackling me?"
+
+"No, no! Now is the time!" declared Buno most emphatically. "If you
+cannot wrestle any better than you shot yesterday, I shall have little
+trouble in throwing you."
+
+This was all very interesting to me. I felt that I would like to be
+big enough to wrestle Buno and break his neck. However, he and Tuys
+seemed to be very joyful over the coming match and there was no ill
+feeling between them.
+
+After Tuys and Buno had had several drinks, we all started out for the
+rock. I had heard of this rock before. It was a great flat-topped slab
+on which Buno was accustomed to sleep during the hottest hours of the
+day. The Swazis call it "The King's Couch," and Buno would bask on it
+while the sun blazed down on his naked body with all the fire of
+mid-summer.
+
+Tuys had several of his servants with him, each one carrying a small
+but very heavy canvas sack. I asked him what these were, but he told
+me to wait and I would see. The rock was about a quarter of a mile
+from the royal kraal, and we soon reached it.
+
+Then came the unexpected, which invariably happened where Tuys was
+concerned. We climbed upon the rock and while Buno and the rest of us
+looked on, Oom Tuys slit the canvas sacks and poured two thousand
+sovereigns on the rock!
+
+The gold made quite a large pile and shone brightly in the warm sun.
+Tuys counted it, with Buno seeming to keep careful check on him.
+Finally the count was finished and they agreed that it was all
+there--two thousand glittering gold pieces!
+
+"Now we shall wrestle for it," said Buno, pointing to the gold. "We'll
+soon see who is the better man, who is the strongest man in Swaziland.
+Come on, Oom Tuys!"
+
+Tuys waved to me to get off the rock, and we jumped down to the
+ground. It was, perhaps, the strangest sight I had yet seen. There
+stood those two great men, waiting for an opportunity to get a
+favorable grip. Presently they began to circle round and round, each
+trying to catch hold of the other. The pile of gold lay between them.
+
+Suddenly Buno rushed at Tuys. Tuys stepped to one side and jostled him
+as he went by. Without changing position, Tuys reached down and
+grabbed up two handfuls of gold. He was shoving it into the pockets of
+his leather coat when Buno was upon him. Buno forced him back and
+grabbed up some of the gold, which he shoved into his loin-cloth.
+
+They were very strong men and the wrestling was the roughest
+imaginable. Each time one gained an advantage he would grab for the
+gold. I soon saw that Tuys was getting the better of it. His pockets
+were sagging with gold, while Buno, being practically naked, had no
+place to store what he was able to seize. The contest finally ended
+with both flat on the rock, locked in each other's arms. They tussled
+for a time and, as neither could gain the advantage, decided to quit.
+Both were exhausted and hardly able to get to their feet. However,
+they were the best of friends, although Tuys had most of the gold.
+
+Then I understood the saying among the Boers that Tuys would soon be a
+rich man if Oom Paul continued to send him with the monthly payments
+to King Buno.
+
+There was only a small celebration that night, although Tuys spent the
+evening with the king and much gin was drunk. Tuys returned early to
+camp and told me that we would visit the Place of Execution the next
+day and then return to Rietvlei. I went to sleep full of anticipation.
+
+We broke camp early next morning. I had expected that we would
+accompany Buno to the cliff beyond Sheba's Breasts, but Tuys told me
+that the king and his impi had left during the night. All Swazis walk
+whenever they travel, keeping up a steady pace that covers much
+ground. When we started for the Place of Execution, Buno and his
+warriors were at least fifteen or twenty miles ahead of us.
+
+Tuys gave orders that our party should camp in the Valley of Heaven
+while he and I pushed on and caught up with the king. It was nearly
+noon before we saw them climbing the slopes of Sheba's Breasts. There
+seemed to be several thousand in the king's party. In a little while,
+by hard riding, we caught up with them. There were two full impis, in
+their midst a number of naked savages without arms or headdresses. I
+asked Tuys about these men.
+
+"They are prisoners," he informed me. "We are going to see them die.
+That is why we are climbing these infernal hills. Beyond Sheba's
+Breasts we have another mountain to climb and then we shall reach the
+Place of Execution. Let's hurry and catch Buno!"
+
+We found the king at the head of his impis, accompanied by several of
+the indunas, striding along over ground that gave even our horses
+trouble. He greeted Tuys affectionately as usual and had a pleasant
+word for me.
+
+Tuys asked him why the prisoners were going to be executed.
+
+"They have had their trial," he said, "and they are all guilty. They
+must die! I have said it!"
+
+That seemed to settle the matter, and I asked Tuys about the trial and
+how it had taken place. From his long and intimate acquaintance with
+Swaziland and its customs he was able to tell me all I needed to know.
+
+"Every moon there is a court at Zombode," he informed me. "The indunas
+are the jury and decide whether the prisoner is guilty or not.
+Prisoners are brought before them charged with stealing, non-payment
+of debts, disloyalty to the king, and countless other things,
+including witchcraft. When the indunas have heard a case they bring in
+a verdict of guilty or innocent, and then the king passes sentence. My
+friend, Buno, always decides that death is the proper punishment, and
+allows the person bringing the charge to take the possessions of the
+prisoner after he has had first pick. Many of those who will be
+executed to-day would only receive a whipping if they were in our
+country, instead of Swaziland. But Buno has no sympathy with
+law-breakers and I think he rather enjoys the executions."
+
+After passing Sheba's Breasts we went down a steep trail to a little
+valley, and then climbed the sharp ascent to the Place of Execution.
+From the Breasts to the top of the cliff is almost a two-hour trek. On
+the top is a small plateau. From this to the bottom is a sheer drop of
+more than five hundred feet. At the bottom is a short slope of broken
+rock.
+
+The impis were drawn up in column facing the edge, with Buno and his
+indunas in front. We had left our horses at the top of the trail and
+now joined the king's party. After pacing up and down for a few
+moments Buno turned and addressed his warriors. He told them that the
+prisoners had forfeited their lives on account of their wickedness and
+it was only just that they should die. He ended in this fashion:
+
+"But the king is merciful. These jackals ought to be killed by
+torture. Instead, I, Buno the King, have decreed that they shall die
+after the time-honored custom of our people!"
+
+While he spoke I watched the prisoners. There were about forty of
+them, and every one held his head high, as though not afraid to die.
+Each bore himself proudly, more like a victor than one about to die a
+fearful death.
+
+When Buno had finished there was a slight stir among them and one was
+left standing alone. With his eyes straight in front of him, his body
+erect, he walked swiftly forward. In a second he had reached the edge.
+Throwing up his arms, he leaped forward and was gone!
+
+One after another the others followed. There was no hesitation, no
+drawing back. It was terrible, yet glorious! These savages, with no
+promise of a here-after which included a Valhalla or Heaven, went to
+their death like heroes.
+
+When the last one had gone the silent tension was broken by the
+rustling of shields and shuffling of feet. The king then felt impelled
+to make another address. He had got as far as, "Thus do I, the king,
+destroy the enemies of my people--" when there came a violent
+commotion and a woman's cry.
+
+Through the warriors dashed a young and handsome woman. She wore
+nothing, and in that brief moment I could see from the lines in her
+face that she had suffered much.
+
+Tuys and the king leaped forward to intercept her, but were too late.
+She threw up her hands with a shriek and went over the edge!
+
+Tuys and I were much excited by this, but Buno and his indunas seemed
+to be rather annoyed. Buno explained that women had done this before
+and seemed to regard their action as a desecration of the Place of
+Execution. After many questions Tuys found out all about it and
+explained to me.
+
+"This was new to me," he said, as we climbed down from the cliff, "and
+I thought I knew all there was to know about the Swazis. But I never
+before heard about women throwing themselves off the Place of Execution.
+
+"Mzaan Bakoor, this is how it is. You know the Swazis are very strict
+with their women. If a wife, no matter if she be one of thirty or
+forty wives, has anything to do with any man but her husband, her life
+is forfeited. Also the child, if there be one, must die. If there is
+no child, she dies alone. It is the husband's right to kill the
+unfaithful wife. If he does so, no one has anything to say and he is
+not held for murder. But he can do worse than kill his wife. He can
+refuse to kill her, and then she becomes an outcast and the prey of
+any one. She may even be killed by her people, for there have been
+cases where Swazi women have killed an unfaithful wife when the
+husband refused to slay her.
+
+"Always, if she can escape, the woman will take to the hills. There
+her condition is as bad as it can be. She has to live on berries and
+what game she can catch, and her life is miserable. She is an outcast,
+and men who are caught going to her in the hills share her degradation.
+
+"This woman who died to-day was the youngest wife of a little chief
+who refused to kill her when he found that she was faithless. She
+escaped to the hills some weeks ago and lived the life of a hunted
+beast. Finally she must have made up her mind to end it all. It is
+fortunate for her that she had not been taught by the missionaries
+that she had a soul!"
+
+That is the moral code of Swaziland. In all the years I have known the
+Swazis I have never heard of its being broken without the death
+penalty. However, civilization will some day reach into Swaziland and
+then this code will disappear. That will be the end of the Swazis.
+
+We reached camp to find the long shadows of the setting sun dropping
+across the Valley of Heaven. Buno bade Tuys an affectionate farewell
+and the impis gave us the royal salute as they started up the hill for
+Lebombo.
+
+This was the first time I saw King Buno, and he left me memories that
+nothing can ever efface. I saw him again next year and was in Lebombo
+when he died and Queen Labotsibeni was appointed regent.
+
+Nothing much happened on our return journey to the Valley of Reeds,
+except that Oom Tuys showed me how he could shoot. During the second
+day's trek we ran up on the high veldt for a space and jumped some
+springbok. They sprang up suddenly out of the brown grass, as they
+always do, and went off like a streak of light.
+
+After one or two had escaped, Tuys told me to kill the next.
+
+"Let's see if you can shoot like a Boer," he said, bantering me.
+"Let's see if you would starve to death if you were lost on the veldt!"
+
+A few moments later I had my chance. My Mauser rested across my saddle
+when the antelope jumped, and a second later I blazed away. I made
+three perfectly clean misses. Looking back, I realize that the heavy
+military rifle was too much for me--it was too weighty.
+
+Tuys said: "Poor Mzaan Bakoor, you will die hungry. Now watch me get
+the next!"
+
+And he did. His rifle was in its sheath, barrel under his leg and
+stock alongside the pommel of the saddle. I never saw quicker action.
+The unlucky springbok seemed to rise with the motion of Tuys's arm as
+he snapped his Mauser out of its case to his shoulder, all in one
+motion. On its fourth or fifth jump the antelope met the dum-dum
+bullet and dropped. Its back was broken and the knife did the rest.
+
+"That is the way a Boer shoots!" Tuys boasted. "If you miss your meat,
+you go hungry. Your rifle must follow the springbok when he jumps, and
+you get him at the top of his leap. He cannot change direction in the
+air and you pull your trigger softly so that your aim is not broken.
+If you jerk, as you did a minute ago, you miss. Remember that, lad!"
+
+As we rode into Rietvlei on the last day Tuys gave me a serious
+talking to. He was worried over what I had seen at Lebombo.
+
+"You know that we have seen some things at Buno's kraal that must not
+be told," he cautioned me. "The British, and even our own people,
+would be much excited if they heard that you had given a rifle to
+Buno. They would hold you and me accountable for the men he killed in
+the shooting match. Also, they would ask many questions about the
+women who were killed that night I made you stay in camp. They would
+think that the gin we gave Buno made him do these things, and we would
+have much trouble.
+
+"You must not know anything about these things. When you tell about
+your trip, you must only tell things that will not make trouble. If
+you don't, I will never take you with me again. What's more, I'll tell
+Buno, and he will kill you if you ever go to Swaziland again!
+
+"Slim Gert will ask you questions, and your mother, too. If any of
+your brothers are at home, they will want to know about your trip. Now
+remember, you must only tell the things that are safe to tell."
+
+He also advised me to threaten Sibijaan with everything under the sun
+if he talked too much. His own servants he was not afraid of--they had
+been with him before and knew what would happen to them if they
+talked. I told Sibijaan what to expect if he talked, and he promised
+to tell nothing. He kept his promise about as well as might have been
+expected of a kaffir.
+
+Mother and father were at home when we reached Rietvlei, and were very
+glad to see me back. I was glad to again look out on the peaceful
+green fields of our wonderful farm, but keenly disappointed that I
+dared not give a true account of our adventures. It was some story for
+a small boy to have to bottle up!
+
+After supper my father sent for me, and I went to his office in the
+wing of the house which he used for administrative work. I had my
+doubts about the interview that I knew was about to take place,
+because my father has a way of getting the truth when he wants it. He
+is not known as "Slim Gert" for nothing.
+
+On the top of his desk lay a sjambok, or rawhide whip. It caught my
+eye and he saw me look at it.
+
+"Now, son, tell me about your trip," he said. "What did you see? What
+happened? Yesterday a Swazi came here and said that Buno had made a
+celebration for Tuys and you." As he asked the question his keen eyes
+searched my soul.
+
+I was in an awful pickle. If I told the truth, Tuys would be my enemy
+for life. If I lied to my father, he would never forgive me and I'd
+hate myself forever! The cruel whip did not enter into my
+calculations, because my father never struck us. It could not concern
+me.
+
+I hesitated for a moment only and then sacrificed my further chances
+of going with Oom Tuys to Swaziland. I told the truth. Father listened
+and seemed to be checking up what I said. He asked one or two
+questions which refreshed my memory, and I told him everything.
+
+"Thank you for so accurate an account, son," he said, when I had
+finished. "I wanted to be sure that what I had heard was so. Sibijaan
+was here a little while ago and--" He picked up the whip and tossed it
+into a drawer.
+
+Next day I saw Sibijaan. I asked him why he had told father about the
+killings at Lebombo.
+
+"Ou Baas holds the sjambok in his hand when he talks to me," he said
+quite simply. "He knew lots about Lebombo already. I'd sooner be
+killed by Oom Tuys some day than by your father now. I could not lie
+to Ou Baas."
+
+Neither could I, but nevertheless I upbraided Sibijaan for breaking
+the promise he had made to me that he would not tell about our trip.
+In fact, I consoled myself for losing my further chances of visiting
+Swaziland with Oom Tuys by giving Sibijaan a good beating.
+
+He could fight, but was not as strong as I, and the thrashing made no
+difference in our friendship. Of course the fight took place in
+private; it would never have done to let our impi know that we had
+fallen out for even a moment.
+
+Later I found out that father had received some pointed enquiries from
+the government in regard to Oom Tuys's activities in Swaziland. He
+wanted to know first hand, if possible, what the "White King of
+Swaziland" really did when he made his periodical trips to Buno's
+kraal. The information, however, was only for his own benefit, since
+he would not betray one of our people.
+
+A month later Oom Tuys stopped at Rietvlei as usual before making his
+regular trip to Lebombo. That night I was with father when he sat
+talking with him. I feared that father would ask questions about our
+trip, but he approached the subject in quite another way.
+
+"I have heard from various kaffirs that your last trip to Swaziland
+was a bad business," he said to Tuys. "The government also has asked
+me about it. Of course I know nothing, since you have told me
+nothing," and he eyed Tuys keenly.
+
+"They say it was a bad business?" Tuys remarked in a blustering way.
+"Well, they don't know what they're talking about! Buno was only happy
+to receive the tribute and he may have taken a little too much gin.
+That's about all there was to it. Who the devil are those busybodies
+who don't mind their own business?"
+
+Then he looked at me, but I met him eye to eye. I had expected the
+encounter and was ready for him. Father, however, realizing the
+situation, began talking again.
+
+"Kaffirs will lie," he said, "and there have been a number of Swazis
+here during the last month. Of course I don't believe them, but some
+of the officials who have to create work to hold their jobs have been
+asking questions."
+
+"Tell them to go to Swaziland and find out," said Tuys, laughing
+heartily. "They daren't go. If they did, they'd never come back. Buno
+would answer them, and they wouldn't worry about making any
+long-winded reports when he had done with them!"
+
+Tuys knew that he was the only white man who dared enter Swaziland
+then. He also knew that the stories told by kaffirs did not carry much
+weight and would never be accepted for action by the government.
+
+"It would be well, Tuys," father said at the end of the talk, "if you
+would induce Buno not to make so much noise when he gives his next
+party in your honor. His hospitality is too bloody to be healthy for
+either you or him."
+
+Tuys did not question me about the matter when he saw me alone next
+morning. He evidently refused to entertain the thought that I might
+have betrayed him. If I had not met his eye the night before, however,
+he would have been sure I was guilty. He did not comment on the
+matter, and I know now that, in his daredevil way, he did not lose any
+sleep over it. In those days, too, it must be remembered that it did
+not cause much stir when a native chief killed a few of his followers.
+It was much more serious if he killed the men of another chief, since
+this might mean war and wars were always disturbing.
+
+Tuys had nothing to say on his return from Swaziland, but it must have
+been a successful trip for I saw him hand my father a heavy canvas
+sack to put in his safe until morning. He must have done well in the
+royal wrestling match.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII
+
+I visit Swaziland again--Buno's illness--An appeal from the king--The
+race against death--Umzulek meets us--The dying king--Buno makes Tuys
+guardian of his people--The last royal salute of the impis--The
+death-dealing puff-adder--Buno dies like a true savage king--Tzaneen,
+the royal widow, suspects murder--The queens meet--Tuys escapes the
+funeral sacrifice.
+
+
+It was about a year later that I made my second trip into Swaziland.
+Father was away in Pretoria on business when Tuys arrived at Rietvlei.
+Very recently we had heard a rumor that Buno was ill, and I was very
+keen to go with Tuys on this trip. I felt sure that my father would
+not allow me to, but I knew that my mother could be persuaded to let
+me go. I therefore asked Tuys to take me.
+
+"I am almost a man now, Oom Tuys," I said, standing as erect as I
+could, "and I want to go with you on your visit to Lebombo. They say
+that Buno is sick, but that ought not to make any difference, ought it?"
+
+"Yes, Owen, it makes all the difference in the world," he answered.
+"You know what the custom is; if Buno dies, his ten nearest friends
+will be sacrificed. I am regarded as his friend and they will want me
+to die. Much as I would appreciate the honor, I don't want to die just
+yet. If they killed me, they would kill you, too. Do you want to die?"
+
+I frankly confessed that I did not. This explanation of the situation
+placed a very different light on it and I was curious to know what
+Tuys intended to do. He told me he would wait a day or two before
+making up his mind, and I had hopes that some way would be found out
+of the difficulty.
+
+Now Buno knew that Oom Tuys would be at Rietvlei about this time. He
+nearly always was, as he seldom started his trip from any other place.
+
+Just at sunset, two days later, one of our Mapors ran in and reported
+that a small impi of Swazis was coming down the valley.
+
+"I'll wager that is a message from Buno," Tuys said, and we went
+indoors to await their arrival. It would not have done for us to be
+caught waiting for them. In a little while, when dusk was falling over
+the valley, we heard many feet come to a stop on the smooth roadway.
+Sibijaan ran in to say that the impi had arrived, and while he spoke
+we heard the cries and the thud of feet that marked the royal salute.
+
+Tuys sent one of his bodyguard out to see what was wanted.
+
+"It is a great induna from King Buno," the man reported a moment
+later. "He says he comes bearing a royal message to his white brother."
+
+"Tell him that 'The White King' of his country will see him in a
+little while," Tuys ordered.
+
+It was almost dark before Tuys decided the "great induna" had waited
+long enough to humble his pride. Then he went out; and, of course, I
+followed him. No sooner was he framed in the light of the doorway than
+the royal salute was repeated. He walked slowly to the gate. There was
+the chief patiently waiting for him, his men drawn up behind him, like
+so many shapes of darkness barely visible in the night.
+
+"Nkoos, White King of Swaziland," the induna began, "I am the
+messenger of King Buno. He sends a message to you."
+
+Then he stopped, awaiting permission to go on.
+
+"Speak!" ordered Tuys.
+
+"Buno, our king, is sick unto death," the chief said, with dramatic
+gestures, "He desires that his white brother come to him. By me he
+sends word that your life is safe and that he must see you before he
+dies!"
+
+Tuys knew that Buno's word was the word of a king and could be relied
+upon. He waited only a moment, therefore, and then said tersely:
+
+"I will come. To-morrow's sun will see us on our way." With that he
+made the gesture of dismissal. The impi again gave the royal salute
+and a second later had departed, swallowed up by the night.
+
+"Get ready, lad," Tuys directed as soon as we entered the house. "At
+sunrise to-morrow we start. We travel fast and light, for I must reach
+Lebombo before Buno dies!"
+
+I was overjoyed, but immediately my joy was tempered by the thought
+that my mother would have to know and might object. Tuys, however,
+settled that question for me. He went to her and told her that he
+would be responsible for my return safe and sound. Tuys always had a
+way with him, and my mother sent for me to tell me that I had her
+permission to go.
+
+"However, you must obey Oom Tuys better this time," she warned me. "I
+know that you were disobedient on the trip last year and ran the risk
+of being killed. You may go only if you promise me that you will obey
+Tuys."
+
+Naturally, I promised. I would have done more than that if it had been
+necessary, for I was wild to accompany Tuys this time. With Buno
+possibly dying there would be wonderful things to see, I felt sure. I
+was not disappointed, as it turned out.
+
+At dawn the next morning we were on our way. We had about the same
+equipment as before, except that I rode a bigger and faster horse and
+four speedy mules were harnessed to our light wagon, instead of six.
+Sibijaan drove the mules and swung his sjambok without mercy. For once
+he was not called down for beating the mules.
+
+As Tuys predicted, we traveled fast. The induna and his impi had left
+Rietvlei during the night and started back toward Lebombo. We caught
+up with them during the afternoon. They were hitting a smart pace,
+with the induna in the lead. His plumes appeared to mark the cadence
+of their steps and they must have been making better than six miles an
+hour.
+
+"Is the way prepared for us?" Tuys asked the chief. "Does the king
+expect me? Are his men waiting for me?"
+
+"Nkoos, the king waits!" the induna replied most impressively. "He
+bade me to tell you to hurry. The king dies, and must see you before
+he goes to the caves."
+
+This seemed to satisfy Oom Tuys, so that he sent home the spurs and we
+all broke into a new burst of speed. The road was rough, and I would
+look back now and then to see Sibijaan swaying to and fro as he jerked
+up the mules and cut them with his sjambok. Tuys's boys, or servants,
+with the exception of his bodyguard, ran beside the wagon, holding to
+it to help them over the ground.
+
+Tuys seemed possessed with the idea that Buno was really dying, and
+our trip became a race with death. It was very exciting. Down through
+the Valley of Heaven we ran, past kraals from which the Swazis tumbled
+out to gaze in wonder at us. Several indunas, knowing that Tuys was
+due on his monthly trip, tried to halt us to offer tswala or food, but
+Tuys would throw them a word and press on. This was on our second
+day's trek. On the first night we had stopped shortly before midnight,
+and then only to give our horses and mules some much needed rest.
+
+By the end of the second day both animals and men were pretty well
+exhausted, so we camped a little earlier. We were up at dawn, and Tuys
+estimated that we would reach Lebombo by noon. During that last
+night's camp a small band of witch-doctors stopped to talk to Tuys. It
+seemed that they had received word that Buno was dying and were going
+to Lebombo to be in at his death, so to speak.
+
+"Vultures! Carrion-eaters! That's what they are," Tuys remarked to me
+with disgust. "They are going to Lebombo so that they will be there to
+bury the king, if he dies. I wish Buno would fool them!"
+
+As before, we passed Queen Labotsibeni's kraal at Zombode. This time
+there were only women and children there. All the indunas and warriors
+had gone on to Lebombo. Tuys asked a curious woman how this was.
+
+"Yesterday, O Nkoos, the command came from the king that all warriors
+should go to Lebombo," she explained. "None but messengers remain, and
+these are now going on to tell that you are near." While she spoke we
+saw a small band of warriors swiftly running up the trail ahead. In a
+moment they had passed the turn of the road and were gone. In the
+brief glimpse I had of them I saw that they wore the broad white band
+that denotes a "king's messenger" in Swaziland.
+
+We pushed on. Tired as our animals were, we made good time, though not
+good enough to catch up with the messengers.
+
+As our party came round the bend into sight of Lebombo, we found three
+indunas and more than a thousand warriors of the king's own impis
+waiting for us. They were lined up on either side of the road and gave
+us the royal salute as we passed between them. We did not halt, and
+these splendid warriors formed behind us and trotted along as our
+escort. It was a wonderful sight. Their nodding plumes and bizarre
+shields, with here and there the flash of sunlight from an assegai,
+made a stirring picture.
+
+While yet some distance away I could see that there was an army
+gathered about the royal kraal. There seemed to be tens of thousands
+of warriors, all more or less in formation. When we came closer, a
+number of indunas ran forward to meet us and Umzulek, a brother of
+Buno, led us to the king. On each side of the roadway where the
+infamous shooting match had taken place the year before were solid
+lines of warriors, three and even four deep. As we passed up the line,
+impi after impi gave the royal salute.
+
+Except for the exclamations of the warriors and the stamp of their
+feet, there was a strange silence. There seemed to be an air of
+foreboding, as though all were waiting for something they dreaded.
+
+We dismounted at the king's hut. Tuys motioned me to come with him,
+and we stooped and went in. For a moment we could see nothing in the
+dim light. My first impression was that the hut was filled with people
+and was stifling hot.
+
+Then I saw the king stretched out on some mats, with his head propped
+up on a small block of wood. He was very changed. His great body was
+gaunt, his face haggard, and his eyes shone with the fire of fever.
+
+Buno gazed fixedly at Tuys for a moment and then weakly raised his
+hands in salute.
+
+"Welcome, Nkoos, white brother of the king," he said in a thin old
+voice. "Welcome, white king of my people! I knew you would come. You
+are a true friend!"
+
+Even in the dim light I could see that Tuys was moved. He fumbled his
+great beard and finally began to speak.
+
+"Come closer, Nkoos," came the royal command. "Send my indunas away. I
+would speak with you alone."
+
+Tuys motioned to the indunas to go, and they filed out. Then Buno saw
+me:
+
+"Welcome, little induna," he said, his voice seeming even fainter.
+"Welcome, Mzaan Bakoor! You are my friend, too. You must remain with
+Oom Tuys and me, for I have a request to make that you shall inherit
+from him when he is gone."
+
+Tuys and I sat close to Buno, and then I saw how little life was left
+in his once powerful body.
+
+"Gin! Give me gin," Buno pleaded. "I must have strength to talk. Give
+me gin!"
+
+Tuys poured out a large drink of the fiery liquid and the king choked
+it down. He gasped for a moment, and then went on in a stronger voice.
+
+"Nkoos, my white brother," Buno said. "You are not of our people and
+therefore cannot die with me. You cannot have the joy and honor of
+joining the king in death. For I know now that I am dying. Perhaps I
+shall not live to see another sunrise."
+
+I felt that he was right. One so weak and emaciated could not live
+long. Undoubtedly Buno was dying.
+
+"But you can serve my people when I am dead," he continued, "by
+continuing to be their true friend, just as you have been mine. I
+would have you make a paper which would tell all the world that you
+are the guardian of the people of Swaziland. When you die you can make
+Mzaan Bakoor the guardian. He will be a man then and will care for my
+poor people. Swaziland has many enemies--the Boers, the English, the
+Zulus, and others. All desire our land. You can prevent them from
+taking it. Will you be their guardian when I am gone?"
+
+Tuys met the feverish eyes of the dying monarch and then his deep
+voice rumbled. I remember noting how different it was from that of Buno.
+
+"O King, you have spoken!" he answered. "Your word is my command. So
+long as I live I shall guard your people and shall protect them from
+their enemies!"
+
+"It is well, Nkoos," Buno said, his voice scarce above a whisper. Then
+he closed his eyes for a moment and rested. In a little while he asked
+for more gin, and then asked Tuys to call the indunas. They filed it
+and stood on each side of the recumbent king. There were ten or twelve
+of them, all the greatest chiefs in Swaziland. Umzulek, I remember,
+stood at Buno's feet.
+
+After a brief silence Buno spoke.
+
+"Indunas, I am dying," he said, his voice again quite clear. "Soon I
+shall leave you, never to return. I go to the caves from which none
+come back. Until now I have feared to die. I feared that enemies might
+bring evil days to Swaziland. Now, however, I go in peace. Oom Tuys,
+my friend, has promised to be the friend and guardian of our country
+when I am no longer here. He shall protect Swaziland from the whites
+and Zulus so long as he lives, and when he is gone, Mzaan Bakoor, who
+will be a man then and powerful, will act in his place. O indunas, you
+must look to my white brother for help when Swaziland needs it. This
+is my command!"
+
+Then he stopped. When Buno said "This is my command!" his illness
+seemed to drop away from him and he became the great king again. The
+indunas raised their hands in token of acceptance of Buno's command
+and then all together said, "The king's word is law!"
+
+For some reason or other I glanced at Umzulek. He made the same motion
+as the others, but there was an intangible suggestion of revolt in his
+acceptance. I had a sudden feeling that he would make trouble after
+Buno was gone.
+
+"Once again I shall see my impis," said Buno, his voice again
+weakening. "Each day may be the last, but each day my warriors must
+salute their king once more!"
+
+Next came an extraordinary exhibition. All but four of the indunas
+went out. Those remaining lifted Buno up--and I noted that they did it
+with ease--and half-carried, half-dragged him through the low opening
+of the hut to the clean air outside. There they laid him on a couch,
+facing the thousands of warriors.
+
+The whole affair seemed rehearsed. No sooner was the king settled, his
+eyes sweeping the serried ranks of the impis, than an imposing induna
+stepped out and led them in the royal salute. Three times they gave
+it, with the sound of thunder in the mountains, and at each crash I
+could see a faint smile soften Buno's harsh features. He had lived a
+king and like a king would die!
+
+Then followed a sort of march past. It seemed to me that untold
+thousands of these great warriors went by, each raising his arms above
+his head in salute as he passed. Before long Buno became faint again,
+and Tuys gave him a little more gin. How he was able to stick out this
+review was beyond me. I could not see where he got the strength.
+
+Down in my heart I had a fear that something would go wrong and that
+Buno would show his savagery by having some poor warrior killed,
+partly to satisfy his blood-craving and partly to impress us. However,
+luck was with us. No one blundered, and when the impis had passed by
+they re-formed along the roadway and gave the triple royal salute.
+That was the end, and the indunas carried Buno back to his hut. He
+told Tuys that he wanted to sleep and would send for him when he
+awaked. This was our dismissal, and we went to our wagon, which was at
+the usual place.
+
+I was very hungry and was glad to find that Tuys's servants had
+prepared food. Tuys was eating and remarking on the condition of the
+king when suddenly an induna came running in to us. He did not wait
+for any of the usual formalities, but dashed right up to where we sat
+on the ground, chewing our rusks and biltong.
+
+"Come quick, come quick, Nkoos!" he gasped. "The king is dying! A
+puff-adder has bitten him. Come quick! He calls you!"
+
+We dropped our food and followed the chief at a run. In a few seconds
+we threw ourselves into Buno's hut. A number of indunas were about
+him, all very excited. He was breathing heavily, his eyes fixed on the
+smoke-hole in the roof.
+
+Tuys stood by his head and said, "I am here, O King!" This he repeated
+three or four times, the last time in a fair shout, before Buno looked
+at him. For a moment the king licked his lips and made as though to
+speak. Finally the words came:
+
+"I am going now, Nkoos! I am as good as dead!" he cried, his voice
+shrill in its weakness. "The snake has done what the fever failed to
+do--the snake has given me release!"
+
+Then he shook as though with a violent chill. His hands opened and
+shut convulsively and his head rolled from side to side. After a
+moment he became still and began speaking again. I could see that his
+body had begun to swell; he looked bloated.
+
+"It is the end!" he croaked. "I die! I die!... The king dies! But the
+king will die like a man! The king will die on his feet, like a
+warrior!"
+
+With superhuman strength he heaved himself up and sat bolt upright.
+Tuys and several of the indunas sprang to his aid, and in a moment
+they had him on his feet. His legs seemed perfectly stiff.
+
+"Let go! Let go!" he cried. "I am a man and will meet death face to
+face!"
+
+They took their hands off him, and he stood swaying back and forth,
+his mouth working as he tried to speak. The light from the smoke-hole
+struck him on the head and deepened the lines of his face, throwing
+heavy shadows under the eyes and chin. These shadows intensified the
+cruelty of his face, and I felt a cold shudder. Buno dying was even
+more terrible than Buno killing!
+
+He must have stood for a moment only, but it seemed an age to me. His
+rolling eyes passed from chief to chief and his shaking right hand
+tore an assegai from the nearest. Then the end!
+
+Raising himself on his toes, his body straight and head thrown back,
+he threw both hands up and brought the spear down with a vicious
+stabbing motion.
+
+"Soukbulala! Soukbulala!" he shouted, and pitched forward dead. Tuys,
+I remember, almost caught him as he fell. Later I learned that his
+last cry was the war-shout of the Swazis. It means "I'll kill you!"
+
+"He died as he lived," Tuys said to me in Dutch out of the corner of
+his mouth, while he leaned down and turned Buno over. Then he assisted
+the indunas in laying him out with his head on the block and a
+wonderful fur robe over his wasted body.
+
+When this was completed the indunas stepped back and gave their dead
+king the royal salute. A moment later one of them stepped out of the
+hut and raised his deep voice in a solemn shout.
+
+"Nkoos ou pelela! E' Buno impela e baba amaswazi ou pelela guti!" he
+cried. This he repeated over and over until it became a sort of chant.
+It was the announcement of Buno's death and, translated, was about as
+follows, "The king is dead! Buno the Great, the father of his people,
+is dead!"
+
+We got out of the hut as soon as we could, and found the natives
+running from all directions. Soon there was a great mob. They were
+quiet, but each seemed apprehensive. Their voices rose in a subdued
+murmur. As I watched, it occurred to me that I did not see Umzulek
+anywhere. It seemed queer that the king's brother should not be there.
+
+Then came cries of "The queen! The queen! Tzaneen! Tzaneen!" and I
+could see the crowd split, leaving a wide passageway. Down the alley
+came a score of splendid warriors, in their midst the finest looking
+woman I had yet seen. She walked with head erect and steady tread,
+exactly as a queen should carry herself.
+
+"It's Tzaneen, the queen," Tuys said, catching me by the arm. "She is
+the queen, and her unborn child will be the ruler of Swaziland. Watch
+closely now."
+
+She stopped short in front of us and saluted Tuys. She was about six
+feet tall and was a most imposing figure.
+
+"Nkoos, is it true that Buno is dead?" she asked in a level voice.
+
+"Nkosikaas, the king is dead," Tuys replied. "His body lies within. A
+snake killed him."
+
+"How did the snake come to his kraal?" Tzaneen asked, eyeing Tuys
+keenly. "Did that snake come on two feet?"
+
+This was a new idea. It had not occurred to me to question the manner
+in which the snake had reached the hut. With all the warriors about,
+even though they may have been taking their midday sleep, it seemed
+very peculiar that the puff-adder should have been able to reach Buno
+without being seen and killed. Again I found myself asking for Umzulek.
+
+"I cannot tell how the snake came to the king," Tuys said, in answer
+to Tzaneen's questions. "I was at my camp when word was brought that
+Buno was dying."
+
+Tzaneen then stooped and entered the hut, followed by several other
+women whom I took to be her personal attendants or maids. We remained
+outside. It was not fitting that white men should see the Zulu
+princess, queen of Swaziland, with her dead king.
+
+No sooner had she entered the hut than the voices of the crowd rose in
+expectancy. I looked around to see another party coming up the rapidly
+formed passageway. There were more warriors in this party than the
+other, and again I could see a woman at the head of several others. As
+she passed, the people saluted. They had not done so before, and this
+struck me as queer.
+
+When the party came closer I could see that it was Queen Labotsibeni,
+the mother of the dead king. At her right hand was the missing
+Umzulek. She seemed much agitated, but he strode along quite cheerfully.
+
+Tuys stepped forward to meet the old queen. There was the usual
+salutation, and she asked, "My son, the king, is dead?"
+
+"Yes, Nkosikaas, it is so," Tuys assured her.
+
+They stood silent for a moment, and then quite suddenly Queen Tzaneen
+joined the group. I had been watching Labotsibeni so intently that I
+did not see her come out of the hut.
+
+The two queens stood looking at one another, each waiting for the
+other to salute. Umzulek, behind the old queen, was watching Tzaneen,
+and I had a feeling that something was about to happen. I could see
+that Tuys was interested and saw him shift his feet, his right hand
+carelessly resting on the butt of his revolver. He, too, was watching
+Umzulek. Finally Tzaneen spoke.
+
+"Queen Mother," she said, addressing Labotsibeni, "Our king is dead!
+You have lost your son and I my husband, the father of my unborn
+child, who is to be king of Swaziland."
+
+"What if your child be a woman?" snapped back the old queen, who had
+evidently been thinking along practical lines. "Who is to rule
+Swaziland until your child is born?"
+
+"I am the queen!" said Tzaneen, drawing herself up until she looked it
+and gazing fixedly at the old queen.
+
+Labotsibeni met her eyes without flinching, and then without another
+word pushed by her and entered the hut where her son's body lay.
+Tzaneen, calling her people to her, strode through the crowd. As she
+went, they gave her the royal salute. It looked as though the people
+were acknowledging her as their ruler.
+
+Tuys and I stood back during the brief exchange between the queens. It
+was none of our business, of course, but he was keenly interested and
+did not miss a word. We decided that we were not wanted at the royal
+kraal about this time and went back to our camp. The day was dying,
+anyway, and Tuys said he thought it would be dangerous to be abroad
+that night.
+
+"When the fires are lighted to-night," Tuys told me as soon as we
+reached camp, "the witch-doctors will kill the ten indunas chosen to
+die with the king. We shall not go and see this. When the council
+chose these men, I was to be the first man killed, because I was a
+friend of Buno. Umzulek was one of his council and I don't trust him.
+Buno ordered that I was not to be killed because I was white, but
+accidents happen in Swaziland, as you know, and I don't care to take
+any chances."
+
+This seemed good sense to me. Now that Buno, our protector, was dead,
+I had begun to worry about our safety. The fact that Buno had
+appointed Tuys as "guardian" of his people might not carry as much
+weight as he thought.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII
+
+The royal funeral--The "thunder of the shields"--Not afraid to
+die--The witch-doctor's bloody work--What Labotsibeni wanted--The
+burial of the indunas--Rain-making and the "rain stone"--Buno's burial
+in the caves--Witch-doctors prevent our entering the caves--Labotsibeni
+sends for gin.
+
+
+We had not been in camp more than a few minutes when an induna came to
+see Tuys. He said he came from Queen Labotsibeni and that she wanted
+him to go and see her. Tuys did not like the idea.
+
+"Tell Queen Labotsibeni that I am here," he said. "If she wants to see
+me, let her come to me here!"
+
+As the fires were beginning to glow in the dusk, the old queen came.
+She was accompanied by only two or three warriors and several women.
+Tuys gave her a bottle of gin, and she took a very large drink before
+they started talking. Like all the Swazis, she was inordinately fond
+of spirits.
+
+I sat close to Tuys, feeling sure that I would hear something
+interesting. Labotsibeni did not want to talk while I was there and
+suggested that I go and see the sacrifice. She said she would send her
+warriors with me and thus I could see the ten indunas killed. This did
+not appeal strongly to me, but Tuys seemed to think I ought not to
+miss it.
+
+"Mzaan Bakoor, you won't get another chance soon to see a Swazi king's
+burial ceremonies," he said. "You had better go." Then he added in
+Dutch, "Don't be afraid, boy. You are perfectly safe with her men. No
+one dare touch them."
+
+So I reluctantly went. It was dark by this time, and it seemed as
+though all Swaziland was going to attend the sacrifice. We soon found
+ourselves in a great crowd, every one armed and in full war costume.
+There were no women, these being left behind to mind the fires.
+
+The two warriors who acted as my escort were great grim-faced savages,
+both of them a head taller than me. They must have been well over six
+feet, and I had to almost trot to keep up with them. Both were
+indunas, and from what they said I gathered that a brother of one of
+them was to be killed at the sacrifice. Both spoke of his impending
+death as though it were a great honor. It was not until the actual
+ceremony that I was sure whose brother it was.
+
+The fire in front of Buno's hut was a great blaze. It lighted up the
+scores of huts nearby and revealed thousands of warriors drawn up in
+rows, more than twenty deep, about it. By using Queen Labotsibeni's
+name, my escort forced our way through until we stood on the very edge
+of the fire. All about me I could hear the deep-throated voices of the
+warriors.
+
+For fully fifteen minutes nothing happened, except that those behind
+seemed to press closer. Then suddenly a number of men dashed into the
+open space, each bearing a huge bundle of faggots. They waited,
+bundles on head, and an expectant hush succeeded the hum of voices.
+The only sound was the crackle of the fire.
+
+From where we stood we could see the entrance to Buno's hut, standing
+out like a black spot in the illumination. While we watched a strange
+figure came out. He was wearing furs and feathers and wore a hideous
+mask. It was the head witch-doctor! Behind him came six or seven
+lesser witch-doctors bearing the body of the king. They straightened
+up, and a second later lifted their burden above their heads. At this
+the head witch-doctor threw up his hands and the entire multitude of
+warriors gave the triple royal salute. The earth fairly trembled when
+their feet came down. Then the faggot-men threw their loads into the
+fire and the flames leaped a score of feet into the air. The king's
+body was placed on the mats in front of his hut, the witch-doctors
+forming a guard on either side. This was the beginning of the real
+ceremony. Led by the chief witch-doctor, the dancing began.
+
+Now the Swaziland idea of dancing consists of leaps into the air and
+incessant stamping of the feet. Soon thousands were dancing and the
+dust became a haze before the bright flames of the fire. I was
+probably the only person within sight of Buno's body who was not
+dancing. My two bodyguards were leaping wildly, and I noted that they
+were most earnest in their exercise.
+
+The dance must have lasted five minutes. It was brought to a sudden
+stop by the chief witch-doctor, who threw up his arms and called a
+halt. In just as short a time as they had gone dance mad, the entire
+assemblage quieted down. The stirring ceased and I could feel the air
+of dread expectancy that showed the end of the drama was in sight.
+
+[Illustration: QUEEN TZANEEN, MOTHER OF THE CROWN PRINCE
+
+She is wearing a silk wrap presented to her by Dr. O'Neil. Note the
+hair, which is worked up into this peculiar shape upon marriage]
+
+[Illustration: QUEEN TZANEEN WITH SOME ZULU PRINCESSES
+
+They had arrived to present themselves in marriage to the prince. They
+are cousins of the queen, as she is a Zulu by birth]
+
+[Illustration: UMZULEK, A RESOURCEFUL AND INFLUENTIAL EXILE
+
+He is living in a territory set aside for him. On his right is Prince
+Bilakzi, who is soliciting his assistance for Sebuza in obtaining his
+throne]
+
+The witch-doctor gave some sort of a command, and from behind Buno's
+hut came ten of the most splendid savages I have ever seen. They were
+all indunas and wore the full costume of their rank. On their heads
+were great plumes and each carried his shield, knob-kerrie, and
+assegai. With steady tramp they passed by their dead king and lined
+up, facing his body, in front of the fire.
+
+No sooner were they in place than they gave the royal salute. Then
+they did something I had not seen before. With steady rythmic strokes
+they beat on their great shields with their knob-kerries. This lasted
+for only a moment, but it was like the throbbing of a heart--the heart
+of Swaziland, it seemed to me.
+
+When the hollow roar died, the chief witch-doctor stepped out and made
+an oration. We could not hear him very plainly. However, I caught a
+few phrases.
+
+"Indunas, great heroes of Swaziland," he shouted, illustrating his
+words with extravagant gestures and contortions, "You have been chosen
+of all our people to die with our king. There is not one present who
+does not envy you! Tens of thousands are here, and all covet the honor
+that is yours.
+
+"Buno, our great king, the saviour of Swaziland, has gone! Great
+indunas, you would not want to live without your peerless leader--life
+would mean nothing!"
+
+There was a lot more, but I did not get it. The oration must have
+lasted a good half hour, the condemned men standing like statues all
+the while. I did not understand the last remarks of the witch-doctor,
+but the instant he stopped the royal salute, repeated once, crashed out.
+
+Then the first of the ten indunas stepped out. He raised his shield
+and knob-kerrie above his head and saluted the dead king. Immediately
+came the "thunder of the shields." Every warrior in the entire crowd
+began striking his shield with his knob-kerrie. There was no staccato
+to the blows--rather a rubbing, pulling stroke that brought each blow
+out with repeated vibrations. In a few moments a cadence was set up
+and the strokes came all together at equal intervals. The effect was
+terrific; the air seemed to pulsate with the vibrations and it seemed
+to catch me right in the pit of the stomach.
+
+The steady drumming slowly rose in a crescendo, and then the induna
+turned from the king's body and with one far-flung motion threw his
+shield and arms into the fire. Next he turned, threw his head back,
+and faced the body. Slowly and firmly he stepped forward until he
+stood beside his dead king.
+
+The chief witch-doctor stood a pace or two from him, his right hand
+holding a great curved knife which gleamed and shimmered in the bright
+light of the fire. There was a tense moment, made doubly painful by
+the steady roar of the beaten shields. I was fascinated. I knew what
+was coming and dreaded to see it. Yet I found myself powerless to look
+away; my eyes were riveted on that murderous knife!
+
+Slowly the witch-doctor raised the knife above his head. Then one step
+forward, a lightning thrust, and the induna came down like a falling
+tree! He did not stir; there was no convulsive death struggle. The
+doctor was an efficient butcher.
+
+Each of the others went to his death in exactly the same way. There
+was no flinching, no hesitation; open-eyed and unafraid these savages
+went like stoics to their death. The witch-doctor did not bungle; each
+stroke brought death and there was no need for the services of his
+assistants who stood ready with stabbing spears.
+
+The next to the last man to die was the brother of the fiercest of my
+two bodyguards. This was evident from the new energy with which my man
+beat his shield. If I had not noticed this, his remark after the knife
+went home would have enlightened me.
+
+"A man! A brave man! A warrior!" he said to his companion in a hoarse,
+dust-choked voice. "My brother is a brave induna. He is a true son of
+my mother!"
+
+When the last man was sacrificed, the witch-doctor made another
+speech. It was about what heroes the ten indunas had been and what a
+great king they had lost. One sentence I remember.
+
+"So long as warriors are willing to die for Swaziland," he shouted,
+"our country is safe! So long as our best face death without fear, we
+need not fear the Zulus, Boers, or British. The white men fear death.
+They can never stand against our impis if our warriors are led by such
+men as those who died to-night!"
+
+The thought came to me that it was rather foolish to kill indunas,
+leaders of warriors, in this fashion, but it was the ancient custom
+and their brave death made for heroism among those who lived. Each
+kraal to which one of the sacrificed indunas belonged gloried in his
+death and it became a tradition for the younger warriors to live up to.
+
+The doctor ceased speaking after a little and the crowd began to move
+away. The king's body was taken back to his hut and the fire allowed
+to burn low. When we left, which we did as soon as we could, the chief
+witch-doctor was marching up and down outside the hut and accompanying
+his steps with a sort of chant.
+
+My most distinct memory of the sacrifice is the sensation I suffered
+when the drumming of the shields reached its height. I shall never
+forget this. Every time I hear the bass drum stroked, bringing out all
+its bass vibrations, memory jerks me back to the unerring slash of the
+sacrificial knife at Buno's kraal in Lebombo. I know that for months
+afterward I used to hear those shields in that brief moment between
+wakefulness and sleep.
+
+Labotsibeni had gone when I reached camp. Oom Tuys was pacing up and
+down, smoking his great pipe and waiting for me. He gave me a hug when
+I reached the firelight and seemed quite relieved at seeing me.
+
+"I was worried, you were so long," he said. "Buno's death means
+trouble in Swaziland, and I was afraid you might have been captured as
+a hostage or even killed. Tell me, what did you see?"
+
+Then I told him all about the sacrifice. I found myself strangely
+tired and lay down while I talked. Tuys listened without interruption
+until I had finished. Then he asked, "Are you sure there were ten
+indunas sacrificed?"
+
+I told him I was sure, because I had mechanically counted them when
+they stood before the fire.
+
+"Then I am safe," he replied. "If ten have been killed, there will be
+no more. Ten is the royal number, and there must not be one more or
+less. Good!"
+
+Then he told me about Queen Labotsibeni's visit. It seems she had
+called on "The White King of Swaziland" for his help in a matter of
+importance to the state. Buno's death had left the throne vacant.
+Queen Tzaneen could not reign because she was not a native-born Swazi.
+Her child, if a man, could not become king until he became of age.
+Hence the throne was vacant, and Labotsibeni wanted Tuys to use his
+influence to have her recognized as queen by the British and Boers.
+
+"The old lady is right," he said. "She is the only one able to rule
+Swaziland. Every one knows that she practically ruled as the royal
+queen of King Umbandine and during Buno's reign she was always the
+power behind the throne. Most of the time she was not very far behind,
+either!
+
+"She is very keen. She demanded that I pay the tribute to her in place
+of Buno! I told her that she could have the gin, but that I could not
+give her the gold without permission from Oom Paul. She didn't like
+that very much, but I was able to make her see that I was right.
+To-morrow I shall take her the gin and she'll have to be satisfied
+with that.
+
+"I shall recommend that Labotsibeni be appointed regent until the
+right king is found. Umzulek, I hear, thinks that he ought to succeed
+Buno, and there is talk that he will take the throne by force. I shall
+have to prevent that."
+
+Exhausted as I was, I found sleep difficult that night. For some time
+I lay there listening to Tuys's regular breathing and afraid that he
+might snore, as he did sometimes. If he had, I know I could not have
+stood it--each deep note would have started the shields drumming again.
+
+We were up at dawn next morning and never did that first cup of coffee
+taste so good. Buno was to be buried that day and I hoped to see a
+ceremony. Before we had breakfasted a score of Labotsibeni's warriors,
+led by a lesser induna, arrived as our escort for the day. They
+brought word that Buno would be "taken to the caves when the shadows
+were least," or at noon. The indunas who had been sacrificed, however,
+were being buried during the morning. So we decided to attend the
+funerals.
+
+I was much disappointed. There were no ceremonials. In fact, the most
+exciting thing that happened was that one of the junior witch-doctors
+was bitten by a snake and speedily died. The indunas were buried in a
+tangled patch of brush and tall grass, with a few trees breaking its
+monotony. This was set apart for indunas only, the plain people being
+buried anywhere they happened to die. All the important chiefs of
+Swaziland had been buried there ever since the days of King Umbandine,
+yet the place was absolutely unkempt and full of snakes.
+
+When we arrived at Buno's kraal, the bodies of the indunas were laid
+out in a row. Near each stood witch-doctors and warriors. Not far away
+were a number of women and children. These were the wives of the dead
+men.
+
+As we came up an order was given and the warriors lifted up the
+bodies. Each band of pall-bearers was led by a witch-doctor, while the
+widows and children of each induna fell in behind. There was no
+wailing or mourning--the women seemed as stoical as their departed
+husbands had been when they faced the knife on the night before.
+
+All the women had their heads shaved as a sign that their husbands
+were dead. This is their custom. From her earliest girlhood the Swazi
+woman trains her hair to grow in a sort of cone or pyramid. When her
+husband dies the hair is shaved right up to this mound, leaving much
+of the head bare. The daughters of these widows had their heads
+entirely shaved. This also is the custom, so it is quite possible to
+tell for whom the Swazi women mourn and also how recent is their loss.
+
+Tuys and I followed the procession to the burial ground--"The Place of
+Indunas," they call it--and saw the simple ceremonies. These only
+consisted of placing the body in a shallow hole, scratching the dirt
+over it, and then piling rocks on top.
+
+Beside each grave was placed a pot of corn-meal and some uncooked
+meat, so that the induna might have food if he should come back. This
+was the only suggestion of future life. The Swazi is a very primitive
+savage; he has no hell or heaven and, under normal circumstances, no
+god. Their only supernatural belief is in a sort of evil spirit or
+devil. This devil, however, is under the control of the ruler and
+usually is most active in sending or holding back the rain so
+necessary to the scanty crops grown by the Swazis.
+
+In connection with this devil it is important to know that Queen
+Labotsibeni was the "rain-maker" of Swaziland. This gave her great
+power, since the natives fully believed in her supernatural powers.
+How she gained this control over the devil is an interesting chapter
+in Swazi history.
+
+In the old days the Zulu chiefs possessed this rain-making gift, which
+was supposed to be vested in a small round stone called the "rain
+stone." When Ama-Swazi led the rebellion against the Zulus and broke
+away from them, he captured this stone and took it with him. Much of
+his ascendancy was based on its possession.
+
+Umbandine, his son, inherited the stone, and Queen Labotsibeni
+promptly annexed it on his death. King Buno never owned it, and during
+his entire reign his mother provided the rain for Swaziland.
+
+Labotsibeni was wise in her way and made the "rain stone" a source of
+revenue. Now and then dry spells strike Swaziland, and the hot sun
+burns up the crops and causes much suffering. At such a time the
+indunas came to the old queen and begged her to make rain. She always
+went through some incantation before assenting, and then announced her
+price. It was usually a portion of corn from each kraal, the total
+amounting to many bushels. When this was paid, she agreed to make
+rain. It is peculiar that she was often successful and that rain
+followed shortly after her promise.
+
+If, however, the rain did not come, she would announce that one of her
+chiefs was plotting against her and that she had surrendered the rule
+of the weather to the devil so that he might punish her people. On
+such occasions her wrath was terrible, and this is probably one of the
+reasons why she was so feared. Tuys told me that Labotsibeni in a rage
+was a "perfect she-devil" and that even her indunas would run to avoid
+her. She was a wise old queen; no matter how the weather acted, she
+had it arranged so that she could not lose!
+
+On the way out of the indunas' burying-ground, the witch-doctor
+stepped on a snake. We came up to him as he sat waiting for death, the
+body of the adder beside him with its head crushed. He rocked slowly
+back and forth, looking straight ahead and making no sound. I wanted
+to do something for him.
+
+"What's the use, lad?" Tuys said. "There is no cure for the
+puff-adder's bite, unless you have a drug-shop along. He must die, and
+die soon, and he knows it. Come on, unless you want to see him go?"
+
+I most certainly did not, so we went along, keeping our eyes on the
+ground lest we run afoul of a snake. I looked back a moment later and
+saw that the stricken man had laid down, and then I knew that his
+suffering would soon be over. None of the other natives seemed to give
+a second thought to him; under Buno's rule they had grown more callous
+than ever.
+
+It was almost noon when we reached Buno's kraal, and there was a large
+gathering of witch-doctors about his hut. The witch-doctors of our
+burial-party joined them, and Tuys informed me that practically all
+the witch-doctors in Swaziland were there.
+
+"Now would be a good time for some target practice," he said grimly.
+"In about five minutes a few quick shots could remove most of the
+sources of trouble in this country. If those witch-doctors were all
+killed, Swaziland would be a happier land."
+
+Soon the head witch-doctor--the one who did the butchering so well the
+night before--detached himself from the group and began to look at the
+sun. He stood his wand on the ground and studied its shadow. After a
+time this seemed to satisfy him, and he sent two of the others out of
+the kraal on the run. Shortly after came the sound of many feet, and
+soon the royal impi filed into the enclosure. The warriors ranged
+themselves on either side of the pathway, just as I had so often seen
+them do before.
+
+When they were in place the chief doctor went into Buno's hut. Out he
+came a few minutes later, with six others carrying the body of the
+king. As they swung it to their shoulders the impi saluted. After the
+third thud of stamping feet the chief doctor started down the lane of
+warriors. Behind him came those bearing the body, with the other
+doctors following them. Last of all came a number of unarmed men
+carrying fresh-killed beef, corn, and pots of tswala.
+
+This was the king's funeral cortege proper. When it reached the end of
+the impi, the warriors turned and followed in marching order, acting
+as escort. Tuys and I dropped in behind. I was very curious to see
+"the caves" where Buno was to be buried. As we followed the slow
+procession, Tuys told me about them.
+
+"No white man has ever entered these caves," he said. "They are a
+little distance up the mountain and are said to be immense. The
+witch-doctors are the only natives who ever enter them, and they tell
+queer tales about what goes on. They say that there are rivers and
+smoke and bright lights in some of the caves. I don't believe this, of
+course, but they say it. I think that the mystery of the caves is part
+of the foolishness practiced by these witch-doctors and is only
+trumped up to keep the people away. Not long ago when I asked a
+witch-doctor if he would show me King Umbandine's grave in the caves,
+he pretended to be much frightened and told me that the devil lived in
+the caves and would be angry if a white man entered them.
+
+"Only the kings of Swaziland are buried in the caves. Ama-Swazi was
+the first. His body was brought up from his kraal in the low country.
+Umbandine is there, and now Buno is going to join them. I suppose
+Labotsibeni will have the honor when she dies, although it is quite
+likely that the witch-doctors will refuse to allow a woman to be
+buried there."
+
+The caves were about four miles from the royal kraal at Lebombo and
+much of the trail was uphill. We reached them in about an hour, and I
+saw that there were a number of entrances, all fissures in the rocks.
+
+The procession stopped and the bearers were relieved by six others.
+The change was made without laying the king's body on the ground. This
+was in accordance with the ancient customs--a king's body must not
+touch the ground from the time it starts on its last trek until it is
+laid at rest in the caves.
+
+The new bearers faced about and raised the body high above their
+heads. While they held it there the royal impi gave their dead king
+his last salute. Then the witch-doctors took the food from the unarmed
+men and a moment later the entire band of "priests" disappeared among
+the rocks. That was the last of Buno, rightly called "The Terrible,"
+the most powerful and cruel king Swaziland has ever had. The impi
+turned and started down the trail at a smart pace, leaving Tuys and me
+behind. These great warriors seemed glad that the funeral was over.
+They swung by us with light steps, many of them grinning at the white
+men as they went by.
+
+Now I was very curious to know what was inside the caves. There was so
+much mystery about them that it fired my youthful imagination. I spoke
+of this to Tuys and was pleased to find that he also was curious.
+
+"Yes, I'd like to have a look at them," he said. "Buno and Labotsibeni
+have told me some queer yarns about them, and they are the one thing
+in Swaziland that I am not familiar with. Let's see if we can't get
+into them."
+
+The witch-doctors had not come out yet, and we decided to wait until
+they did. I suggested that they were engaged in some ceremony, but
+Tuys, knowing the native, would not agree with me.
+
+"Those humbugs are probably eating the food and drinking the good
+beer," he said, with a snort of disgust. "I'd hate to believe that
+they'd let it go to waste. I'll bet that Buno will go hungry if he
+comes back!"
+
+Expecting that they would soon come out, we hid behind some rocks,
+feeling sure that they would think we had gone back with the impi. Our
+guess was good. In a little while we saw them tramping down the trail.
+As soon as they passed the bend from beyond which the entrances to the
+caves could not be seen, we started on our exploration.
+
+There seemed to be any number of ways into these mysterious caves.
+However, Tuys's training led him to follow the footprints of the
+witch-doctors. They must have come out by another route, for all the
+prints faced inward.
+
+Tuys led, and I noticed that he was carrying his revolver in his hand,
+ready for instant use. We passed between a number of great rocks, all
+of which seemed to be split by some terrific force. But we did not go
+far. There came a sharp turn to the right, and straight in front of us
+was the entrance to the caves. In front of it stood six witch-doctors
+with assegais drawn back, ready to strike!
+
+Tuys did not hesitate long enough to take one breath. He wheeled in
+his tracks and we turned back. We did not run or make unseemly haste,
+but we certainly moved faster than we had come in. When we reached the
+outside, Tuys made but one remark.
+
+"Serves us right!" he exclaimed. "I ought to have had sense enough to
+count those witch-doctors."
+
+I remember that it was a hot walk back to our camp. Probably our
+chagrin added to the temperature.
+
+To this day no white man has penetrated the caves. I hope to do so the
+next time I visit Swaziland. I never had a chance on my subsequent
+visits, but I shall certainly find a way the next time. The thought is
+fascinating, but I suppose I shall be disappointed if I ever do
+explore this royal burial-place. Like most things in life, it will
+fail to come up to expectations.
+
+Not long after we reached our camp several indunas and a small band of
+warriors called on Tuys. They were part of the bodyguard of
+Labotsibeni and had come on a special errand.
+
+"Nkoos, White King," the chief induna began with much ceremony, "the
+great Queen Labotsibeni sends me to you with a message. Even now she,
+the mother of Buno, waits your answer."
+
+I was interested to see that he spoke of Buno as though that cruel
+ruler still lived. The thought came to me that his infamy would keep
+him alive for some time, at least in the memories of those who had
+witnessed any of his bloody pastimes.
+
+Tuys did not seem to understand what the induna was driving at, and he
+asked several questions. The chief said that the old queen had
+instructed him to ask Tuys if her "white brother" did not remember his
+promise. She was waiting for him to fulfil what he had said he would
+do. There was some more palaver, and then Tuys suddenly woke up.
+
+"Why, the old girl wants her gin!" he said, laughing. Then he got out
+four small cases of it and presented them to the induna.
+
+"I'd go along with him," Tuys said to me in Dutch, "if I was not
+afraid that I'd have to lie to the old queen. She wants the job of
+ruling Swaziland until the question of the new king is decided, and
+she expects me to get the British to acknowledge her as regent. I
+don't know what I'll be able to do, and if I promise that she will get
+the job, and she doesn't get it, I'll be in a fine pickle! I think
+I'll avoid her, and we'd better get going to-night and make a break
+for Rietvlei."
+
+[Illustration: SWAZI WARRIORS AND WOMEN DANCING
+
+The ceremonies were held when Dr. O'Neil and his companions were
+inducted into the royal impi]
+
+[Illustration: PRINCESSES OF ROYAL BIRTH
+
+The fourth from the left is a sister to Crown Prince Sebuza. They are
+all dressed up in gaudy colors--clothes which we had presented them]
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX
+
+Sibijaan's sportiveness almost costs his life--How Tuys became the
+friend of Buno--Labotsibeni endorsed as regent of Swaziland--Umzulek
+plots to seize the throne--The Boers invade Swaziland--Tuys dictates
+peace between the queens--Umzulek gets his lesson.
+
+
+The midday siesta period was about over and the kraals were beginning
+to show signs of life again. The native women were going about their
+domestic duties and the men, as usual, were resting in the shade and
+furbishing their weapons. Our activity in breaking camp did not
+attract much attention, except on the part of the usual number of
+small boys, and before long we were on the trail to the Valley of
+Heaven. We only traveled about half as fast as we had come in and were
+constantly being held up by crowds going in the same direction.
+Thousands upon thousands had come to see the sacrifice of the ten
+indunas and were now returning to their homes.
+
+Sibijaan nearly got us into a pretty row shortly before we struck the
+valley. He was driving the wagon with its four mules, and began to get
+impatient over the crowded roadway. He got careless with his sjambok
+and flicked a tall Swazi warrior on a naked but important part of his
+anatomy. Now the sjambok cuts like a knife, and the savage gave a
+tremendous jump. In fact, he seemed to me to jump twice--once straight
+up in the air and the second time toward the wagon, brandishing his
+assegai and shouting.
+
+Sibijaan dived into the wagon under the cover, and the enraged induna
+dashed round to the rear of the vehicle in the hope that its driver
+was trying to escape that way. Then ensued a sort of merry-go-round,
+the induna dashing madly from front to back of the wagon and Sibijaan
+trying to keep one guess ahead of him. Both were yelling, and Tuys and
+I hurried to stop the trouble. However, we were too late! The induna
+suddenly stopped at the side of the wagon where he could watch the
+front, his spear poised for murder. He was the cat watching the
+rat-hole, the hunter awaiting his prey.
+
+Tuys snatched his revolver from its holster and was just aiming at the
+savage when we saw the flap of the wagon-cover lifted just a little
+and a thin arm come out. In the hand was a short knob-kerrie, and it
+caught the irate chief on the back of the head with one fell sweep.
+Down he came with a crash, his shield thudding as it hit the ground.
+
+A second later Sibijaan hopped out of the wagon, knife in hand,
+evidently intending to finish the job. Tuys reached down from his
+horse and swung the little beggar up before him, where he gave him a
+good spanking. That was the end of the incident, since the induna
+found himself looking into the business end of Tuys's revolver when he
+woke up from his trance.
+
+Late that evening we camped in the Valley of Heaven. We passed several
+kraals in our leisurely progress and talked with some of the indunas.
+None of them seemed very sorry that Buno was gone, but there was a
+general expression of anxiety concerning the next ruler. Most of them
+thought that Labotsibeni should get the job, but not a few favored
+Umzulek--in fact, there seemed to be quite a strong Umzulek sentiment.
+
+During our next day's trek I asked Oom Tuys how it happened that he
+and Buno were such good friends. Tuys explained that he had originally
+befriended Buno and the Swazis because the Boers wanted the Swazis as
+a sort of bulwark against the British. On several occasions Tuys had
+been able to save land for Buno when certain of the English had tried
+to get it away from him, and this had made the savage his good friend
+for life. Incidentally, it helped the Boer cause.
+
+"The one great thing I did for Buno," Tuys went on, "was about two
+years ago when Oom Paul decided to discipline him. One of my bodyguard
+had talked too much in Pretoria and the President had learned about
+the bloody atrocities Buno was committing. It seems the story that
+really outraged Oom Paul's feelings was one about Buno having some
+young girls cut open.
+
+"Oom Paul sent for me and asked me about this. Naturally, I knew
+nothing about it. How could I? If I'd seen it, it was my duty to
+report it, wasn't it? If I hadn't seen it, how could I know anything
+about it? Of course I couldn't tell Oom Paul that Buno and I had an
+important business deal on at that time, could I?
+
+"Somehow or other I don't think Oom Paul believed me. He sent word to
+Buno that he must behave and stop killing people, and Buno sent word
+back that Paul had better mind his own business, or words to that
+general effect. The fool thought that I would protect him and that he
+could get cheeky with Oom Paul!
+
+"Well, the old man had had enough of Buno's nonsense and he sent a
+command of about five thousand men into Swaziland to smash him.
+Instead of leaving me out of it, our cunning President sent me along
+as second-in-command. I was the guide and all that sort of thing, and
+had to practically assure Buno's getting jolly well licked, if not
+killed. After some days we got to within twenty miles of Lebombo and
+planned to attack the royal kraal at dawn next morning.
+
+"I did not like the idea of Buno being captured, because I knew that
+would be the end of him. Oom Paul was not in the mood to stand further
+nonsense. That night I was in command of the sentries, and shortly
+after dark I placed my sergeant in charge and sneaked off to the kraal
+of a chief who lived near where we were camped. He knew me, and from
+him I got a good horse. Then I rode like the devil to Lebombo and
+warned Buno what was going to happen.
+
+"I got back to our camp just as the commando was saddling up to move
+to the attack. We rode hard and reached the kraal about four
+o'clock--to find the entire place empty. There wasn't a single Swazi
+there! The king and all his warriors had flown. So we were ordered to
+pursue him, and I led the way. Later I learned that we had gone in
+exactly the wrong direction, so Buno escaped.
+
+"Oom Paul decided that Buno had learned his lesson and would behave
+thereafter, since he had been shown that the Boers would come and get
+him if he did not. However, Buno felt that I would always pull him out
+of any hole he might get into, so the lesson was lost on him. One
+thing Oom Paul did accomplish, however, and that was to make Buno
+realize what a good friend I was!"
+
+My mother was very glad to see us when we reached Rietvlei. Father had
+returned, and he spoke sharply to Tuys for taking me with him on so
+dangerous a trip. Tuys told him that he had Buno's word for our
+safety, but that did not much impress my father.
+
+"The word of a kaffir is good so long as he remembers," he said, "but
+you know that the best of them are children, and children forget. It
+was lucky you came out as soon as you did. From what you have told me
+and from what I've heard conditions are likely to be bad in Swaziland
+until the government selects a ruler."
+
+Tuys and he then began discussing what should be done about this.
+Father, I found, knew all about the politics of Swaziland, and he
+agreed with Tuys that the old queen was the right person to rule until
+a king was set up. Their talk ended with my father writing a letter
+for Tuys to take to Oom Paul. He recommended that Labotsibeni be
+recognized as regent for the time being, or until Queen Tzaneen's
+child was born. If the child was a boy, he would be the next king of
+Swaziland; if a girl, arrangements would have to be made for one of
+Buno's brothers to take the throne.
+
+Buno had a number of brothers, among whom were Lomwazi, Umzulek,
+Debeseembie, and one other whose name I have forgotten but who was
+known as a drunkard and a generally disreputable character.
+
+Oom Tuys left next morning to report conditions to Oom Paul, and we
+heard nothing for several months. Finally, on the new moon, about
+three months later, messengers came to Rietvlei from Queen
+Labotsibeni. Tuys was with us, having arrived several days before.
+
+After the usual salutes and other ceremonial the head induna spoke:
+
+"Nkoos, the queen mother sends to you in her trouble. Her son, the
+late King Buno, gave you guardianship over Swaziland and Queen
+Labotsibeni wants your counsel. Even now Queen Tzaneen, the royal
+widow, gives birth. We do not yet know whether it will be a man-child
+or not. Umzulek plots to take the throne by force and is mustering his
+impis. Thousands are flocking to his support and the impis of the
+queens are gathering at Zombode. If you do not come quickly, there
+will be war in our country. Queen Labotsibeni prays that you come and
+prevent war."
+
+This was the situation that father and Tuys had feared. Tuys had his
+orders from Oom Paul and knew what he was to do. He told the induna
+what to expect.
+
+"Tell your queen," he said, "that I am coming within three days with a
+great army of white men. Tell her that I shall see that the throne is
+preserved to the dynasty and that none except the one to whom it
+rightfully belongs shall become king of Swaziland."
+
+With this message the induna withdrew, and we saw him and his men
+leaving at top speed to carry these words of cheer to Labotsibeni.
+Then came a hurried mobilization of all the fighting Boers within a
+day's ride of Rietvlei. Word was sent far and wide over the veldt--to
+the outlying farms, to the small towns, to Belfast, and to every place
+where men might be found.
+
+Within three days the Valley of Reeds became an armed camp. There were
+more than a thousand well armed, hard-riding Boers waiting for the
+word to trek into Swaziland. These people of ours were a hardy lot.
+There were men of sixty and even seventy years, and mixed in with them
+were their sons and grandsons, many of the latter being boys of
+sixteen and seventeen. All, however, were well armed and serious. They
+were on a serious business and stood ready to die in the service of
+their great leader, Oom Paul.
+
+At dawn on the fourth day we started. From the very beginning it was a
+hard ride. The burghers rode in what was practically military
+formation, two by two, with Tuys leading. I went along as his aide and
+rode as close to him as the trails would permit. I have often thought
+of that trek. The feeling between Boers and British was getting more
+bitter every day, and these Boer farmers were really taking a training
+march for the dark days that were to come so soon. It was a heartening
+sight to look back on our cavalcade and see the great hats bobbing up
+and down, the lean, wiry ponies, the ready rifles, and the grim faces,
+most of them bearded.
+
+We took no natives with us. Our food was biltong and rusks, and each
+man carried enough to last him for two weeks. Every Boer took care of
+his own horse and did everything for himself. It was felt that there
+might be trouble, and Tuys never trusted the kaffirs in a tight place.
+
+During the morning of the second day's trek, not long after we had
+passed the Vaal River, we were met by several indunas and a small
+impi. They stood in the middle of the roadway making peace signs, and
+Tuys brought our little army to a halt. Then he and I rode forward and
+waited.
+
+The chief induna came to meet us. I recognized him as one of those
+whom I had seen in Queen Tzaneen's train and knew that he came from her.
+
+"Nkoos, Queen Tzaneen sent me to you," he said to Tuys, with all
+humility. "Yesterday she gave birth to a prince, the rightful heir to
+the throne! She sends you the message that she is afraid that Umzulek
+will kill her son. Even now she is afraid to leave Lebombo. Also,
+Queen Tzaneen asks that you protect her from Queen Labotsibeni and
+prevent the queen mother from seizing the throne."
+
+Tuys listened to his message and then asked what was really going on
+in Swaziland. The induna told him that Umzulek had gathered his impis
+together and it was rumored that he would take the throne by force.
+Queen Labotsibeni had gathered all her warriors, and it was understood
+that she would fight to keep Umzulek from becoming ruler. Queen
+Tzaneen, on her side, had mustered all the men who remained faithful
+to the memory of King Buno, and it was said that she would take the
+throne if she could muster enough force to do it. Taking it all in
+all, the stage was set for a bloody civil strife in Swaziland.
+
+"It looks as though we had work ahead," Tuys said to me in Dutch,
+after the induna had related these events. "Well, we have our job to
+do and the sooner we get it over the better."
+
+Then he turned to the induna.
+
+"Tell your queen that we have heard the story and will take care of
+her," he directed him. Tuys then gave the word to continue our march.
+
+Unlike all other armies, our little force was truly democratic and
+every man was entitled to know what out task was to be. Tuys sent for
+several of the leaders, men who headed the commandos of their
+districts, and told them about the political situation in Swaziland.
+
+"Oom Paul's orders are that we must secure the throne for the rightful
+heir," he said. "Labotsibeni must be appointed regent until the new
+prince comes of age, and it is our job to pacify the people and
+prevent war. If, however, war there must be, we shall strike first and
+strike hard! We must remember that death is the only argument that a
+kaffir understands and must make a clean job of it."
+
+I understood what a "clean job" meant--that every native, chief or
+plain warrior, who did not like the conditions Tuys laid down was to
+be killed. It began to look as though we should have some hard
+fighting and our devoted band of about a thousand would find
+themselves pitted against great odds.
+
+We pushed our horses to their limit and made splendid time. The Boer
+pony or veldt-bred horse is almost tireless, and our mounts were
+extended to the utmost. The result was that we reached Zombode early
+next morning.
+
+When we came in sight of the kraals our cavalry was deployed in a
+double rank about five hundred horses wide. We trotted to the kraals
+in this formation, every man with his rifle on his hip, ready for
+anything. When we had halted, Tuys acknowledged the indunas that had
+come out to meet him. There was no formality about Tuys this time. He
+represented the Boer Government and was there as conqueror to lay down
+the law. The indunas noted the difference, and I could see the sullen
+glint in their eyes as they took their orders from him.
+
+"Tell Queen Labotsibeni that I am here," Tuys directed. "I shall wait
+for her only a short time and she had better come as quickly as she
+can."
+
+Without a word the indunas hastened into the royal kraal, while we
+loosened up a bit and let our horses breathe. The Boer knows how to
+take care of his mount, and here and there could be seen men arranging
+their girths and making their ponies more comfortable.
+
+In the very shortest time Queen Labotsibeni came out of her kraal,
+attended by Lomwazi, her indunas, and a number of warriors. The second
+they came in sight every man of our force was back again in his
+saddle, his rifle at the ready. The old queen walked slowly and
+seemingly with difficulty. She was very tall and quite fat, but
+carried herself with pride. As always, she was scrupulously clean, her
+black face shining in the early morning sun.
+
+Labotsibeni came to a halt about twenty feet in front of Tuys and me,
+and her bodyguard ranged themselves on either side of her. They were
+picked men and as fine figures of savages as was their old queen. Tuys
+let her wait for a moment and then got off his horse, motioning to me
+to join him. We stepped forward, and this time Tuys did not shake
+hands when greeting her.
+
+"Nkosikaas, I have heard what is going on in Swaziland," he said,
+simply but very severely, "and I have come with my army to see that
+justice is done. I come from Oom Paul, our great king, and he has
+authorized me to do as I see fit.
+
+"My order to you is that to-morrow you meet me at the little river
+which lies between Zombode and Lebombo. You will be there as soon as
+the sun shines on the water. There will be a conference and the peace
+of Swaziland will be assured. I have spoken!"
+
+Labotsibeni was a proud old woman and did not seem to like to have to
+take orders in this fashion. She looked at Tuys for a moment in a very
+indignant way, but dropped her eyes when they met his. She started to
+speak, and I could see that she had a lot to say, too. Tuys's glance
+cowed her, however, and after a moment of ground-searching her eyes
+ran up and down the ranks of our determined army.
+
+A moment later she gave in.
+
+"Nkoos, I shall be there," she said, quite humbly. Then she gave a
+sign to her indunas and warriors, and all together they gave Tuys the
+royal salute. This ended the interview. Without another word Tuys
+shouted the command for us to march, and we started for Lebombo.
+
+Our only stop was to water the horses at the little river Tuys had
+mentioned, and then we pressed on to Lebombo, arriving at the kraals
+in the same formation as before. Evidently the word had gone ahead
+that we were coming, for three full impis, or about three thousand
+warriors, were lined up waiting for us.
+
+As soon as we came close they gave us the salute, showing that they
+were not arrayed for hostile purposes. Had they been, they would have
+stood a poor chance, for our little army would have wiped them out in
+short order. As before, a number of indunas came out to meet us and
+Tuys repeated his program.
+
+"I am the law and this is my order," he said. "Tell Queen Tzaneen I am
+here and wait for her to come to me."
+
+There was no hesitation on the part of the indunas. The natives have
+an extraordinary method of getting word to one another, and they knew
+that Tuys came on a far different mission than usual. The indunas
+bowed their heads submissively, and a short time after accompanied
+Tzaneen to our presence.
+
+However, she was inclined to be a little haughty and carried herself
+proudly. Tuys hardly looked at her. She, like Labotsibeni, was a
+finely-built savage, but not so fat as the old queen. Her hair had
+grown out to quite a length, showing that Buno had been dead for some
+months.
+
+Tuys gave her the same orders as he had given Labotsibeni, and she
+agreed to meet him at the river. Then Tuys asked for Umzulek.
+
+"Umzulek is at his kraal half a day's trek from here," she informed
+him. "He has gathered his impis there and threatens to make war unless
+he is made king. Also, word has come that he will kill my child, the
+infant Prince Sebuza, so that none shall stand in his way."
+
+"Your son, Nkosikaas, widow of Buno, shall be safe," Tuys assured her.
+"You will send a messenger to Umzulek bidding him to attend our
+conference at the little river. That is my order!"
+
+And so Tuys arranged the conference at which the future peace of
+Swaziland was to be secured. We rode easily back to the little stream
+and there made our camp. It was the middle of the day when we
+unsaddled and, except for those on guard, we all went to sleep.
+
+Late that afternoon Tuys called a council of the commando leaders and
+prepared for next morning. That night we doubled our guards and I
+stood watch for several hours. It was the first time I had ever done
+this and it was a wonderful experience. The bright moon picked out
+every object on the little plateau and the stream seemed to be a
+streak of rippling silver. Our camp was on a small kopje, or hill,
+with the river at its base, and with the first streaks of dawn we
+awoke our men.
+
+It was none too soon. By the time it was fully light we could see
+thousands of warriors coming from either direction. These were the
+impis of the two queens. Our men, mounted and ready, formed a double
+line around the top of the hill and waited. The impis came closer and
+stopped on either side of the stream. They were only about a hundred
+yards apart, and the thought came to me that here was the setting for
+a fine battle. This, however, it was our duty to prevent.
+
+Soon Tuys sent me, with a bodyguard, to give his orders to the indunas
+who stood resting on their shields in front of each army. These orders
+were simple. I told them that their queen was to come to the
+conference immediately and that each should bring only her bodyguard
+with her. In a short time Tzaneen and Labotsibeni arrived and were
+seated facing Tuys and a number of the commando leaders.
+
+There was no formality about the business whatever. The first question
+Tuys asked was as to the whereabouts of Umzulek.
+
+"He sent my messengers back in haste," Tzaneen reported, "to say that
+he was very sick and could not come. When my induna said to him that
+it was an order, he threatened to kill him, and so he came back
+without further delay."
+
+I could see that this annoyed Tuys. He ran his hand through his beard
+in an aggravated fashion and then spoke:
+
+"Umzulek lies," he said decisively, "but he also prophesies! He will
+be very sick. Perhaps he will be so sick that he will die, if I go to
+see him. He will find that I am a bad witch-doctor and will know that
+it is not good to refuse an order!"
+
+Then Tuys delivered his ultimatum, and it was the arrangement by which
+peace was preserved in Swaziland for nearly a score of years. It was a
+striking scene. Each of the queens sat in front of her bodyguard,
+while behind Tuys stood the keen-eyed Boer leaders. Except for their
+plumes and colored trappings, the armies of the two queens almost
+blended into the barren brown veldt. Over all was the crystal-clear
+sky of South Africa, with the bright sun throwing clean-cut shadows.
+The rocky hills that surrounded the little plateau seemed to form the
+irregular walls of an amphitheater, with our council hill in the center.
+
+Tuys first addressed Queen Tzaneen.
+
+"Nkosikaas, your son, the Prince Sebuza," he said, "is the son of
+Buno, the grandson of Umbandine and the lineal descendant of
+Ama-Swazi. Sebuza is the rightful heir to the throne and shall be king
+of Swaziland."
+
+Tzaneen threw her head back and glanced triumphantly at the old queen,
+who was watching Tuys with deep concern.
+
+"And you, Queen Labotsibeni, mother of Buno and grandmother of the
+infant Prince Sebuza," Tuys said, turning to her, "shall govern as
+queen regent until Sebuza is a man and fit to become king."
+
+Labotsibeni straightened up and a smile lighted up her hard, old face.
+However, I noticed that she did not even look at Tzaneen.
+
+"Those are the orders of him who Buno made guardian of Swaziland,"
+Tuys said, talking to both, "and Oom Paul, the great induna of the
+Boers, has placed thousands of white warriors at his command to see
+that these orders are obeyed."
+
+Tuys then asked each queen if she would obey, and both promised they
+would. He told them that he would come with a great army and take
+their country away from them if he heard that they had broken their
+promises in the slightest degree. This was the end of the conference.
+
+In this way the Boer Government recognized Labotsibeni as the regent
+of Swaziland until the proper time for Sebuza to become king and thus
+showed the way for a peace which lasted nearly twenty years. Shortly
+afterward the British also agreed to this arrangement, and it is said
+that they did so after talking the matter over with Oom Paul and Tuys.
+
+However, this was not the end of our job. Umzulek had to be reckoned
+with. If he was not taught his lesson, it was quite likely that he
+would continue making trouble and sooner or later bring on a civil
+war. When the two queens had gone, Tuys called into conference the
+commando leaders and arranged a plan for Umzulek's benefit.
+
+Because he knew that some of Umzulek's men were undoubtedly watching
+us, we made a feint of starting for home late that afternoon. We
+camped in the Valley of Heaven, as though intending to return to
+Rietvlei. The kaffirs at the kraal near which we camped were told that
+we expected to reach the Valley of Reeds in about three days, and they
+undoubtedly passed the information on to Umzulek's scouts.
+
+Not long after midnight we were in the saddle and on our way to
+Umzulek's kraal. Tuys knows Swaziland as well as he knows the
+Transvaal, and we went by a route that did not take us near either
+Zombode or Lebombo.
+
+When Umzulek's warriors came out of their kraals at Stegla shortly
+after dawn they rubbed their eyes in amazement to see us drawn up in
+battle array on two sides of their village. Our men were so posted
+that they could rake the kraals with rifle fire and not one kaffir
+would be able to escape.
+
+There was great activity in the kraals when Umzulek's men found out
+what had happened. In a little while several made attempts to get away
+in the direction of the hills, sneaking out from the unguarded sides
+of the kraals. They did not get far. Burghers on fleet ponies turned
+them back, and there were no further attempts to escape.
+
+Tuys knows how to handle natives. He knows that they are more
+terrified when they do not know what is going to happen than they are
+of an actual calamity. For that reason he made no move to declare
+himself. All that Umzulek's warriors knew was that they were
+surrounded by a band of determined white horsemen with rifles ready
+for action. I saw hundreds watching us with apprehension, and there
+was almost a panic in the village.
+
+Finally some indunas came forward, waving their shields and making all
+sorts of peaceful overtures. Tuys was rough with them. He commanded
+that Umzulek be brought before him without delay and said that his men
+would open fire within a few minutes if he did not come. The indunas
+fled into the main kraal with the orders, and Umzulek came out with
+almost unseemly haste.
+
+He was a masterful-looking savage. Much like Buno in the face, he was
+not so tall, but seemed stouter. His body was huge, his legs massive,
+and his fine head and bulging forehead showed the cunning and brains
+for which he was noted. Except for a short assegai, Umzulek was
+unarmed and wore nothing, not even a loin-cloth or plumes.
+
+He came directly to Tuys and threw up his hands in salute. There was
+nothing cringing about him, in spite of the fact that he was trapped.
+
+"Nkoos, you have sent for me?" he asked, his voice sonorous and heavy.
+I noticed that he looked into Tuys's eyes without flinching. He was
+not even nervous.
+
+"I sent for you yesterday," Tuys answered slowly and severely, "and
+you sent back the foolish word that you were sick. You disobeyed my
+orders. For that your life is forfeited! Shall I give the word that
+means death, or will you listen and obey the order I now give?"
+
+Umzulek showed no fear. He met Tuys's eyes without a tremor.
+
+"Nkoos, white brother of my brother, Buno," he replied after a moment,
+"do your will! I am not afraid of death. If I live, however, I shall
+obey your orders."
+
+Tuys then became very angry and talked to Umzulek as roughly as he
+could. In spite of this, the savage chief never lowered his eyes,
+although he promised obedience. Tuys ended by telling him what he must
+do to avoid trouble in the future. Previously he had informed him of
+the arrangement by which Swaziland was to be governed.
+
+"You will remain here at your kraal from now on," Tuys told him, "and
+shall never go to Lebombo or Zombode without my permission. You must
+not concern yourself with the government of your country and must keep
+peace here in your own district. If I hear that you have broken your
+promise in the slightest degree, I shall come with a great army and
+kill you and all your people!"
+
+Umzulek admitted that he understood this plain speaking, and the
+interview ended with his curt dismissal. Even then, beaten as he was,
+he returned to his kraal with his head up and dignity unruffled. I had
+a feeling that he would keep his word, and he did until years later,
+when Tuys sent for him to assist in saving the throne for Sebuza, who,
+by the way, was his nephew.
+
+The return trip to Rietvlei was made by easy stages. Our horses were
+pretty tired and they were allowed to rest as much as possible. There
+was a general feeling of relief among the burghers, although some of
+the younger ones did not hesitate to regret that there had been no
+fighting. They expressed the opinion that it would have taught the
+Swazis a lesson they would long remember if an impi or two had been
+wiped out. Tuys made one significant remark to me as we came in sight
+of Rietvlei.
+
+"With Labotsibeni on the throne for the next twenty years," he said,
+"I'm afraid that the tribute will cease. Oom Paul will save two
+thousand pounds a month and I expect that I won't make so many visits
+to Lebombo. Labotsibeni must behave herself, and it looks to me as
+though I won't have so much business in Swaziland as I have had."
+
+He was thinking of the wrestling matches with Buno and mentally
+regretting the fact that his big pockets would no longer bulge with
+gold. However, Tuys had done rather well; public report had it that
+these tussles gave him the start toward his fortune.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X
+
+War with England--Siege of Belfast--Our boyish impi attacks the
+British--Ghosts defeat us--Jafta's friendship--English troopers do the
+"sporting thing"--Umzulek still planning deviltry--Death of Klaas, our
+jockey--Father sends me away to get an education.
+
+
+As soon as we reached Rietvlei my father and Tuys closeted themselves
+in his office. Mother told me that there was trouble between the
+British and Boers and that my father had received certain orders from
+Oom Paul Kruger. None of our little army had left Rietvlei when Tuys
+came out of the house and summoned its leaders.
+
+"You are all to go to your homes," he said, "and there wait for
+orders. There is serious trouble with the English and Oom Paul
+commands that all stand ready for whatever may come. God grant that
+this is not war."
+
+There seemed to be a divided sentiment about this. Some of the
+leaders, particularly the younger ones, did not appear to dislike the
+thought of war, but the old men drew long faces and looked very grave.
+However, they all mounted and before long the last had left. I did not
+realize then that I would never see them all again. The shadow of war
+was over the land and many of our troop were later killed.
+
+A short time after our return from Swaziland word reached my father
+from President Kruger that he was to visit the leading Boers of our
+district and get their opinion regarding the suggested war with
+England. War was practically inevitable at that time and my father
+found the sentiment almost overwhelmingly in favor of it. He
+counselled against fighting England, because he knew of the unlimited
+resources of the empire and how impossible it would be for us to win.
+Knowing my father's astuteness, the old Boers listened to him and were
+almost won over to peace, but just then word came that war had been
+declared.
+
+Immediately the whole country blazed up. Every farm and settlement
+sent its men, all mounted and armed with the best Mausers and hunting
+rifles, and in a trice the Transvaal and Orange Free State were on the
+war-path.
+
+It was our misfortune that the British broke into our part of the
+Transvaal first. When we heard they were coming, we took everything of
+value and moved to Belfast, which had been fortified and where we were
+prepared to stand a siege. I shall never forget the excitement of
+those days. My mother was in delicate condition and the whole thing
+was a terrible hardship for her. For me, and for the rest of us boys,
+it was a great and glorious lark!
+
+The air was filled with stories of battles, and before long streams of
+wounded men were sent from our field forces to the improvised
+hospitals in Belfast. We boys used to watch these caravans with
+intense interest and would run errands for the wounded and bring them
+presents. These farmer-soldiers were our heroes, and we were proud of
+the saying, "For each Boer, five Englishmen," this being the ratio our
+fighters claimed was about right.
+
+However, it was not long before we began to find the British could not
+be stopped and one morning, late in 1899, Belfast was besieged by
+forces under General Paul Carew. We suffered many hardships and I soon
+realized that war was a grim and earnest business. My mother would
+pray continually that our peril in Belfast be ended either by victory
+of our troops or their speedy surrender to the British. She made the
+vow that her unborn child should bear the name of the victorious
+general, and when, on the eve of the triumphant entry of the British
+into Belfast, a little daughter was born, she was given the name of
+Paul Carew, with the prefix "Impi," which, in addition to meaning a
+regiment, is also the Zulu word for war.
+
+My sister, Impi, certainly lives up to her name. Determination and
+fighting spirit are her chief characteristics, and she is equally at
+home in handling wild horses or obstinate kaffirs. In addition, she is
+one of the best rifle shots in the Transvaal and can beat any one of
+her sex when it comes to a race on foot.
+
+General Carew constituted Belfast a British base, and the countryside
+was raided and ravaged by the troops making it their headquarters.
+Hardly a farm escaped, and even to-day there are ruins that recall
+those dark days. But two rooms of our home in Belfast were habitable
+and it was in these that we lived. The main British camp was directly
+in front of our house, and the situation galled me. I hated the
+British for driving us out of Rietvlei and for ruining our home, and
+before long I declared war on them on my own account. What happened is
+a good example of the way the English treated us.
+
+I gathered all the boys of the town, that is, the dozen white boys,
+and drilled them as my impi. Sibijaan, being black, was not allowed to
+take part in our war. I considered it beneath me to let him fight with
+me against other whites. We armed ourselves with stones and sticks and
+late at night made a concerted attack on the British headquarters,
+which had been established in the ruins of the local hotel.
+
+We smashed all the windows, and the officers and orderlies came
+tumbling out in great haste. The sentries did not fire on us, but
+there was a general rush in our direction which resulted in our
+capture. When we were brought before General Carew, he asked what we
+thought we were doing. None of us could talk English and the
+questioning was done through an interpreter. I informed him that we
+were loyal Boers and had declared war on the English.
+
+General Carew looked at me very severely and asked me if I was ready
+to be shot for a treacherous attack after the town had surrendered.
+This was a new thought for me, but I stood to my guns and defied him.
+However, I did not like the idea of being buried in the local cemetery
+where we boys had seen so many British and Boer soldiers already put
+away.
+
+After a few more questions, all of them with the most serious face and
+a gravity that could mean nothing but evil for us, the general
+delivered sentence. It was that we were to be taken to the improvised
+mess-room and fed all the jam, biscuits, tea, and sugar we could eat!
+I remember that I was very proud to be given a tin of jam for myself
+alone. My sister, Ellen, had been one of our attacking party and she
+shared equally in the spoils of our captivity.
+
+But this treatment did not pacify us. Next night we made another
+attack, and this time we were really punished. We were captured and
+tied to the veranda posts of some houses nearby. Now this would not
+have been bad, if we had not been superstitious.
+
+During the days following the victorious entry of General Carew into
+Belfast, we boys had been intensely interested in a number of wagons
+loaded with the bodies of British soldiers. These wagons were driven
+down the main street and the bodies buried in huge graves, oftentimes
+eight and twelve to a grave, in the local cemetery. The tale was soon
+started that the ghosts of these soldiers walked about the main street
+at night.
+
+After we had been tied to the veranda posts it suddenly occurred to me
+that we would most likely see these ghosts, and I mentioned this
+pleasant thought to my fellow-prisoners. Immediately there arose a
+wailing and weeping; our brave little army cried to be allowed to turn
+tail and depart to its beds.
+
+Of course the British did not know what was the matter. Ellen, instead
+of being tied up like the rest of us, had been taken into the
+mess-room and given more crackers and jam. She came out in a hurry to
+see what was the matter with us. I told her between gasps of horror,
+and she ran in to the mess and through the interpreter told the
+colonel. She said later that he regarded it as a huge joke for a
+little while, but then, when she became anxious for us, gave orders
+that we were to be freed. We scurried home with all speed as soon as
+the hated "Tommies" turned us loose. This was the end of our little
+war against the British. We might fight _them_, but when it came to
+ghosts we lost our nerve.
+
+In spite of stories that have been spread about the Boer War, there
+was always a fine sporting spirit between our people and the British.
+A good example of this was what happened to one of my older brothers.
+Jafta, the Mapor king, was concerned in this.
+
+My father had prospered greatly in the Valley of Reeds, and when the
+war broke out owned immense herds of cattle, sheep, and horses. Soon
+after Belfast was taken he decided that it would be a good thing to
+move his stock into the northern and more remote parts of the
+Transvaal. One of my older brothers, two uncles, and a neighbor
+undertook the trek with the stock.
+
+Such a trek is slow and tedious work, and shortly after they started
+out a galloping outpost of about thirty Britishers came upon them. The
+Boers fled. Their horses were tired and trail-weary and they had to
+leave the stock without a chance to obtain a remount from the horses
+they were driving. They broke for the mountains, and zigzagged about
+until they came to the kraal of Jafta, the Mapor king.
+
+They hoped to get fresh horses from him, but Jafta had already been
+terrified by the British and feared he would be shot if he helped or
+sheltered any Boers. He explained his position to my brother and
+begged that the party leave immediately. His horses had already been
+confiscated and he could give them no remounts.
+
+But the Boers decided to rest awhile and off-saddled their worn
+horses, who soon found their way to the river bank where they could
+drink and graze on the tender grass. Jafta was very nervous and urged
+the party to saddle and get away.
+
+His anxiety proved justified, for while they were arguing they saw the
+squadron of British horse coming at a gallop less than a quarter of a
+mile away. It seems that kaffirs had seen the Boers and betrayed them.
+
+Jafta was in a quandary. The safe thing for him to do was to order his
+impi to seize the Boers and then turn them over to the English. While
+he was making up his mind one of my uncles ordered his companions to
+pick up their saddles, bridles, and rifles, and duck into Jafta's
+royal hut. As they were doing this he shouted some instructions to
+Jafta.
+
+A moment later the Britishers reached the entrance to the kraal.
+Jafta, escorted by his indunas, went to meet them. Their officer was
+impressed with his regal air and recognized him as king of the Mapors.
+They shook hands, and then, through his interpreter, the officer asked
+about the four Boer fugitives.
+
+"Yes, Nkoos, they were here," Jafta admitted, "but I was afraid to
+give them any food or help. They were very tired and their horses were
+tired also. But they went on."
+
+"How long ago was that?" the Englishman asked.
+
+"When the sun was over there," said Jafta, pointing. He indicated a
+space of about an hour.
+
+"Well, we must pursue them," said the officer.
+
+"But you look tired," suggested the wily Jafta, "and your horses are
+over-taxed. Won't you rest a while and have some tswala and refresh
+yourselves? Already it is the hour when there are no shadows (midday)
+and it is time to sleep."
+
+The Britisher let himself be lured from the stern path of warlike duty
+and accepted. The horses were turned loose to graze and drink, and the
+Englishmen partook heartily of tswala and soon dozed off to sleep. The
+Boers, inside the hot hut, could do nothing, so they too went to
+sleep. It was a funny situation, had it not been so serious. These
+enemies were peacefully asleep within a few feet of one another.
+
+About three o'clock there was a general stirring and every one waked
+up. The British troopers had never seen the inside of a royal kraal
+before, and they asked Jafta if they might be shown about. The king
+immediately assented and appointed some of his indunas to act as
+guides. It was all new and interesting to the Englishmen and they were
+soon about fifty yards away from Jafta's hut.
+
+This was the chance the Boers were waiting for. They slipped out and
+gathered up the Britishers' equipment, including firearms, and stowed
+it in the hut. A pistol was poked into Jafta's belly and he was also
+put in his "palace." A few moments later the Englishmen returned and
+found themselves facing the Boer rifles. They surrendered.
+
+Everything was well with our party and they could have made their
+escape, taking as many of the British as they wanted as prisoners. But
+they knew that the Mapor king would have to pay for his duplicity, and
+thus decided that he must be protected.
+
+Whereupon they opened a discussion with the commander of the British
+party. They informed him that they would take all the Britishers as
+prisoners to their own headquarters unless he agreed to the
+proposition that they made. It was this: First, the English must swear
+not to give evidence against Jafta at their headquarters; second, they
+must allow the Boers to have four fresh horses; third, they must give
+the Boers a certain start before again taking up their pursuit. If the
+British would agree to these conditions, the Boers would call
+everything square and each party would forget that it had ever met the
+other.
+
+This proposal struck the British as a good sporting chance, so they
+accepted it. Everything was agreed to as demanded. Since there was no
+reason for further hostility for the time being, the Boers returned
+their arms and equipment to the British and both had a merry feast
+that night, during which they consumed all of Jafta's tswala.
+
+Next morning the Boers left at dawn and did not see these Britishers
+for some time. Strange as it may appear, these same parties later met
+in a battle not far from Jafta's kraal and one of my uncles was shot.
+The same British officer was in command of the troops who captured him
+and saw that he was treated with every consideration, making him feel
+more like an honored guest than a wounded prisoner-of-war. This
+officer, by the way, remained in South Africa after the war, and he
+usually visits Rietvlei every Christmas and is regarded as one of the
+best friends the O'Neil family has.
+
+During the Boer War, Oom Tuys was held accountable for the peace of
+Swaziland by both our people and the British. It was contrary to
+agreements to use kaffirs in the war, and Tuys made several trips to
+Zombode, the seat of Labotsibeni, to make sure that the Swazis were
+keeping out of the conflict. Later I heard him tell my father that he
+kept both Labotsibeni and Tzaneen quiet by pointing out to them that a
+word from him would bring the war to their country.
+
+On one of his trips Tuys dropped in to see our old friend Umzulek and
+came back with the report that the kaffir chief was minding his own
+business and obeying orders. However, he made Tuys a proposition that
+showed him to be still willing to make trouble, if it were profitable.
+
+"The old rascal suggested that he make a demonstration with all his
+impis against our borders," my uncle reported. "If he made a great
+enough showing, he thought, and news of it reached Oom Paul, our
+President would be willing to pay him tribute to keep the peace. It
+seems he has been thinking about Buno's monthly gift of two thousand
+pounds and the gin that went with it. He has a sort of feeling that it
+is a shame to let this money get out of the family! The crafty beggar
+only hinted at his scheme at first, but I finally smoked him out and
+he admitted what was in his mind."
+
+"What did you tell him?" my father asked, glancing at Tuys keenly.
+Father remembered the days of Buno, when ugly rumors used to float out
+concerning Tuys's activities in Swaziland.
+
+"I told him to go to hell," Tuys exclaimed, "or I would come with many
+rifles and send him there!"
+
+Inasmuch as Umzulek could have no conception of what my uncle meant by
+"hell", since the Swazis have no such place in their daily thought, it
+is safe to assume that Tuys was using a figure of speech.
+Nevertheless, he gave Umzulek to understand that it would be unhealthy
+for him to start a row along the border.
+
+We were still living in Belfast when the war came to an end. Our home
+at Rietvlei was in ruins and it was almost a year before my father was
+able to get a portion of it rebuilt. However, before returning there
+we lived for a time in Potchefstroom, where my father had interested
+himself in some gold properties. Prospecting was always fascinating to
+him and he was usually successful in these ventures.
+
+His English secretary remained in Belfast, safe-guarding his interests
+there and making frequent visits to the homestead in the Valley of
+Reeds. Our kaffir farmers and servants had been widely scattered by
+the war, but soon began to drift back. Each told a different tale of
+his wanderings, and many of these were quite harrowing. A number of
+our people had escaped to Jafta's kraal and not a few had gone into
+Swaziland until the war ended.
+
+Klaas, our old jockey and one of my dearest playmates, had disappeared
+during the second year of the war, but one day my father told me that
+he had returned to Rietvlei. Father was about to make one of his
+periodical trips to Belfast and the Valley of Reeds, and he promised
+to bring Klaas back with him to Potchefstroom.
+
+He drove out to Rietvlei from Belfast and found Klaas very glad to see
+him. The little fellow was thin and worn-looking, but scrupulously
+clean. Father installed him again as his driver and next day started
+back for Potchefstroom. A mile or so from the old house father got out
+of the wagon to inspect a plantation. He was about seventy-five yards
+from the wagon when a threatening thunder-storm broke and a single
+bolt of lightning killed Klaas and both horses! This was a great blow
+to all of us, because we had come to regard the little black boy with
+genuine affection.
+
+Not long after we returned to Rietvlei--such a happy homecoming as it
+was!--my father decided the time had come for me to get an education.
+Many of the old Boers frowned upon the thought of sending their sons
+abroad to be educated, feeling that they would never care to return to
+the farms their ancestors had founded in the wilderness with such
+bravery and determination. My father, however, was different. He
+believed that his sons should be abreast of the times, and he sent me
+to boarding-school and later to universities in Scotland and America,
+where I received my training as a physician.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI
+
+Back to Rietvlei from Harvard--I locate in Ermelo--Tuys brings news
+that Sebuza is to be crowned king of Swaziland--I decide to make a
+picture record of the coronation--The trek to Zombode to get the royal
+permission--Snyman plays ghost and almost gets killed--Visit to
+Mbabane, capital of Swaziland.
+
+
+Soon after my graduation from Harvard University I returned to the
+Transvaal. I had been away for years and it was good to get back to
+the Valley of Reeds. Years in Scotland and the United States had left
+their stamp on me, and my family and old friends chaffed me about
+being an "outlander," telling me that now I was an American. I may
+have had some of the externals, such as the clothing I had had made in
+Cambridge, but my heart was still the heart of a Boer and I was glad
+to get back to my own people.
+
+Father was proud to have a son who was a physician and arranged a
+reception at Rietvlei to which all his friends and acquaintances came.
+I was the hero of the hour, and it seemed strange when Tuys and some
+of the old men who had known me as a boy called me "Mzaan Bakoor." I
+had not heard my native name for years, and it brought back my boyhood
+and the little playmates of the toy-factory days.
+
+Sibijaan was a grown man and a fine figure of a savage. He greeted me
+with effusiveness and saluted me native-fashion as soon as we had
+shaken hands. Father told me that he had been very useful about the
+house and was well trained. Then he told me that Sibijaan belonged to
+me and was to go with me wherever I went. When I spoke of this to my
+old playmate, he was surprised that I should mention it.
+
+"Nkoos, what the ou baas says is so," he said. "I have never thought
+it would be otherwise. When we were children your mother gave you into
+my charge. Now that you are a man and I am a man, again I take up the
+trust!"
+
+This suited me. I realized I would have to have some dependable boys
+and I knew that Sibijaan was faithful, honest, and more intelligent
+than any kaffir I had ever met.
+
+Meeting Tuys again brought back the several visits we had made to
+Swaziland, and I asked him how things had gone with our friends, the
+royal family. He said that the old arrangement was still in effect and
+that Umzulek had settled down for good and was behaving himself.
+
+"Queen Labotsibeni is blind now, but she still rules as regent," he
+said, "and Tzaneen is taking good care that no harm comes to her son,
+Sebuza. This young savage is growing into a man and already has
+gathered about him several impis. He is an insolent cub and will be
+hard to manage when he becomes king. As the crown prince he is running
+wild, and it seems he has been impertinent to the British Resident at
+Mbabane."
+
+Tuys then told me that he expected to make a short trip to Lebombo and
+Zombode and asked me if I wanted to go along. My father, however,
+seemed to think I had "better get over that foolishness" and settle
+down, so I told Tuys I would go with him some other time.
+
+Next came the question where I was to practice medicine. There was a
+good doctor in Belfast, who was a friend of our family, and it was
+suggested that I join him. This, however, did not please me. I wanted
+to be "on my own" and make my own career. This delighted my father,
+and after some discussion we decided that I should locate in Ermelo.
+
+This was a little town of about fifteen hundred whites and several
+thousand kaffirs, in the heart of a fine farming and grazing section
+in the southeast section of the Transvaal. It has an elevation of
+about a mile and is a delightful spot. However, I must admit that the
+fact that Ermelo is only a little more than fifty miles from the
+border of Swaziland finally decided my choice.
+
+After a few weeks with my family I started for Ermelo. Instead of
+making an attempt to get there by rail, Sibijaan, Tuys, and I trekked
+overland and had a most delightful trip. Seldom a night but we met
+with friends of my father, and they always gave a warm welcome to "the
+O'Neil from overseas." It seems that these simple people had wondered
+over my absence, feeling that I would be too learned to ever want to
+associate with them again. They were intensely interested in the
+United States, and many an hour I spent telling them about its
+wonders. I happened to have pictures of New York among my dunnage, and
+I dug these out and showed them. Naturally, the towering "skyscrapers"
+were a most wonderful thing to these Boers, many of whom had never
+seen a building of more than two stories. I always remember the remark
+made by one bearded patriarch when he looked at the photograph of the
+Flatiron Building.
+
+"This is a modern Tower of Babel," he said, pointing at the structure
+with a stubby forefinger. "These Americans must be good and religious
+people or God would throw down such a tower!"
+
+When I explained to him that it was built of steel covered with stone
+and told him that there were many other greater buildings, he was
+impressed, but not astonished.
+
+"If it is God's will, these Americans will conquer the world," he
+concluded.
+
+I then told him that war had been forced on America and her armies
+were even then in France fighting the Germans. He knew a good deal
+about the war and was naturally an enemy of England, which meant that
+he was friendly to the Germans. The fact that America had been forced
+into the conflict carried great weight with him, however, and I had a
+feeling that his pro-Germanism was much weakened by this knowledge.
+
+I quickly found a home in Ermelo and settled down to practice
+medicine. My work there was hard but interesting. Its chief delight
+was the fact that I spent most of my time outdoors. A round of visits
+soon meant that I would be gone several days, spending most of the
+time in the saddle. Many trips could be made by motor, particularly
+the periodical ones to the mines, but most of my Boer patients lived
+where motors could not travel. Except for the mining companies which
+had appointed me their resident physician, my patients were all white
+people. The Boers are a hardy lot and hate to admit that they are ill.
+Hence, when I received a call to a Boer farm, I always expected the
+worst and was seldom disappointed.
+
+Bit by bit my practice increased, and I began to regard Ermelo as my
+permanent home. There were a number of pleasant people there, both
+English and Boers, and we lived a very contented busy life. Sibijaan
+turned out to be a valuable servant and did everything for me that he
+could. Of course I made him head boy about my place, and he kept the
+other servants in good order and saw that all things went right.
+
+Oom Tuys stayed with me frequently, and his visits were always
+welcome. He wandered about the Transvaal a great deal and was a source
+of information of all sorts. It was in December, 1918, that he brought
+me news that interested me deeply.
+
+"I have come from Zombode," he said, "and there is hell to pay in
+Swaziland. Old Labotsibeni tells me that Tzaneen and her right-hand
+man, Lochien, are plotting to have Sebuza made king and are making
+preparations for his coronation. Lomwazi, who is a son of the old
+queen and acts for her, tells me that Labotsibeni will not give up the
+throne. She will have to die if she does. As you know, it is the Swazi
+custom to sacrifice any ruler who loses the throne, and the old girl
+doesn't want to be killed.
+
+"It looks to me as if there is going to be trouble. I talked to
+Lomwazi and his mother and told them it was the agreement that she was
+to remain regent until Sebuza came of age, and that the Boers and
+British both would protect her when the young man was made king. This
+seemed to reassure them, but I don't think Labotsibeni and her crowd
+want to lose control. Yes, Owen, I think there is going to be trouble
+in Swaziland."
+
+We talked the matter over, and I agreed with him that things were
+going to happen soon in Swaziland. The Swazis had been at peace too
+long a time for such a warlike nation and it would not take much to
+start a war of some sort. The fact that Prince Sebuza was to be made
+king stood out above everything else, and I made up my mind to see the
+ceremonies.
+
+About this time I had become interested in the cinematograph.
+Moving-pictures were a hobby of mine, and it suddenly occurred to me
+that it would be a fine thing from an historic and educational
+standpoint to take some reels of Sebuza's coronation. Tuys told me
+that this would probably be the last affair of its kind, and it seemed
+to me that a cinematograph record of it would be most valuable and
+instructive.
+
+I suggested this to Oom Tuys, and he agreed with me.
+
+"But you'd better arrange to take the pictures," he cautioned me. "It
+would be just a waste of time to rush into Swaziland with a camera and
+take a chance. We don't know when the coronation is going to take
+place, and what's more, we don't know that the Swazis would stand for
+your taking pictures of it. The witch-doctors might tell them that you
+were putting some sort of a curse on them, and then where would you be?"
+
+This put another light on the matter, and Tuys finally advised me to
+see Labotsibeni and get her permission to film the ceremonies when
+Sebuza was made king. I was afraid that I might not be able to get
+what I wanted from Labotsibeni, so I asked Tuys to help me. This he
+agreed to do, arranging to meet me in Zombode. This meant quite a trip
+for him, because the British objected to his going into Swaziland,
+owing to certain activities there in the past, and he had to go in
+through Portuguese territory. I have forgotten what reasons the
+government had for not wanting Tuys to visit Swaziland, but the
+officials evidently had not forgotten--Britishers seldom do,
+particularly when the matter affects one of their principalities.
+
+So it was arranged that Tuys should slip into Swaziland through
+Komatipoort, a town on the border between Portuguese East Africa and
+Labotsibeni's country. I was to leave as soon as I could, and we would
+meet at Zombode and there transact our business with Lomwazi and the
+old queen.
+
+I arranged for another doctor to handle my patients while I was away
+and then set about making preparations for the trip. News of my
+venture soon got about, and I was deluged with requests to take
+friends along. If I had given in to them all, I would have invaded
+Swaziland with an impi. As it was, I took Laurie Snyman, a cousin of
+mine, and Joel Biddy, the accountant of the little bank in Ermelo.
+Snyman had some years before been postmaster at Mbabane, the
+government seat of Swaziland, while Biddy had been a useful friend on
+many occasions.
+
+We had some interesting adventures on the trip, but suffered intensely
+from the weather. Heavy storms dogged us all the way and made life
+miserable. We traveled light, but the rains prevented us making good
+time. Our outfit consisted of a wagonette, drawn by mules, in which we
+had intended to ride. Sibijaan was our cook and general handy man,
+while the mules and wagonette were in charge of Tuis, a half-breed
+Basuto bushman.
+
+The rains made the roads so heavy that it was all the mules could do
+to drag the wagonette. Hence we had to walk practically the entire
+way, and it was "foot-slogging" of the hardest. Tuis was a very
+obstinate kaffir and made a nuisance of himself on every opportunity.
+If we had not needed him so badly, I would have either killed him or
+sent him back.
+
+One of the features of the trip was the fact that both Sibijaan and
+Tuis were constantly ill. That is, they said they were. The only
+medicine which seemed to help them was gin, and they would frequently
+feign illness to get some. Now and then I would refuse, and then Tuis
+would give an exhibition of sulking that was wonderful. Of course it
+is strictly against the law to give alcohol to kaffirs in the
+Transvaal, but the fact that it was administered as "muti," or
+medicine, made the act less criminal. Those boys of mine, however,
+needed "muti" frequently, but the rain was a sort of justification,
+for I know that we white men were only able to keep going by using it.
+
+On the second day out of Ermelo we ran into the Scottish section of
+our country. The little villages there have such names as Lochiel and
+New Scotland, and the people are quite as Scottish as these names. In
+fact, we were able to get some oat cakes at one of the farm-houses.
+These would have been rusks, had the people been Boers.
+
+Although our trek had been miserable enough so far, we did not have
+any real trouble until we reached the Masuto River. It was swollen by
+the heavy rains and the ford was washed out. Instead of the usual
+clear rivulet, it had become a raging torrent of muddy water. We had
+to cross it or go back, so we made camp on its bank and held a council
+of war. All our blankets and supplies were soaked through, and a fire
+could not be started. We were just about as uncomfortable as we could
+be.
+
+Just when we were beginning to despair, a Scotch civil engineer showed
+up. He was building a bridge over the Masuto, his entire working force
+consisting of kaffirs. He proved a cheerful person and made light of
+our troubles. This was well enough for him, since he had a good camp a
+short distance away, while we were marooned on a desert of dampness. I
+suggested to him that we would appreciate some hot tea or coffee, but
+he carefully refrained from inviting us to his camp to have some.
+Instead, he told us that we could get what we wanted from Oom Van der
+Merwe, who had a farm not far distant. The Scotch are a careful and
+canny people!
+
+We trudged over to the Boer farm and received a cordial welcome. They
+received us with open arms and insisted that we remain there for a few
+days, or at least until the rain stopped. This we could not do, since
+I had made the Zombode appointment with Tuys and did not want him to
+have to wait so long that he would give us up and leave Swaziland.
+
+The farmer's womenfolk gave us all the hot coffee we would drink, and
+then supplied us with bread, butter, milk, and the hind quarter of a
+sheep. We returned to our thoroughly soaked camp very reluctantly and
+passed a most miserable night.
+
+Next morning we tackled the problem of getting across the Masuto,
+which had risen further during the night. The Scotch engineer came to
+our assistance with good advice, and this is all he would have offered
+had I not discovered that he had several cables stretched across the
+river. After much argument he agreed to let us use one of the cables
+to get the wagonette and supplies across. This was done, although with
+great difficulty.
+
+Knowing we would have to swim for it, we white men had put our clothes
+in the wagonette. The kaffir boys did not wear enough to matter. The
+Scotchman consoled us by telling us that we were a ludicrous sight,
+and we must have been! There we stood, naked, cold, and disgusted, our
+entire possessions on the far bank and facing the prospect of swimming
+the turbulent river, driving the mules across at the same time.
+However, it had to be done, so we plunged in. The current was strong
+and we crawled ashore a full half mile below the wagonette.
+
+True to his bastard breed, one of the mules turned back in midstream
+and proceeded calmly to the take-off bank of the river. We had to swim
+back and get him, but it was adding insult to injury when he tried to
+run away and we had to chase him through the long grass and
+undergrowth of the river's edge. Finally we captured the brute and
+then swam the river for the third time as his watchful escort.
+
+We were dead tired when we reached the wagonette and faced the stiff
+climb to the top of a little mountain. The road was in the worst
+possible condition, so we decided to camp for a day or two until the
+weather became better. As things were, we could not have gone on,
+anyway.
+
+As soon as camp was pitched, we looked about a bit and discovered the
+ruins of an old Boer farm-house a little way up the river. There was a
+trickle of smoke coming out of the chimney and this encouraged us to
+visit the place as soon as possible. The thought of fire was
+heartening; it meant hot things to drink and possibly warm food. When
+I came close to it I saw that there were two rooms, badly roofed over,
+but the blackened walls showed that the old house had been quite an
+imposing building.
+
+My knock was answered by a young Boer with wild, hunted eyes. He
+looked us over as we stood there in the pouring rain, and a moment
+later smiled graciously and invited us in. When the door closed he
+ceremoniously extended his hand and we shook hands all around.
+
+"Strangers seldom come during the storms," he said, "and I was
+surprised to hear your knock. I was cooking some coffee in the back
+room and now I shall add enough for all of us."
+
+This was a welcome thought to us, and in a little while our drooping
+spirits were revived by the hot drink. Then we cooked the food we had
+brought with us and had a merry party. It seems the young fellow was
+quite bucked up over having visitors and he did well by the gin we had
+brought with us.
+
+But still it rained outside! It came down as it only can in the
+Transvaal, and that means a steady, relentless downpour which looked
+as though it would last for days. We decided to make ourselves as
+comfortable as possible, and our host insisted that we take over his
+house. He was a very pleasant fellow and before long we were good
+friends.
+
+It seems that the old house had been the home of his parents and
+grandparents. It was a pioneer homestead and had been burned by the
+British during the Boer War. Both his parents had died there and the
+place had never been rebuilt. He had been born in the room in which we
+rested and he told us that he hoped some day to rebuild and make his
+thousands of acres profitable.
+
+Bit by bit we got the story of the place from him. It had been
+destroyed in retaliation for some act of treachery, for which, he
+assured us, his parents were not responsible. I asked him if he did
+not get lonesome living there by himself and suggested that he ought
+to get a wife to keep him company. My question opened up a queer side
+of his character, and then we understood the hunted look in his eyes.
+
+"By day," he said slowly, "I don't mind being here alone. In good
+weather people cross the river and come to me to buy things. I have a
+store, you know, and sometimes as many as five or six come each week."
+
+This was news to us. We did not see any evidence of a store, but this
+probably explained the small boxes and bundles in the back room.
+
+"It is the night that is terrible," he went on, lowering his voice as
+though afraid of being overheard. "Those who died here come back and
+look into the windows and cry out with awful voices. They cannot rest,
+and must come back to this place where they were killed. Some of them
+are our people and others the British, and sometimes they fight the
+battle over again!"
+
+For a moment I thought he was guying us, but a glance at his eyes told
+me that he was in deadly earnest. Snyman and Biddy caught his spirit
+and egged him on to tell more ghost stories. Now the ignorant Boer is
+very superstitious, so that it was not long before we had all kinds of
+ghosts loose about the place. The young Boer took the stories
+seriously, and those two rascals soon had him quite terrified. A
+sudden burst of thunder made him jump as though he had been shot.
+
+Well, we told ghost stories and tales of other supernatural
+visitations for some time. Then, the rain letting up a bit, we went
+back to our camp, to find that Sibijaan had finally succeeded in
+getting a fairly decent fire going. Before leaving we had bought the
+store out. It only contained quantities of "flag" cigarettes, coffee,
+and yellow sugar, but we took all we could get. The Boer assured us
+that he had sent to Ermelo for a large stock of goods which would be
+at our disposal as soon as the roads allowed it to be brought in.
+
+Late that afternoon it looked as though the stormy weather was
+breaking away, and this cheered us up. We planned to start at dawn
+next morning and make up for lost time by forced marches. Shortly
+after dark Snyman announced that he was going to visit the young Boer
+again. He went out, leaving Biddy and me smoking our pipes in the tent.
+
+Snyman had been gone for about half an hour when the stillness of the
+night was shattered by a succession of rifle shots. They came from the
+direction of the ruined house. We could hear some one shouting, also,
+and each outburst was followed by more shots.
+
+With one motion I snuffed our candle and dived to the wet floor of the
+tent. Biddy was almost as quick, and swore softly when his face hit my
+heels. We neither of us could imagine what was taking place, but our
+training taught us that the ground was the safest place when people
+began shooting wildly.
+
+We had hardly got our breath when Snyman dashed into the tent, falling
+over us and almost pulling it down. He had been running hard and was
+fairly gasping for breath. Presently he recovered sufficiently to
+loose a volley of profanity in Dutch and English. When he calmed down
+a little--the shooting had stopped by this time--we asked him what all
+the shooting was about and why he had returned in such haste.
+
+"Why, that poor ignorant fool thought he could shoot a ghost!" he
+said, beginning to laugh. "I went to see if there were any ghosts
+around his old house, and when I didn't find any, I felt that he ought
+not to be disappointed, so I played ghost for him. I sneaked about the
+house and hid in the old ruins, making all sorts of creepy noises, I
+must have scared him until he went crazy.
+
+"I was just beginning to enjoy myself when his light went out. Then I
+thought I had scared him off the map. But I was wrong, very wrong! He
+must have opened the door quietly, for when I started out of the ruins
+he opened up with his Mauser. I dropped flat, but it seemed to me that
+a volley of bullets crawled down my back. A moment later he started
+shooting in another direction, and then I got up and ran. I'll bet the
+springbok doesn't live that could have caught me!"
+
+So this was the explanation of the sudden firing. We examined Snyman
+and found that two bullets had gone through his coat, showing that
+even in his fear the young fellow had shot like a true Boer. Snyman
+did not seem much upset over being shot at, but was quite indignant at
+the fact that the "ghost hunter" had used a rifle.
+
+"It just shows the ignorance of these back-country Boers," he said,
+ruefully examining his torn coat. "This damned fool spends his nights
+quaking because he thinks his old farm is full of ghosts, and then he
+takes down the ancestral rifle and goes out and tries to kill them. As
+though he could shoot a ghost!"
+
+Before dawn the next morning the young Boer arrived at our camp. While
+he was taking coffee with us he related his adventure of the night
+before. He seemed to have no suspicion of Snyman, who must have done a
+wonderful job. According to his story a whole battalion of British
+ghosts had attacked his stronghold. He described their wailing and
+threatening cries, and then told how he had finally driven them off
+with his father's rifle.
+
+He was so earnest and pathetic that we all felt sorry for him. His
+ignorance was extraordinary, even when his isolation was considered.
+We were sorry to leave him, and I remember looking back as we climbed
+the hill road to see him looking wistfully after us.
+
+The roads were so bad that we had to walk, and it was not until the
+third day that we reached Mbabane, the official capital of Swaziland.
+This is about fifteen miles over the border, and the village is on the
+top of a low mountain. Mbabane is the new capital of Swaziland and was
+founded in 1904. The old capital, Bremersdorp, was destroyed by our
+people during the Boer War.
+
+The long slopes leading up to the village are nearly all covered with
+plantations, which have been laid out by Robert L. Dickson, head of
+the Swaziland Trading Company. The settlement is a most picturesque
+and charming place, and there are a number of pleasant English people
+dwelling there. These white families live very well, and I can safely
+say that Mbabane is the most delightful place in that whole section of
+the Transvaal.
+
+Mr. Dickson is a remarkable character who has lived in South Africa
+practically all his life. He is now about sixty-five years old, and no
+visit to Mbabane is complete without at least one cup of tea with him
+and his wife. Mrs. Dickson is a lovable old lady whose chief worries
+seem to consist of guarding her vegetable plantation and finding her
+glasses.
+
+The morning we called on Mr. Dickson, she came in and asked if he had
+seen those errant glasses. His eyes twinkled when he answered, "No, my
+dear, but I'm sure you'll find them in the cabbage patch!" She had
+been there during the morning and his guess was correct, for one of
+the black boys found the glasses draped over a young and hopeful
+cabbage.
+
+Of course Mr. Dickson invited us to dinner, and this led to a typical
+and amusing incident. Mrs. Dickson ordered her cook to prepare some
+chickens for the meal, and the cook sent some of the Swazi servants to
+get the fowls.
+
+Now a friend of mine, John Pythian, engineer at the tin mines nearby,
+lived next door to the Dicksons. He was a chicken fancier and had some
+very fine birds. As luck or indolence would have it, Mrs. Dickson's
+servants caught some of his chickens instead of her own. Pythian's
+servant reported this to him--he was still in bed at the time--and he
+instructed his boy to tell Mrs. Dickson's Swazis to return the chickens.
+
+Stronger in courage than judgment, the boy attacked the enemy and
+there was a battle. It was short, however, because Mrs. Dickson heard
+the row and chased Pythian's boy away. By the time he reported to his
+master, the chickens were slain. Pythian then sent his boy to get the
+native police, and these soon arrived.
+
+Mrs. Dickson protested and argued that her boys were innocent, but
+about this time, Mr. Honey, British Royal Commissioner for Swaziland,
+came on the scene in all his majesty. He held an impromptu court and
+heard both sides of the case. After deliberation, in which we all
+tried to assist him, he delivered his verdict.
+
+"From the evidence I judge that Mrs. Dickson's boys are innocent in
+that they did not realize they were killing Mr. Pythian's chickens,"
+he said. "However, the chickens have been killed on the order of Mrs.
+Dickson, so I think the only thing to do is to arrest Mrs. Dickson!"
+
+Whereupon Mrs. Dickson became indignant and demanded that the
+commissioner carry out his sentence.
+
+"If he does," she said threateningly, "I can guarantee that the High
+Commissioner for Swaziland is going to feel very low in his mind
+before I invite him to dinner again!"
+
+Thus the chicken-stealing ended in a joke, and Pythian was one of the
+gayest at dinner that night. He remarked, however, that it was no
+wonder that the roast chicken was so choice, since the birds had been
+imported all the way from some place in India!
+
+During the meal I sat next to the Commissioner and brought up the
+question of the crowning of the new Swazi king. I wanted to find out
+what the government thought about it before I made final arrangements
+at Zombode.
+
+"There seems to be a difference of opinion regarding this pup,
+Sebuza," he said. "It looks as though there might be a row either
+before or soon after he is made king. Of course he is the heir to the
+job, so there can be no good reason for keeping him out. However,
+Labotsibeni has been a steady old girl and has kept fairly good order
+around Zombode, and it's a shame we can't keep her. But she's over one
+hundred years old, and now Lomwazi seems to be fairly running
+Swaziland. Sebuza will have to be king some day, but it will be good
+policy to maintain present conditions as long as possible. We have
+peace now, and I'd dislike to see anything happen that might start a
+war."
+
+I could see that the Commissioner was none too anxious to have Sebuza
+take over the throne. This suited me, for I knew that it would be some
+time before I was equipped with the right outfit to take the pictures
+I was after. If Sebuza's coronation could be put off for a year, it
+would suit me even better.
+
+All the white residents of Mbabane treated us with the greatest
+kindness and hospitality. They could not do too much for us. There are
+a number of interesting things about the settlement. It is essentially
+a little English village set down in the heart of the most primitive
+and savage principality of the empire. Like all the rest of the
+English who exile themselves from home, these people had brought a
+little bit of the motherland with them.
+
+The jail, or "gaol," as they insist on writing it, is an institution
+in Mbabane, but I must say there is not much punishment about it. The
+prisoners wear the convict garb, but you meet them all over the
+village. They are usually working in the gardens, and I have often run
+across them three and four miles from their penitential abode. No
+prisoner has ever been known to escape; perhaps the regular food has
+something to do with this.
+
+There are a number of interesting characters who live in Mbabane year
+in and year out. One of these is Allister Miller, a man of remarkable
+personality, energy, and business ability. He has several immense
+ranches and owns more than fifty thousand head of fine cattle. His
+bulls have been imported from all over the world and his cattle have
+made him a very rich man. Swaziland is an ideal stock-raising country
+and it is estimated that the Swazis themselves own more than three
+hundred thousand head of cattle.
+
+Probably the most interesting character in Mbabane is known to every
+one as "Matt." He is an accountant by profession. His nose has made
+him famous, and I am sure there is not another like it in the whole
+world. It is immense in size and has all the vivid tints of the
+"rum-nose" that distinguishes the confirmed tippler. All strangers are
+advised to see Matt's nose or count their visit to Mbabane a rank
+failure.
+
+There are a number of stories about him, one of the best being about
+his experience as an inmate of the gaol. It seems that he was
+accountant for a trading company and had made a mess of its books.
+Money was missing and he could not account for it. Although it was
+felt that he had not taken it, yet he was responsible and was
+sentenced to gaol for six months. Now the warden of the gaol trusted
+Matt and put him to work on the books. In addition, he used to loan
+Matt to do little jobs of carpentering and painting at houses in the
+village. This led to trouble. The little tin shanty, by courtesy "The
+Hotel," was much like some of the saloons in the "cow towns" of the
+old West in the United States. Ranchers, traders, and adventurers
+would congregate there and tell stories while they drank gin, whiskey,
+and combinations of the same. Matt was in the habit of passing the
+"hotel" each evening on his return to the gaol, and soon the
+roisterers began inviting him in to have a drink or two.
+
+One night there was a particularly joyous party, and Matt drank so
+much that he forgot to return to the gaol on time. It was midnight
+before he got there, and the jailer had already gone to bed. Matt went
+to his house and woke him, and this annoyed the official very much. So
+much so, in fact, that he refused to get up and let Matt into the
+gaol. Matt was reduced to the ignominy of returning to the hotel and
+bunking there. Next morning he made a charge against the jailer for
+not allowing him to serve out his sentence! Commissioner Honey
+discharged him and reprimanded the jailer for neglect of duty.
+
+Some years before Snyman had been postmaster at Mbabane and had made
+many friends, with the result that he had a most enjoyable visit. The
+morning we left to continue our trek to Zombode he was approached by
+Manaan, an old Swazi chief, who wanted to shake hands with him. Manaan
+was a typical kaffir, and Snyman told me a story about him which well
+illustrates the characteristics of the breed.
+
+"When I was at the post-office here," Snyman said, "Manaan and some of
+his sons went to the Transvaal to work in the gold mines. According to
+the law, their money was deposited for them in the savings-bank at
+Johannesburg, and the whole amount was put in the name of the old
+chief. I was still postmaster when Manaan and his sons returned to
+Swaziland.
+
+"One morning I was very busy when I saw Manaan standing at the door.
+Of course he would not enter until I spoke to him. I grunted at the
+old boy and he came in, with the usual 'Nkoos!' and his hands flung
+up. He stood at the counter for a while, waiting for me to speak to him.
+
+"Finally I asked, 'Ou funaan?' which means 'What do you want?'
+
+"'Ou funa mali!' he answered, meaning 'I want some money.'
+
+"Then the old boy walked over to the corner of the room and sat down.
+From the top of his majuba, or loin-cloth, he produced a little bundle
+wrapped in an abundance of dirty rags and tied with some leather
+thongs. Then he knelt down, as is the custom of the Swazis, and
+proceeded to spread out the contents of the bundle.
+
+"When he unwrapped the outer cover there was another and yet another,
+the last covering being the hide of some small animal. After this was
+undone there was a paper wrapping, and inside this was his savings
+account deposit book! This he presented to me with pride.
+
+"'Ou shiai intzinga; ou funa mali,' he said, which meant 'Telegraph to
+the place where this money is deposited; I want to draw it.'
+
+"'Lunglli,' I replied; 'wati nalie e'lali bapa ou buia mfigo uti zouk
+mali,' which meant, 'When the sun is over there come back and I will
+give you the money.'
+
+"I thought I would get a reply by sunset, and Manaan arrived promptly
+after I had heard from Johannesburg. He entered on my recognition,
+stacked his knob-kerrie, shield, and assegai in the corner, and came
+up to the counter.
+
+"I counted out the money to him. There were twenty-four pounds, and
+ten shillings for interest. This I had to explain to him, and when he
+understood that it was a gift he spent the next ten minutes in
+praising the white men. He was so accustomed to being taxed and paying
+for everything that to get these extra ten shillings was a shock.
+
+"Manaan then went over to his corner, knelt down, and counted the
+money over six or seven times. He would take it up, examine it, and
+put it down again and again. He seemed fascinated by the sovereigns.
+Finally he gathered it up and walked over to the counter. Piling it up
+in front of me, he said:
+
+"'E'musla implea mene bonela e'begga panzi!' which means 'Very nice
+indeed! I have had a look at it; it is wonderful! Now please put it
+away again!'
+
+"I felt like a fool. I had cancelled his account, and now the old
+nuisance wanted to re-open it and put his money in the bank again. But
+of course I did it. All Manaan wanted was to see and feel his money,
+so that he would be sure it was still there!"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII
+
+I meet Labotsibeni again--Flattering a savage queen--Explaining the
+"little black magic box"--Curing rheumatism with tooth-paste,
+vaseline, and hair oil--Women as currency--Gin, gold, and cows pay for
+the picture rights--The "flu" strikes--Jennie, the "blaau app", and
+the peacocks' tails.
+
+
+From Mbabane it is only a short distance to the top of the mountain
+from which the descent is made into Ezulweni, the beautiful Valley of
+Heaven. As we reached the top I pointed out Sheba's Breasts and the
+Place of Execution to my companions. These peaks could be seen far off
+to the right, where the sun picked them out in the early morning mist.
+
+Coming down the mountain was hard work, the grade being one in four at
+many places. We walked, because it would only have made it harder for
+the mules if we had kept our seats in the wagonette. At the bottom of
+the steep trail stands the place of Harry Niles, an old-time trader
+who has settled down there. He has a picturesque little home and has
+surrounded the house with banana trees, papayas, and semi-tropical
+fruits. Niles is a charming old man who retired from active business
+to live out his remaining years in this garden spot. He has no
+interest in outside affairs and lives an ideal existence, if one likes
+that sort of thing. His likes and dislikes are quickly expressed, and
+this is probably one of the reasons that make him contented with his
+life of isolation. If he likes you, however, he can be more hospitable
+than any one I know. He will feed you with the most delicious salads,
+fresh meat, and other delicacies, and there is always something rare
+to drink. His salads are famous, so that his few friends in Mbabane
+often make the hard trek to his little home to share one of them.
+
+Coming into the Valley of Heaven from Mbabane, instead of from
+Rietvlei, made it a much shorter distance to Zombode. We wanted to get
+there as soon as possible, since we had already been delayed by the
+wretched weather, so we only had a drink with Niles and then pushed
+on. He told me that he had heard that the Swazis were getting ready to
+acknowledge Sebuza as king, but he had no definite information about it.
+
+"What's more," he added, "I don't give a damn! Just so long as these
+royal niggers keep out of my way I'll keep out of theirs. They know
+better than to bother me, and it makes no difference to me who is king!"
+
+Shortly before we came in sight of Zombode, Oom Tuys came riding down
+the trail. A Swazi runner had brought word that we were coming, and my
+uncle had come out to meet me. I was very glad to see him and he was
+as cheerful as ever. He told me that he had had no difficulty in
+getting into Swaziland, as he had come in through Komatipoort, but he
+understood that word had gone to Mbabane that he was at Zombode and he
+wanted to cut his stay as short as possible.
+
+"It is a shame that the great British Empire should hound one poor
+lone Boer trader," he said, his eyes twinkling, "and I feel very much
+afraid. I hate to disturb the peace of mind of the High Commissioner,
+so I don't want to stay here any longer than necessary."
+
+Then he began to plan with me how to get our business over as quickly
+as possible. I had not been to Swaziland since my youth, and things
+were different now. Instead of our being met by a welcoming party of
+indunas, only a few curious savages and a horde of children came out
+to watch us arrive. The former proud formality of the royal kraal
+seemed lacking, and when I asked Tuys about it he explained that since
+Queen Labotsibeni had become blind "the old customs had gone to seed."
+
+There was still one formality about seeing her, however. This
+consisted of announcing your presence by sending her a bottle of gin
+and then waiting until she sent for you. Tuys explained to me that the
+old queen was terribly vain and desired, above all things, to be
+flattered. She liked to pretend that she could still see, and Tuys
+warned me under no circumstances to admit that I thought she could not.
+
+"You want to look out for Lomwazi, my boy," he added. "He has more
+brains than all the rest put together and is a very wily devil. He
+never leaves the side of the old queen, and she can't say a word that
+he doesn't hear. Look out for him!"
+
+He also advised me to keep my eye on Debeseembie, a brother of Lomwazi
+and the favorite son of the old queen. Debeseembie was another
+faithful watchdog of the royal hut and was always somewhere around.
+
+This was the first time I had seen Labotsibeni since I was a little
+boy, hence I was keenly interested in her apart from the fact that I
+hoped to obtain her permission to take pictures of Sebuza's
+coronation. It is well to observe here that I use the word
+"coronation" for lack of a better term. The Swazi king wears no crown,
+and I suppose the right but awkward phrase would be to speak of
+Sebuza's "induction as king."
+
+Lomwazi came out to meet us as we entered the royal kraal and readily
+agreed to convey the gin-present to his royal mistress. When I slipped
+him a bottle for himself, his haughty expression immediately became
+one of joy. A little gin goes a long way with the Swazis.
+
+In a very short time he returned and said that the queen would see us.
+In addition to the present sent ahead when an interview is desired
+with the queen, it is also proper etiquette to leave a present when
+the interview is over. Knowing this, I took along a present--that is,
+another bottle of gin.
+
+Now the royal kraal at Zombode was built with a little kraal inside
+the main one, and in the middle of that was Labotsibeni's reception
+hall or audience chamber. This was the most unusual building in
+Swaziland. It had brick walls about four feet high and was about ten
+by fifteen feet in size. The arched grass roof was about head high in
+the middle, but one had to stoop low to enter, because the three
+openings were only the height of the brick wall. No one has ever
+explained how these bricks came to Zombode. There are no bricks in
+Swaziland and it struck me as extraordinary that I should see them
+there.
+
+Lomwazi led us to the reception hut and we waited for him to announce
+us. I could see Labotsibeni lying on a mat in the center of the floor
+with a number of her women and warriors about her. She seemed very fat
+and huge, and very very old.
+
+"Nkosikaas! All powerful Queen of Swaziland," Lomwazi chanted. "Oom
+Tuys and Mzaan Bakoor, great white indunas, have come to see you. They
+bring presents and would be overjoyed forever if you would look upon
+them and accept their great tribute!"
+
+Some of this was true, but all of it was the proper sort of thing at
+Zombode. Labotsibeni listened intently, and when her vizier finished
+she spoke in her old cracked voice:
+
+"Tell my white sons that I am proud to welcome them to Swaziland and
+will grant them an audience."
+
+Thereupon we entered the hut. There were at least a dozen
+maids-of-honor attending the old queen, and several of these spread
+mats for us to sit on. Some of these women were working on freshly
+tanned hides from which they were fashioning skirts, and the odor of
+the skins tainted the air of the hut. I am accustomed to this smell
+and do not find it unpleasant, but both Snyman and Biddy soon had all
+of it they could stand.
+
+The old queen lay on her stomach with her head propped up by her
+hands. Within easy reach was a pile of leaves, and at intervals she
+would take one of these, wipe her lips and fingers with it, and thrust
+it through the open doorway. Her hands were small and beautifully
+shaped and her nails were spotlessly clean and perfectly manicured.
+Later I learned that her maids spent hours taking care of her hands,
+their only tools for manicuring the royal nails being bits of broken
+bottle-glass.
+
+Remembering Tuys's warning, I complimented her on her looks, beautiful
+hands, and the cleanliness of her hut and kraal. I told her that her
+royal abode was an example for all the other native kings of the
+Transvaal and generally explained to her what a superior person she
+was. She listened intently to my flattery and appreciated it greatly.
+
+Near her was the bottle of gin we had sent ahead. It was more than
+half finished and she took a drink while I was delivering my
+flattering oration. She reached for the bottle and Debeseembie
+assisted her to get the drink by pouring out more than half an earthen
+mug full of the fiery liquid. With one swallow she gulped it down, and
+then almost choked. This gave me my cue, and I told her how moderate
+she was and how refined in her way of drinking gin.
+
+"Why, Nkosikaas, if I were to give Jafta, king of the Mapors, a bottle
+of gin," I said, "he wouldn't stop drinking until he had finished it,
+and then he would soon become drunk. Whereas, you, with your royal
+daintiness and delicacy, drink your gin like a queen!"
+
+This thought pleased her much and she thereupon took another drink,
+which practically emptied the bottle. Of course I do not know that she
+had consumed the first half of that bottle, but she certainly drank
+enough in our presence to intoxicate any normal person. It was
+strange, but it did not seem to have much effect on her. When she
+spoke and drank, I noticed that her teeth were perfect. This, at the
+age of more than one hundred years, is a great tribute to the Swazi
+custom of cleaning the teeth with charcoal or sand after each meal.
+
+There was nothing private about our interview. While we talked indunas
+came and went and the women were always in the hut. In addition, both
+Lomwazi and Debeseembie were on hand all the time. After we had
+exhausted all our compliments and small talk, Tuys broached the
+subject of permission to take pictures of Sebuza's coronation.
+
+Here we ran against what seemed to be an insuperable obstacle. It was
+impossible to make either the queen or Lomwazi understand what I
+wanted. They had no conception whatever of what a photograph meant and
+motion-pictures were entirely beyond their comprehension. Both Tuys
+and I tried in every way to make them understand, but it was hopeless.
+Finally I decided that the only thing to do would be to take a picture
+of Lomwazi or the old queen and show Lomwazi what I was talking about.
+
+I persuaded him to get Labotsibeni to allow herself to be carried
+outside the hut into the sunlight, and there I took a picture of her.
+Then I photographed Lomwazi, Debeseembie, and a group of others. I
+explained to them that I would show them the pictures the next day, as
+I hoped to have them developed and printed by that time. After the
+picture-taking we went back inside the hut, and then the old queen
+became more friendly and told me her troubles. It seems she suffered
+with rheumatism in the shoulders and back. This was due to the fact
+that her upper body was usually bare and that she laid in the draught
+between the openings of the hut. When cold, she would cover herself
+with a magnificent fur rug, but this did not help her rheumatism much.
+
+On hearing of her aches and pains, Tuys's evil genius gave him an
+inspiration and he proceeded to get me into a pretty pickle.
+
+"Nkosikaas, you are in great good luck that we came to see you," he
+told her. "Mzaan Bakoor is a great white witch-doctor and makes the
+muti (medicine) that cures such pains as you have. He will make the
+muti for you and will cure you!"
+
+Labotsibeni appeared much cheered by this suggestion. I was not,
+however. I had no medicines with me and would gladly have kicked Tuys
+for making the offer. Shortly after this we left the queen, with the
+understanding that I was going to make the medicine that would cure
+her rheumatism and would bring it to her as soon as it was ready.
+
+When we got back to our camp I blessed Tuys with a real Boer outburst
+of profanity.
+
+"Why, Tuys, we'll make the old lady think that we are the worst sort
+of fakirs," I told him. "She won't grant me the right to take the
+pictures when she finds out that we have fooled her. You have made a
+fine mess of things!"
+
+But Tuys laughed and laughed and laughed. He thought it was one of the
+funniest situations he had ever seen. Looking back at it, I can see
+the humor of it, but at that time I did not find it amusing. Tuys told
+me I would have to go through with it and produce medicine that would
+at least make his word good. So I went to work. All I had with me were
+some toilet necessities. The "muti" was compounded at length, and this
+is the way the prescription read: Two ounces each of tooth-paste,
+vaseline, and hair-tonic. These I beat up until they were a loose
+paste and then placed them in a glass jar bearing a very vivid label.
+This jar had held my photographic chemicals.
+
+With impressive solemnity we returned and presented the muti to the
+queen. Then I explained the treatment. Her maids were to take cloth
+soaked in hot water and apply it to the aching parts until she could
+stand it no longer. Then small portions of the muti were to be
+thoroughly rubbed in until the pains departed.
+
+[Illustration: QUEEN LABOTSIBENI, MOTHER OF KING BUNO
+
+During Sebuza's infancy and boyhood, the throne receded to Queen
+Labotsibeni, his grandmother. She was blind and more than one hundred
+years old]
+
+[Illustration: LOMWAZI AND HIS COUNCIL OF INDUNAS, OR WAR CHIEFS]
+
+All this impressed Labotsibeni, but she insisted that the "great white
+witch-doctor" apply the treatment. I had to do it--that is, if I
+wanted to keep her favor. For an hour I massaged the old woman, and
+when the last of the muti was rubbed in she announced that her pains
+were gone and promptly fell asleep. The hot cloth, as I had guessed,
+took the aches out of her shoulders and back and the villainous muti
+bluffed her into a cure, which was good for the time being at least.
+It was a fine piece of chicanery for a graduate of two of the greatest
+medical colleges to have to practice, but it did the trick!
+
+Next morning we went to the royal hut as soon as we were sent for. The
+same gin ritual had to be followed, and we found the old queen quite
+happy and a trifle under the influence of the liquor. The pictures had
+turned out well, and Lomwazi was amazed to see himself in all his
+barbaric beauty. He is one of the strongest men in Swaziland and is
+very vain concerning his athletic prowess. One of his greatest sports
+is to wrestle with any one who will stand up to him, and he seldom
+loses. Hence, when he saw himself in the pictures, he felt very proud.
+Immediately he christened the camera "the white man's magic" and told
+Labotsibeni all about it. I watched this talk, and it was pathetic.
+Lomwazi explained as best he could what we had done and then handed
+his mother the picture of herself, telling her to look at it. She held
+it close to her eyes, and then said:
+
+"The white man's little black box is very wonderful! It must be a good
+magic or my son would not recommend it so highly."
+
+If she had been able to see, she might have remarked that the picture
+was a remarkably good likeness. It was the only time she was ever
+photographed, and it seemed a shame that the old queen could not
+appreciate it.
+
+Again we brought up the question of permission to take the coronation
+pictures. I explained that we wanted to do the same with Sebuza as we
+had done with them. This seemed to be all right, and we were getting
+nearer our goal when Lomwazi brought up the question of paying for the
+royal permission. He knew that the white man was not asking this favor
+for fun, and it came to him that we ought to be made to pay for it.
+
+"Nkoos, you have come far to ask this permission," he said. "You have
+trekked through the rain and sun and it has cost you time and money to
+get here. You would not have done this if the queen's permission was
+not of great value to you, would you?"
+
+I had to admit that I was not there entirely for my health, but
+minimized the importance of the pictures to myself personally.
+
+"These pictures will show the glory of Swaziland to the whole world,"
+I protested. "I shall carry them over the great waters to all the
+countries and there show the people what a wonderful land this is. I
+will show the English, the Boers, and all others that Sebuza is a real
+king. I will show the entire world that the son of Buno and the
+grandson of Queen Labotsibeni rules one of the greatest nations in the
+whole of Africa!"
+
+This oration flattered the vanity of the old queen and practically
+settled the question. Even the primitive Swazi values publicity.
+Labotsibeni agreed that we should have the royal permit to take the
+coronation pictures, and the next question was what I would pay. This
+was debated for some time. I tried to make Lomwazi set a price for the
+permission, while he, cunning beggar, tried to get me to make an offer.
+
+Now the Swazi has only a few standards of value. He recognizes the
+fact that women, gold, gin, and cattle have values that are stable
+everywhere. These values are about as follows:
+
+One gold pound buys one cow;
+
+Five cows buy one woman;
+
+One quart of gin buys whatever it will, according to the degree with
+which it is desired by a Swazi.
+
+Five cows, however, are not a standard price for all women. Only the
+women of the plain people are valued at so low a figure. If the women
+to be bought are of good family, that is, if they are the daughters of
+indunas, they are worth more than five cows. I have known princesses
+to be bought for as much as fifty cows. These were the exception,
+however, since these girls were the daughters of a high chief.
+
+I was prepared to offer cattle, gin, and money, and had brought along
+a certain amount of the latter. Lomwazi, however, started the deal
+with women as his counters.
+
+"How many young women, all maidens, are you prepared to give?" he asked.
+
+"It would take too long a time to get the women," I objected, "and I
+don't wish to trade women for the permission. I am ready to pay a
+small amount of gin and money, and perhaps some cows, but I cannot get
+women now."
+
+"Can't you get ten or fifteen women, Nkoos?" Labotsibeni asked in her
+husky voice. "My son, Lomwazi, has but few wives and I have so few
+maids. It would be very agreeable if you could get a small number of
+women."
+
+Lomwazi agreed with her in this, and I had to argue for some time to
+get out of the woman phase of the bargaining. Oom Tuys, although he
+knew it was against the law for white men to buy and sell women,
+pooh-poohed my scruples and told me to turn him loose and he would get
+me all the women I wanted. However, I remained firm in my refusal and
+the dickering took another tack.
+
+"Well then, we'll buy the women we need," Lomwazi said. "Mzaan Bakoor,
+you will have to give much gin and money, and also cows. The queen has
+decided that one thousand pounds, one thousand quarts of gin, and one
+thousand cows shall be the price."
+
+The old queen nodded her approval. I had not seen her confer with her
+vizier and realized that he was acting on his own authority. This
+showed me his power and how much the old lady trusted him. I then set
+out to get the price down to where we could really talk business. I
+had an idea that Lomwazi did not know how many there were in a
+thousand, but had used that figure as a basis for the deal.
+
+When I suggested that the thousand figure was preposterous, he
+reminded me that it was only as many as there were men in the royal
+impi, thus proving that he actually knew what "one thousand" meant.
+
+We talked back and forth, Labotsibeni every now and then putting in a
+word. The upshot of it all was that I agreed to pay five hundred
+gallons of gin, five hundred gold pounds or sovereigns, and five
+hundred cows for the right to take the pictures.
+
+Oom Tuys thought I was a fool to give them so much.
+
+"That is a tremendous price to pay for a few reels of these savages,"
+he said; "particularly, when there is a good chance that you will not
+be ready to take the pictures before the coronation takes place. To
+protect you, I shall make them promise to keep you informed as to when
+the show will take place, so that you can get on the job."
+
+He then pinned down the old queen, Lomwazi, and Debeseembie to a
+solemn promise that they would send me word as soon as preparations
+were under way to make Sebuza king. It is a point of honor among the
+royalty and high chiefs of the Swazis that their word is good, and
+this promise assured me that I would not lose my opportunity.
+
+Next came the problem of paying for the rights to take the pictures.
+Money I had with me, and I was soon able to buy enough cows to make up
+the required number. The gin, however, was not so easy. It is against
+the law to bring gin into Swaziland, although the authorities did not
+object to a few bottles being brought to the old queen. On Tuys's
+advice, I arranged that the five hundred gallons be brought in through
+Komatipoort, from Portuguese territory. This confession, I suppose,
+will make me liable to arrest when I return to the Transvaal. To avoid
+detection, the gallon jugs were each packed in bags of straw
+surrounded by chaff, being carried over the border by native women.
+They looked as though they were carrying corn, and the government
+officials let them pass without suspicion.
+
+After making the payment we set out for Ermelo. We had been about a
+fortnight on our trip, and both Snyman and Biddy were anxious to get
+back. We took the short-cut by way of Mbabane and made good time, the
+roads being fairly hard.
+
+We had one shock, however. When we reached the Masuto River we found
+that the "flu" had visited there during our absence. First the Scotch
+engineer had died and been buried by the Boer farmer who had given us
+food; then the farmer had died and been put away by the young
+storekeeper with the hunted eyes; and finally he had died and been
+hidden in a shallow grave near his store by some passing strangers.
+All three were gone, and this cast a gloom over our party, so that we
+were glad to leave the spot.
+
+The river had gone down and we were able to ford it without much
+trouble, although Snyman had hard luck and fell out of the wagonette
+into the only deep spot.
+
+I remembered that there were several women at the house of the dead
+farmer, so we went there to pay our respects and offer them any
+assistance we could. The house was closed and they were all gone,
+evidently to some of their relatives near Ermelo. We were about to
+return to the wagonette when I thought I saw something stirring near
+an orange-tree back of the house.
+
+It was a "blaau app," or blue monkey, which was tied to the tree. The
+farmer's women had forgotten the poor beast when they went away and it
+was pathetically glad to see me. It must have been very hungry, for it
+had been eating oranges, as the skins strewn on the ground showed. It
+was the first time I had ever heard of a monkey eating such food. When
+I cut it loose, the poor thing jumped into my arms and I took it back
+to the wagonette, where we fed it. Biddy and Snyman soon started an
+argument as to what its name should be. The first wanted to call it
+"Labotsibeni," but the other thought "Victoria," in memory of a
+late-lamented Queen of England, would be a nice name. So, since it was
+my monkey, I called her "Jennie," whereat the others upbraided me for
+my lack of inspiration. To add to their iniquity, no sooner did we
+unpack in Ermelo than they started a preposterous yarn about how I had
+stolen "Jennie" from old Queen Labotsibeni. They said that the monkey
+was her consolation in old age and that I had decoyed it away, thus
+breaking the aged queen's heart.
+
+This was not the last of "Jennie," however. The young doctor who had
+taken over my practice was carrying on well, and he adopted the
+monkey. She had the run of the place and was quite contented in her
+new home until one morning we were awakened by a fearful row. The
+peacocks next door were screeching at the top of their lungs and their
+owner, a gruff old Englishman, was out on the lawn using very bad
+language.
+
+I ran out--and found "Jennie" up a tree with her hands full of the
+long tail-feathers from several of the proudest peacocks! It took me
+some time to pacify the Englishman, who demanded her life and was
+calling for his shotgun. Finally I smoothed the troubled waters, but
+"Jennie" was not allowed to run loose after that.
+
+Having obtained the picture rights, I was anxious to have them taken
+properly. I scouted about, but could not find the equipment or
+camera-men I needed, so I decided to go to New York and get them. Oom
+Tuys agreed to watch things in Swaziland and delay the coronation
+until I could get back. I felt I could trust him to protect me, so I
+started to make arrangements for my overseas trip.
+
+[Illustration: THE STREAM THAT DIVIDES THE ROYAL FROM THE COMMON GROUND
+
+It was on the banks of this stream that we camped awaiting permission
+to enter the royal territory. This herd of cattle is being sent to the
+royal kraal as payment for two Princesses whom a chief has purchased
+as wives]
+
+[Illustration: TYPE OF AFRIKANDER CATTLE
+
+These cattle are the unit of value among the Swazis and enter into
+every business transaction]
+
+[Illustration: SWAZI WOMEN AT HOME
+
+Fashion is as inflexible in Swaziland as anywhere, but the styles do
+not change]
+
+This was not any too easy, because the war had disarranged sailings
+and there were not many ships touching at Cape Town. However, I soon
+saw in the paper that there was a freight steamer in port which was to
+sail direct to New York. I knew the skipper and telegraphed him that
+there was an emergency that required my sailing with him.
+
+"If you care to take a chance," he wired back, "join the ship as soon
+as you can."
+
+Just as I was leaving, Tuys reached Ermelo with a message from Lomwazi
+that Sebuza would be crowned within the next two months. This made me
+all the more anxious to be gone, and I left Tuys with the
+understanding that he would do his best to delay the coronation until
+I got back from New York.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII
+
+I start for New York--The religious atmosphere on shipboard--"Flu"
+attacks the Javanese--The missionaries refuse to help--Sharks as
+scavengers--The little mother's end--Evils of liquor--Assembling my
+party in New York--Passage as freight--St. Lucia and a little
+excitement--The thin magistrate--Released on bail.
+
+
+When I reached the ship I found the reason for the captain's peculiar
+telegram. He had more than three thousand Javanese on board whom he
+was taking from the East Indies to Paramaribo, Dutch Guiana. From
+there he would go on to New York. These people were practically deck
+cargo, since there were no accommodations for them inside the ship.
+
+While making arrangements for my cabin, I found that there was a woman
+who also had to go to New York. Although my friend, the captain,
+objected, I gave up my cabin to her and agreed to share the cabin of
+an old Javanese gentleman who was supposed to be in charge of the
+others. He was very primitive and ignorant, but spoke Dutch fluently,
+and I learned a great deal about Java and the East Indies--that is,
+while he lived, which was not long.
+
+The first night out of Cape Town there were twenty-four of us at the
+long table in the saloon. All the officers ate with us, and there must
+have been sixteen or seventeen passengers all told.
+
+Most important of the passengers were seven American missionaries
+returning from their godly work in the waste places of Africa and the
+East Indies. They were most conspicuous at all times and did
+everything possible to keep table conversation confined to religious
+topics. I chummed with a Canadian who represented an American
+agricultural firm in South Africa, and we soon became weary of
+religion at all meals.
+
+"There's a place for everything in this world," he said one morning
+after breakfast, "but I'll be damned if I want to combine kippered
+herrings with my soul's salvation!"
+
+It was not long before both of us were in the bad graces of the
+missionaries, who did not hesitate to murmur that "it was no wonder
+that the savages did not heed the call of Christ when the white men of
+their country were so irreligious!"
+
+About the third day both the Canadian and I had had our fill of the
+missionaries. We were thinking of asking the captain to allow us to
+eat at another hour when something happened that changed the whole
+aspect of the ship. I had gone to my cabin to get some "smokes" when
+the little old Javanese crept in. He answered my cheerful greeting
+very quietly and then shut the door. I could see that something had
+hit him and that he wanted to talk. So I sat down on my bunk,
+wondering what the trouble was.
+
+"Doctor, there is great trouble among my people," he said in a low
+voice. "Last night eleven of them died, and now they are dying all the
+time. Some terrible plague is among them and they die, they die!"
+
+This startled me. I had not noticed that there was anything amiss
+forward, but then I remembered I had spent practically all my time
+aft. Instantly there came to me the recollection of the sudden deaths
+of my friends at the ford of the Masuto River. I asked him what form
+the disease seemed to take and he gave me a lot of rambling details,
+none of which made much sense. He was plainly in a blue funk. I told
+him to stay where he was and then went to the captain's cabin.
+
+"I was just about to send for you, Doctor O'Neil," he said in
+greeting. "Something has broken loose among those Java coolies and
+they are dying like flies. As you know, we have no doctor on board.
+Will you go and see what's the matter?"
+
+Then he told me that the first officer had buried more than a dozen
+the first thing that morning and that he would have to throw another
+lot overboard by noon.
+
+"Why, they're dying like flies," he continued, "and we've got to do
+something to stop it. I shipped a full three thousand of them, but at
+the rate they're going I won't have a thousand left when I reach
+Paramaribo!"
+
+So the captain and I went into the forecastle, taking with us the
+little Javanese head man. It took me about five minutes to find out
+what was the trouble.
+
+"They've got the 'flu' and got it bad," I told the skipper. "It looks
+as though we are in for a bad time."
+
+I was right. Here we were in the midst of nearly three thousand
+ignorant people who had no idea of what was the matter. All they knew
+was that the man who was sick now would be dead in a short time. They
+sat about, perfectly quiet, waiting for death. I have never seen such
+resignation. In the scuppers there were six or seven bodies waiting
+for the first officer and his burial crew. No one paid any attention
+to the dead; they just sat about as though stupefied by what was
+happening.
+
+"There's just one thing to do," I told the captain when we got back to
+his cabin, "and that's to organize a life-saving corps and get to
+work. Let's get all the medicine you have and as much brandy as there
+is on board and make a fight."
+
+He agreed with me, and we overhauled the medical stores, finding
+little of any use in the present crisis. I have forgotten now what
+there was, but I remember thinking that we would have to put our trust
+in God and alcohol. I told the captain how inadequate his medicines
+were and he threw up his hands.
+
+"Who'd ever expect to get the 'flu' on board, anyway," he asked, as
+though it were my fault. "I've got all the medicines I need for the
+usual ailments and brandy will cure most of the sicknesses that occur
+on this ship. I'll give you all the brandy, rum, and gin there is, and
+then you go to it!"
+
+He was panic-stricken and practically told me I was to take command of
+his ship, except that he would take care of the navigation and
+discipline. I told him the first thing I wanted was assistants, and
+asked him to summon all the passengers to the saloon. When they were
+assembled, I got up and told them what it was all about.
+
+"These poor devils of Javanese are dying like rats in a hole," I said,
+"and I want volunteers to help me save them. There isn't much we can
+do, and every time you go among them you stand a chance of catching
+the 'flu.' They may not be good Christians, but they are certainly our
+fellow men and it is our duty to help them! I want volunteers and want
+them now. Who will join my life-saving crew?"
+
+Instantly the lady to whom I had given my cabin and my Canadian friend
+volunteered. The others followed one by one, with the prominent
+exception of the missionaries. I was astounded that they were not
+among the first, and turned to them.
+
+"What's the matter?" I asked, by that time annoyed at their holding
+back. "Don't you want to practice a little practical Christianity? Are
+none of you going to give us a hand in this fight?"
+
+They did not deign to answer. Instead, they looked at their leader, a
+tall gentleman with lean jowls, and he calmly turned and left the
+saloon. They trooped after him, and then our captain exploded.
+
+"Of all the yellow dogs!" he exclaimed. "So that's the sort of people
+they send out as missionaries! I'd like to throw them all overboard!
+Why, they'll hoodoo my ship! I was brought up to believe a parson put
+a curse on a ship, and now I know it's so!"
+
+Well, we pitched in and laid out our fight. It was a seemingly
+hopeless job. These Javanese did not appear to want to help
+themselves. Their only idea was to die, if they were called, and there
+was never a peep out of any of them.
+
+Men died and were sent to the sharks, leaving their women mute in
+their agony; wives and mothers died, and their men never turned a
+hair; children died in their mother's arms and were cast into the sea
+without the least outward sign.
+
+I mention the sharks, but even now I hate to think of them. They
+loafed along beside the ship, their great bodies slipping easily
+through the water, with now and then the flash of a white belly as
+they turned to meet the falling body. The Javanese were dying at a
+rate of between fifteen and twenty a day, and we soon ran out of
+weights for their bodies. The sharks increased in number until it
+seemed as though word had been sent out that there was a "death ship"
+on the sea. Before long they were fighting for the bodies. I watched
+one such conflict, but one was quite enough.
+
+My volunteers and I worked day and night to stem the tide of the
+"flu," and through it all the ship plugged along across a sea that was
+more like beaten brass than copper. It was hot, very hot, and at night
+the decks seemed to steam. Always the impi of sharks kept pace with
+us, their bodies throwing up streaks of phosphorescence as they lunged
+for their food. The whole thing was like a living nightmare and it
+seemed as though it would never end.
+
+Out of the haze of those ghastly days there comes to me one vivid
+incident. One of the Javanese women, a mother of seventeen or
+thereabouts, had a child of less than a year in her arms. I first
+noticed her when she held up her baby to me as I was going among the
+sufferers. The look in her eyes was so pleading, so trusting, that I
+took the little boy from her and examined him. The baby was as good as
+dead already. I gave it a sip of the stuff I was carrying, and the
+poor little thing opened its eyes and looked at me. I knew it could
+not live, but smiled encouragement as I gave it back to the
+outstretched arms.
+
+It was about sunset that night when the little mother realized that
+her son, her first-born, had gone. I was standing on the companionway,
+looking down on the fore-deck and wondering how long the plague would
+last, when some of the crew began picking bodies out of the scuppers
+and throwing them overboard. The glory of the sunset seemed a mockery
+and the thought came to me that I would be fortunate if I saw many
+more such sights. Slowly the young Javanese mother got to her feet and
+stood swaying as she wrapped her baby in a gay shawl. This done, she
+pressed it to her breast and began to walk to the rail.
+
+"She is going to bury her son herself," I thought, and I was partly
+right.
+
+She stood at the rail for a moment and then, the dying sun bright on
+her wistful face, turned and smiled at me. I smiled back, but the
+smile died aborning, for with one motion she rolled over the rail and
+was gone!
+
+I rushed to the place and looked over. The shadow of the ship was
+broken by some swirling streaks of phosphorescence, and that was all.
+There was no sign of the little Java wife who could not live without
+her baby.
+
+That night I asked the old Javanese chief about her. In his clear
+Dutch he told me that she was the wife of a Javanese who had gone to
+Guiana some months before. She was to join him and bring his son, of
+whom he was very proud, when he had established their home in the new
+land.
+
+"Now, how can I tell him about this?" the old fellow asked. "He will
+want his wife and child, and I will only have a sad story for him."
+
+But he was spared this. Early the next morning I noticed that he was
+ill, and in spite of all I could do he passed away before noon.
+Shortly before he lapsed into unconsciousness he sent for me.
+
+"I must go with those who have already gone," he said. "They need me
+and have sent for me. I can only go if I know that you, the great
+white doctor, will guard and care for those whom I leave behind. Will
+you do this?"
+
+Naturally, I promised, and that was the last I saw of him. He was a
+kindly, simple, old soul and the misfortune of his people would have
+broken his heart, had he lived.
+
+In a little while the "flu" began to lose its grip. Fewer and fewer
+died each day, and I had begun to think that the end was in sight when
+the white lady who was going to America came down with it. She had
+been tireless in her efforts to help in caring for the Javanese and I
+was not surprised when she fell ill. She was the only white person
+aboard to catch the "flu." We did everything possible for her, but she
+died on the second day.
+
+As her body went overboard the captain read aloud from the Bible,
+choosing the passage, "Greater love hath no man than this, that a man
+lay down his life for his friends." This struck me as particularly
+appropriate, since she had truly given her life for those Javanese.
+After her death the "flu" devil seemed satisfied and abandoned us.
+Before the end, however, we had lost more than twelve hundred of the
+Javanese!
+
+The missionaries kept close to their cabins during the whole "flu"
+visitation, only appearing now and then on the afterdeck. They even
+gave this up as soon as the captain suggested that the wind might
+carry "flu" germs to them. In spite of their protestations, they had
+to eat with the rest of us or go hungry. The captain insisted on this
+point, since he felt that they deserved no consideration and it was
+also highly entertaining to watch their indignation when we all took a
+stiff nip of brandy with our meals. They spoke of what a great thing
+prohibition was for the United States, and every time they said it
+they would look meaningly at the Canadian and me. In fact, after the
+"flu" left us the missionaries varied their religious conversations by
+giving table-talks on the evils of liquor. I remember how shocked they
+professed to be when I told them how much old Labotsibeni liked her
+toddy and how we always brought it to her when we visited Swaziland.
+
+When we reached Free Town, in the Barbadoes, an incident happened
+which was very amusing, but which these fanatics used to point out the
+evils of liquor. I knew some people there, and the Canadian and I went
+ashore and called on them. Of course there was "a party," and we
+enjoyed ourselves in free and easy fashion.
+
+Now the ship lay about a mile off port, because there was not
+sufficient water to allow her to dock. We went ashore in rowboats and
+came back in the same way. The deck was reached by a thirty-foot
+ladder, which is not the safest sort of footing at best. On our return
+from the party my friend missed his step at the top of the ladder and
+fell plump into the sea. There were a number of boats about and he was
+fished out without difficulty. The captain and I regarded the mishap
+as a good joke on the Canadian, but at dinner that night the
+missionaries used it as the text for an extended discourse on the
+evils of strong drink.
+
+One female missionary told us a story which led to a retort that is
+worth repeating.
+
+"Forty-odd years ago three prominent Philadelphia doctors decided that
+drink and tobacco were the two great evils of the world," she said,
+"so they agreed never to touch either as long as they lived. They
+agreed that they would all meet after forty years and see how they
+compared with their drinking, smoking, dissipating friends. All lived
+up to the agreement faithfully. Then they met in Philadelphia as
+before, and were amazed to see how energetic, health-perfect, and
+generally superior they were to those who remained of their friends.
+They were now between seventy and eighty years old and yet were as
+active as men scores of years younger.
+
+"This proves conclusively," she concluded, "that all the ills of old
+age are directly due to drink and tobacco."
+
+Naturally, we agreed with her. This, of course, we should not have
+done, since the fanatic gets no pleasure unless able to argue for his
+creed. My Canadian friend, however, could not contain himself.
+
+"Dr. O'Neil told me a similar case this morning," he said quite
+seriously. "It was about his uncle. This uncle is now one hundred and
+five years old and is beginning to worry about his health. Not long
+ago he was talking about drink and tobacco and told the doctor here
+that he had smoked steadily since he was seven years old; also that
+since he was fourteen he had drunk like a fish. 'And look at me,' he
+concluded; 'look at me! I know this whiskey will get me in the end!'"
+
+There was a roar of laughter about the table, but the seven
+missionaries did not join in it. Instead, we went out of their lives
+forever, and in the long days that followed, the skipper, the
+Canadian, and I spent most of our time together.
+
+The remainder of our voyage was uneventful and we finally reached New
+York. Here I found a cable from Oom Tuys saying that the coronation
+was to be held soon and advising me to return as quickly possible.
+
+I realized that no time could be lost and rushed about the city
+getting my equipment and party together. I engaged Dr. Leonard Sugden,
+the arctic explorer, as art and field director, William T. Crespinell
+as technical expert, and Earl Rossman as camera-man. Since they were
+to do the work, I had them buy the equipment. A feature of this was
+the manner in which the reels of film were packed. Knowing the
+difficulties of the Transvaal climate, Crespinell had them soldered in
+tins which were again placed in other tins. These were also soldered
+and the air exhausted between the outer and inner tins, so that the
+films practically traveled in a thermos bottle.
+
+After assembling my party and equipment, the next step was to get the
+whole outfit to Swaziland. This was a terrific undertaking. The war
+had so disarranged the world's shipping that I spent days on the docks
+of Staten Island and South Brooklyn trying to find a ship that would
+take us to Cape Town. Finally, after almost despairing, I was able to
+book passage for Crespinell and Rossman on the steamer "City of Buenos
+Aires," which went direct to Cape Town. A day later the captain of a
+freighter for the same port was induced to include Dr. Sugden and
+myself in his cargo. He did not know when he would start, but assured
+me that it would be soon.
+
+This was on a Saturday, and I told Sugden to stand by and wait for
+word to go on board. I saw that our equipment was stowed in the
+forward hold of the ship, and then went up to Fairfield, Connecticut,
+where some friends of my Harvard days were living. They invited me to
+stay until I had to sail, and I settled down to have a pleasant visit.
+They have a fine farm and a barbecue was arranged in my honor. This
+barbecue was held in the woods, and we were in the midst of it when a
+servant came from the house with a telegram from the captain of the
+ship. He said that he would sail at eleven o'clock the next morning!
+
+At once commenced a mad rush. I got Sugden's hotel on the long
+distance telephone, but they only knew that he had gone somewhere in
+the country to spend the week-end. I hurried back to New York and
+looked up every address where I might get information about him, but
+was unable to locate him. I kept trying up to the last moment, but
+finally could only leave word at his hotel that I was sailing. I went
+aboard very low in mind because his duties with my proposed expedition
+were of great importance.
+
+But Sugden is one of those mortals who seldom gets left. As we swung
+down the bay past the Statue of Liberty, I spied a tug coming after us
+with great speed. In addition, she was whistling and generally acting
+as though she was trying to catch our freighter. We were going slowly,
+so that in a short time the little craft fussed up alongside--and
+there was Sugden waving his hand from her forward deck! A rope-ladder
+was lowered, and a moment later I was gleefully shaking hands with him.
+
+Now this was to be one of the most memorable voyages of my life--and I
+have traveled a good deal. To begin with, we had the worst
+accommodations I have ever endured on any vessel. Our ship was only a
+cargo boat and there were no passenger-cabins whatever. We slept in a
+sort of steerage in the hold, in company with twelve of the crew. It
+was the most filthy hole I was ever in and reeked with vermin,
+including rats of the largest and most ferocious kind. The crew were
+the usual scum found on such boats and were the dirtiest human beings
+I have ever seen. They disapproved of us--and we of them--to such a
+degree that I often expected they would try to do us harm. Sugden,
+however, took all this as part of the game, and his sporting spirit
+made it possible for us to exist. His experiences in the Far North had
+made him familiar with all sorts of white men, but I had never seen
+such as these. People now and then speak slightingly of the kaffir,
+but the Swazi, with his daily ablutions, is a very superior person
+when compared with these so-called "white men."
+
+When our ship reached the warmer latitudes our hole became unbearable
+and we moved our pallets to the poop-deck, where we managed to get
+some sleep in spite of the terrific rainstorms we ran into. We felt
+that it was better to be drowned by clean rainwater than to suffocate
+and die slowly in our steerage bunks. However, our miserable existence
+used to get on our nerves now and then and we would drown our sorrows
+with whatever liquor we could obtain.
+
+There was one other passenger on the boat. He was a typical American
+of the western type who had lived in South Africa for years. Every
+year he made a trip to the United States and brought back blooded
+stock of various kinds. He was the slap-dash, breezy kind of
+big-hearted soul and soon became chummy with us. Owing to the fact
+that he was a regular tripper on this boat, he was able to share
+accommodations with one of the officers.
+
+It soon became his custom to visit us. He would sing out, "Look out
+below!" and then would creep down the shaky ladder which was the only
+means of entry to our place of misery. Always he brought a bottle, and
+the excellent "hootch," as he called it, did much to make our lives
+bearable. He was a good story-teller and would always introduce a
+preposterous yarn with the preface, "Now this _is_ true!" We gave him
+quite a run for his money when it came to yarning, as both of us had
+been about a bit, Sugden in the north and I in the south of the world.
+
+The first break in the monotony of this dreadful voyage came when we
+reached St. Lucia, in the British West Indies. This is a gorgeous bit
+of the tropics set in an opal sea, with cloud-covered mountain-tops
+that seem to rake the sky.
+
+When the ship tied up in the roadstead, Sugden and I felt that we were
+due to go on the loose a bit and went ashore with the express purpose
+of forgetting our troubles. We certainly succeeded in doing so, but
+ended by jumping out of the frying pan into the fire. Several of the
+ship's officers went with us, as they felt there were events at hand
+which they must not miss. Our "party" started at the first hotel we
+entered. This, it seems, was exclusively for the colored section of
+the population, for the place fairly reeked with blacks.
+
+After we had had several drinks, Sugden turned to me and asked:
+
+"Well, what are we here for? What do we want?"
+
+"Excitement!" was my answer, and we proceeded to get it.
+
+There was a billiard-table in the room, and this, with its torn green
+baize, suggested a battle-ground. We started a series of fights
+between the blacks, with a prize of five shillings to each winner. The
+conditions of the battles were that the two blacks should fight on the
+billiard-table, the loser being the one knocked off. There were some
+gallant battles, and every winner fairly earned his crown.
+
+The noise of the cheering drew a crowd, and soon the large bare
+bar-room was jammed with black boys and a sprinkling of whites. We
+whetted our interest by betting on the combatants, and I was doing
+quite nicely when the police broke in and stopped the fun.
+
+There was a squad of these funny black policemen, led by what I took
+to be a sergeant. They carried authority, and the blacks seemed to
+regard them with a great deal of respect.
+
+The sergeant wanted to know what I was doing. I told him that I was
+conducting a boxing tournament for the benefit of something or other.
+He asked if I had "official permission," and I admitted that I had
+overlooked this formality.
+
+"Then you are inciting riot and rebellion," he said in his clipped
+English. "I arrest you in the name of the King!"
+
+At this, Sugden commenced to laugh. This was a great mistake, since
+the black sergeant seemed to think that we were scoffing at the king.
+Without more ado, he invited us to accompany him to the court.
+
+"This, my dear sirs," he said severely, "is a very serious matter. It
+is not allowed to stir up strife in His Majesty's colonies."
+
+The court was in an old-style Spanish house, and the room was vacant
+except for buzzing flies. These zoomed like infant meteors through the
+narrow streaks of sunlight from the long windows. The benches were
+worn and comfortable, and I remember dropping off to sleep with the
+thought that even these flies had more luck than we did, since they
+had sunlight and fresh air, while our home was that dreadful steerage
+hole.
+
+I was awakened by Sugden's elbow. There on the high bench sat a thin
+old gentleman all in white. He had a thin hooked nose much like an
+eagle's beak, and his eyes were of the well-known gimlet type. As I
+took him in, the sergeant was reciting the charge against us.
+
+"These are desperate men," I heard him say, "from the ship now in the
+harbor. They were in the St. Lucia Hotel and were--"
+
+"Yes! Yes!" interrupted the thin magistrate in a voice as sharp as his
+nose. "But what is the charge? What have they done? Never mind the
+oration; get to the charge!"
+
+By this time I was wide awake. I suddenly came to a full realization
+that I was one of those "desperate men" and found myself deeply
+interested.
+
+"They were inciting riot and rebellion," the sergeant went on,
+undaunted by the magistrate's impatience. "A boy ran to the
+police-station and said murders were being done at the hotel. I called
+out all the police and went there as fast as we could run. Inside the
+billiard-room were hundreds of whites and blacks, all shouting with
+their desire for blood. On the billiard-table were two black men
+trying to kill one another. As I watched, one struck the other. He
+fell from the table and the crowd cheered.
+
+"Then this man," he went on, pointing at me, "hands money to the man
+on the table and says, 'You win!' After this he takes money from the
+other white man"--pointing at Sugden--"and tells him that he is rotten
+at picking fighters."
+
+"What next? What next?" the magistrate snapped.
+
+"Then the first man demands that more men come and fight," continued
+the sergeant, "and there was a rush by the blacks to see who could get
+on the table. Then I brought my men in and arrested them both.
+Entirely unashamed at being arrested, this man"--again indicating
+Sugden--"laughs out loud when I say the name of the king!"
+
+It seemed that we were guilty of disturbing the peace and quiet of His
+Majesty's island of St. Lucia and were very reprehensible characters.
+The lean magistrate regarded us with severe eye, and I am not
+surprised that he looked at us with suspicion. The voyage had not
+improved our looks much and we had come ashore in much-worn "ducks."
+In fact, we must have looked like a couple of beach-combers.
+
+"You have heard the charge?" he snapped at us. "Guilty or not guilty?"
+
+We were as guilty as could be, of course. Therefore we answered in one
+voice:
+
+"Not guilty!"
+
+The magistrate raised his eyebrows at our effrontery and then cleared
+his throat again.
+
+"Then you'll have to stand trial," he said. "I shall admit you to
+bail. Five pounds each!"
+
+We promptly produced the bail, and I think the "thin dash of vinegar,"
+as Sugden christened him, was surprised that we had it. Certainly we
+did not look as though we had a shilling between us. After our
+pedigrees were taken, we were informed that we would be tried at "ten
+o'clock next Thursday morning."
+
+Outside the court-room we found one of the ship's officers in a state
+of frenzy. It seems that he had been sent to get us, as the ship ought
+to have sailed several hours before.
+
+"She's been blowing and blowing and blowing for you!" he informed us
+in an aggrieved tone, "The old man is fair beside himself with rage."
+
+"Oh, that's what all the noise is about," Sugden innocently remarked.
+
+Then he suggested that we take our time and stop at several places. He
+argued that so long as we kept the officer with us the captain would
+not dare to sail. But I vetoed this proposition, feeling that we had
+already run afoul of "His Majesty the King" and not caring to take
+another chance.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV
+
+Obstinate stowaways--Free Town and a fight--Bay rum as a
+beverage--Sugden lets off smoke-bombs--Cape Town, a party, and some
+Anzacs--Oom Tuys advises haste--Through South Africa--Americans and
+Boers in Ermelo--Hurried visit to Swaziland for information--Mystery
+over the coronation--Royal gin for Labotsibeni--Debeseembie drinks and
+talks.
+
+
+We were certainly unpopular with the skipper when we got back on
+board. The officers who had attended our fistic tournament had
+returned slightly the worse for wear, and, of course, their condition
+was laid at our door. In fact, we retired to our pallets on the
+poop-deck feeling that we had not one friend on the ship, outside of
+the gunner, who was heavily subsidized. It was his job to feed us, and
+we tipped him liberally to get us the best there was. He earned his
+money, however.
+
+At dawn the next morning there was a fine explosion--the captain
+fairly blew up. The chief officer had discovered two stowaways, and we
+were wakened by his marching them up to the captain's cabin. It seems
+it was the duty of the commanding officer of the ship to return these
+stowaways to the port where they slipped on board, and the rules made
+him responsible for their cost until he did so. This annoyed our
+worthy captain exceedingly and his language was more sultry than the
+weather, and that is saying a great deal. In his torrent of profanity
+the skipper included Dr. Sugden and myself, for it seems that he held
+us responsible for the stowaways getting aboard the ship.
+
+While he relieved himself of all that bad language, the two stowaways,
+both negroes, stood silent, although there was a baleful gleam in
+their eyes. They were finally told off to do some work, but flatly
+refused to lift a finger. Then food was denied them until they did
+work, and the matter reached a deadlock. The captain finally decided
+to put into Free Town, in the Barbadoes, and turn them over to the
+authorities there after making arrangements for their return to St.
+Lucia.
+
+When the ship reached Free Town the captain gave strict orders that no
+one should be allowed ashore, adding, "particularly those two
+doctors!" We did not like this, as Free Town is a pleasant place and
+we could have found relaxation there that would have broken the tedium
+of the voyage. We needed the break, too, for the captain had ordered
+that we should not be allowed to buy any more liquor after the events
+at St. Lucia.
+
+However, we had commissioned the gunner to see what he could do for us
+and he had gone ashore with "the old man." In a little while a busy
+motor-launch, with the Union Jack flying free, came chugging alongside
+with our worthy captain and six of the Free Town police.
+
+They tumbled on board and announced to the stowaways that they were
+under arrest.
+
+"We are, are we?" these worthies asked. "Well then, come and get us!"
+
+They tore off their coats and shirts and waited for the attack. The
+police made no move, and I did not blame them. These two outcasts were
+the finest specimens of "fighting niggers" I have ever seen. Their
+torsos were ribbed with muscle and they looked fit to fight for their
+lives. What was more, they seemed anxious to begin!
+
+The police shuffled their feet, and I saw that they were afraid to
+tackle them. The stowaways saw it, too, and became cocky. They turned
+on the captain and officers of the ship and let loose a flood of
+damaging language quite as strong as their splendid bodies.
+Expurgated, it ran something like this:
+
+"You white folks think 'cause you've got some gol' braid on yer coats
+that yu' kin run over us! Come on an' get us! If yu' wanter arrest us,
+come an' do it! Yu' aint got th' nerve! Yu're afraid, that's wot yu'
+are! Come on an' fight, white men, come on!"
+
+Not one of the officers or police moved. The stowaways were right;
+they were afraid. Then Sugden and I broke the tension by cheering the
+stowaways. Like us, they were the under dogs and we were for them. We
+cheered and applauded their defiance, and this proved too much for the
+forces of law and order.
+
+There was a wild rush, and after a few sturdy blows the stowaways were
+overwhelmed by sheer force of numbers. When the flailing arms stopped,
+they were flat on the deck with about six men sitting on each. The
+irons were brought and clapped on them, and the last we saw of them
+was when they were hustled on board the launch.
+
+While this party was going on the gunner had been busy on our behalf.
+He had been unable to sneak away from the captain's gig when ashore,
+but made up for it by doing business with the bumboat men who came
+alongside. From one of these he bought two cases of bay rum, paying
+twenty cents a quart for it. This he smuggled down into our steerage
+and told us about it as soon as the smoke of battle had cleared away.
+
+Now this bay rum is not meant for drinking, although the blacks of
+that part of the world consume great quantities of it. I have heard
+that it makes them wild, and I am not surprised. It did worse than
+that to Sugden and me.
+
+We started drinking it as soon as we could, and before long we reached
+the semi-conscious state that made life bearable. From this we went
+into the second stage--that of hallucinations. We went practically
+crazy. Sugden insisted that he was a red squirrel and I believed that
+I was a wild cat. We became violent and were locked in the steerage.
+However, they did not take our bay rum away.
+
+Now the captain never visited our quarters, so he did not know of our
+plight until the end of the second day. Then he ordered that we be
+released. No sooner was the hatch taken off than Sugden tore up the
+ladder, crying out that "the wild cat" was after him. I was! Believing
+his assertion that he was a red squirrel, I chased him all over the
+boat, intent on killing him.
+
+We dashed through the officers' quarters, the captain's cabin, across
+the decks, up on the bridge and down again, and even got into the
+engine-room in our mad chase. Every one on the ship followed us,
+roaring with laughter. It was the funniest thing they had ever seen.
+Finally they captured us and brought us back to earth with buckets of
+sea-water.
+
+The captain was so amused that he forgave our previous sins and became
+our friend. He confiscated the balance of the bay rum and put us on an
+allowance of one stiff drink of whiskey each evening. This helped, but
+it was not very much under the circumstances.
+
+The next afternoon Sugden made a hit with the captain. The World War
+was not long over and the ship had a number of smoke-bombs which were
+supposed to be used in foiling U-boats. The gunner was in charge of
+them. Since they were no longer needed, the captain gave orders that
+they be thrown overboard.
+
+The gunner, however, proved inexpert. He lighted several, and then
+dropped them over the stern so quickly that the fuse was extinguished
+without the bomb exploding. Sugden watched these manoeuvers with
+extreme disgust. At each failure his remarks became more insulting.
+Finally he could stand it no longer--he had not yet fully recovered
+from the bay rum--and staggered up to the gunner.
+
+"You're a fine gunner," he snorted. "Who ever heard of a gunner who
+couldn't make a smoke! Stand back and let an expert let 'em off!"
+
+I was deathly afraid that he might have an accident, that one of the
+bombs would explode and kill him. The gunner had the same idea and
+hurriedly withdrew. The captain called to Sugden, but he paid no
+attention. He lighted the first bomb, held it for an interminable
+time, and dropped it over. It "boomed" as it struck the water and
+threw out the smoke-screen in most approved navy fashion. We all
+cheered, partly from relief that there had been no accident. Then
+Sugden let off all the rest of the bombs without a failure.
+
+"Well, you're a little bit of all right, after all," the captain said.
+"Come down to my cabin and I'll give you a real drink!"
+
+From then on we had a pleasant trip. Our captain let bygones be
+bygones and we enjoyed the few remaining days enough to partly make up
+for the misery that had preceded them.
+
+Crespinell and Rossman had arrived in Cape Town when we reached there,
+and came out in a motor-boat to meet us. We introduced them to our new
+friend, the captain, and he gave them a brief resume of our activities
+during the thirty-odd days of the voyage. He gave us credit for being
+two of the "rarest specimens" he had ever encountered.
+
+"The next time I ship two such wild men as these," he said, "I'll move
+into the forecastle and give 'em my cabin! What's more, from now on
+I'm going to limit myself to one doctor a trip, and he won't be a
+Boer, either. These two devils did everything from start a menagerie
+on one case of bay rum to instigate a mutiny when we had some fighting
+stowaways on board."
+
+Then he gave a romantic and none too flattering account of how we had
+been arrested in St. Lucia, and ended by informing my men that we were
+"fugitives from justice." This had not occurred to me; perhaps it is
+so and I shall find the funny black policeman waiting for me the next
+time I visit the island.
+
+We were glad to get ashore. It is one thing to race across the
+Atlantic in five days on a floating palace and quite another and
+none-too-pleasant experience to spend more than a month on a freighter
+in the warmer latitudes. The solid earth welcomed our feet and we
+found Cape Town very gay.
+
+After getting settled at the hotel, we started out to enjoy ourselves.
+Of course we chartered a motor, and our trail could easily be followed
+by the familiar fumes of gasoline and alcohol. The town was full of
+"Anzacs," Australian and New Zealand soldiers, returning from the war.
+They were great big reckless devils, glad to be going home and
+glorying in the fact that they had won the war. This led to an
+argument and to my taking a short and sad cruise in the "Mayflower,"
+this being the highflown name of a typical Cape Town hack.
+
+In one of the many places we visited during the course of our rambles,
+we ran into a number of "Aussies" celebrating the downfall of the
+Boche. They immediately noted Dr. Sugden's sombrero and greeted him as
+a "Yank." This was all right, but soon they added a familiar remark,
+"The Yanks won the war; oh yes, they did!" and Sugden became
+indignant. The usual argument ensued. Words ceased when Sugden slammed
+his hat on the ground and offered to lick them all. A second later we
+were in the center of a fine melee, which was ended by the military
+police breaking in.
+
+Sugden was badly used up and some of the rest of us were severely
+bruised. The nearest vehicle was the "Mayflower," so we piled the
+"fighting Yank" into it and took him back to the hotel. He had been
+badly damaged, so that it was a week before we were able to travel.
+
+In the meantime Oom Tuys had sent me several telegrams in which he
+urged me to hurry. In one there was the phrase, "Tzaneen making
+trouble; maybe war," and this sounded as if we were in for an
+interesting time when we reached Swaziland. I did not understand how
+she could do anything unless she tried to take the throne for Sebuza
+by force, but the situation looked as though there was some excitement
+ahead.
+
+Sugden was still recuperating from his battle with the Australians and
+expected to remain in bed for a few days more when this wire reached
+me. I showed it to him and he immediately became excited.
+
+"Come on, let's go" he said, getting out of bed. "We're wasting time
+here. Let's get into Swaziland and see what's doing."
+
+We left next day for the Transvaal. It is a long journey, but to one
+who has not made it before there is much of interest.
+
+After leaving the coast there come the beautiful mountain passes of
+the Cape Colony. Then the train drops to the Karoo Desert, with its
+endless brown stretches broken only by dry rivers, near which can be
+seen great herds of sheep. Kimberley, with its barrenness and huge
+dumps of dark, diamond-washed soil comes next, and finally the Great
+Fish River is crossed to the grassy plains of the Orange Free State.
+Across these plains the train runs for hundreds of miles, and then
+comes the Vaal River, after which the veldt of the Transvaal is
+reached. After a while the huge smoke-stacks and great white ore-dumps
+of Johannesburg loom, and the journey is practically ended.
+
+My companions were keen to hear all about this country, so new to
+them, and I was kept busy running from side to side of the car
+supplying their thirst for information. Dr. Sugden, I found, was well
+up on the history of the country and would often supply a missing date
+when I related the romantic story of the Boer and British conquest of
+South Africa.
+
+We spent several days in Johannesburg, and my companions were
+delighted with it. They frequently commented on its being like an
+up-to-date American city, as they found practically everything there
+that they would expect in the United States. In fact, Sugden was loud
+in his praises of the telephone service, which he insisted was "almost
+as good as that at home." The city has developed extensively during
+the last twenty years and now has buildings, hotels, and streets of
+the most modern type. The great contrast lies in the character of the
+street traffic. There are hundreds of motors of all kinds, but there
+are also innumerable rickshaws drawn by Zulus, thousands of kaffirs,
+and not a few horse-cabs.
+
+Then, of course, the huge mine-dumps right in the heart of the city
+struck my companions as extraordinary, but it must be remembered that
+the city grew up after the mines were sunk. There are miles and miles
+of smoke-stacks, and the crushing of the ore mills can always be
+heard. My party was much impressed by Parktown, the millionaires'
+suburb to the north of the city. Here there are libraries, a
+zoological garden, and all things essential to a thoroughly equipped
+and prosperous city. I have many friends in Johannesburg and my
+companions had a pleasant time visiting them with me.
+
+They had their first view of a real Boer village when we landed in
+Ermelo a few days later. The morning we reached there we saw several
+score of Cape carts loaded with farmers and their wives coming to town
+to shop. Then there were several of those great canvas-topped freight
+wagons, drawn by seven or eight span of wide-horned oxen and driven by
+a number of kaffir boys. These walk alongside with their long goads,
+and the entire progress of the caravan is one long shout. With the
+yelling of the kaffirs, the creaking of the great wagon, and the
+frequent lowing of the oxen, the noise of such an outfit is as
+striking as is its picturesque appearance.
+
+Sugden was intensely interested in these great freight trains, and
+reminded me of their similarity to those which made the overland trail
+in the States during the days of the forty-niners. The heavy-set men
+riding beside the wagons particularly impressed him.
+
+"Why, they are the same men that settled the West of my country," he
+exclaimed. "Their steady eyes and great beards remind me of the days
+of Crockett and Boone. Their rifles, ready for instant use, carry out
+the picture. Fred Remington would have been crazy over these ox-teams!"
+
+I noted that the interest was not all on our side; these farmer Boers
+were quite as curious about us as we were about them. They called each
+other's attention to our strange clothes, and not a few looked with
+envy at Dr. Sugden's sombrero. He was right about these men. They are
+the true pioneer breed, the men who found and make empires!
+
+Oom Tuys was not in Ermelo. One of his boys was waiting for me,
+however, with a message that preparations were being made for the
+coronation at Lebombo, but that Labotsibeni had made no sign as yet.
+He assured me that I need not worry and that he would join me at
+Ermelo in a day or two.
+
+I commenced assembling our expedition, and while I was so occupied my
+companions visited about and made many friends among the Boers. None
+of them had ever seen any Americans, although they had heard much of
+the United States, and they were greatly interested in everything the
+latter said and did. In fact, word reached the outlying districts that
+some Americans were in Ermelo and several hundred Boers trekked in to
+see them. Of course my companions could not talk Dutch and it was
+seldom that an interpreter could be found. It was no unusual thing for
+several great, bearded Boers to shake hands with them and say, "Hello,
+America!" this being the extent of their English. Sometimes
+conversations would take place in very broken English, the Boers
+always wishing to get news from the outer world.
+
+I remember one such talk. The Boer was a sort of preacher and was
+fairly well read. He spoke English of a kind--that is, it was
+understandable. He caught Sugden and me when we were returning from
+looking over some oxen and asked us a question that had been
+perplexing him. I translate his words into ordinary language, as
+otherwise they would be difficult to understand.
+
+"The war is over, yes?" he asked. "And America sent more than two
+million men and spent hundreds of millions of pounds. England, France,
+and the others will take much from Germany and Austria, but America
+says she will take nothing. Is this so?"
+
+"Yes, that's right," Sugden answered.
+
+"Why is America so foolish?" he asked in a puzzled way. "She loses
+thousands of men and millions of money, and yet wants nothing from
+Germany! Why did she go into the war?"
+
+This question was not asked so often in those days, and I was curious
+to hear Sugden's reply.
+
+"America went into the war to save herself," the doctor answered
+positively. "If Germany had won, she would have had to fight her
+alone, so she went in to avoid such a war."
+
+This satisfied the greybeard, but he went off muttering, "America
+wants nothing! America wants nothing! Such a foolishness!"
+
+Naturally, he could not understand this. Every time the Boers made war
+they gained territory, as did the British, and he judged from his own
+experience. I was glad that Sugden had stated the facts, instead of
+the old cant about America fighting to "save civilization." I know the
+old Boer would not have understood that and would have regarded it as
+what Sugden called "bunk."
+
+I had about finished assembling our outfit when Tuys came. He brought
+word that the coronation was indefinitely postponed, so we settled
+down to wait a bit before starting for the wilds of Swaziland. As
+usual, the unexpected happened. One of Tuys's men came to Ermelo in
+hot haste, bearing word that the coronation was to take place as soon
+as possible.
+
+This was disconcerting information, and Tuys and I held a council of
+war.
+
+"I don't believe that they intend having the coronation right away,"
+he said. "I don't think that Sebuza has been properly consecrated yet."
+
+"Well, you know what we've just heard," I said. "I wish we could get
+some first-hand information about it. I'd hate to lose out after all
+the trouble I've taken."
+
+"Owen, lad, there's just one thing to do--let us make a quick trip to
+Zombode and find out about it," my uncle advised.
+
+We talked the matter over for some time, and that seemed to be the
+only solution. There were still a few details of our expedition to be
+attended to, but I turned these over to Sugden and made up my mind to
+leave next morning.
+
+Dawn saw Oom Tuys and me on the trail. We rode fast ponies and went
+unattended. What food we needed we carried in saddle-bags, and the
+most weighty part of our load consisted of several bottles of gin.
+These, of course, were a necessity.
+
+The trip proved uneventful. The weather was good and we were able to
+sleep out comfortably. We skirted around Mbabane, since it would not
+do for Mr. Commissioner Dickson to know that Tuys was going into
+Swaziland.
+
+When we reached Zombode we found Lomwazi on guard at the royal kraal.
+He came out to meet us and received our gift of gin with rather poor
+grace. He seemed uneasy and not at all glad to see us. We asked to see
+Queen Labotsibeni.
+
+"Nkoos, the queen is not well and cannot see you," he answered, lying
+badly.
+
+"But she sent for me," Tuys said, catching his eye and meeting lie
+with lie. With the assured air of the white man, he was able to tell
+his lie convincingly.
+
+We knew that we would be caught if we allowed Lomwazi to return to the
+old queen alone, so we dogged his footsteps and arrived at her hut
+with him. Tuys fairly pushed in ahead of Lomwazi, and a moment later
+was talking to Labotsibeni.
+
+"Nkosikaas, mother of Buno the Great," he said, "I, the White King of
+Swaziland, am here to do your bidding. Your son, Lomwazi, told me that
+you are not well and I have brought Mzaan Bakoor, the great doctor, to
+cure you."
+
+I could see the old woman seemed very feeble. She nodded approval as
+Tuys finished and answered by asking for gin. Lomwazi pulled out the
+glass stopper and a moment later held the earthenware cup to his
+mother's lips. She gulped and choked, then repeated her action, and
+finally finished the drink, gasping for breath.
+
+We sat and watched and saw a transformation. As the alcohol went down
+we saw her strength return. In a few minutes she was the same old
+queen I had known before. Lomwazi squatted behind her with sullen
+look. When he glanced our way there was murder in his eyes, and I did
+not like it. Tuys, always reckless and utterly fearless, gave him
+glance for glance, and the black man's eyes always fell.
+
+"I am cured, Nkoos," Labotsibeni began in quite a strong voice. "I am
+well. The 'muti' of the white man cures all ills of the body, even
+when it numbers the years as the leaves of the trees. Why have you
+come to see me?"
+
+"I wish to know when you plan to make your grandson, Sebuza, the son
+of Buno, king of Swaziland," Tuys answered without fencing. He thought
+that a direct answer might get the truth.
+
+"When all is ready Sebuza will be made king," she answered without
+hesitation, and it seemed to me there was the ghost of a smile on her
+lips.
+
+Tuys then asked her how soon that would be, but she said she did not
+know. This time I was sure she smiled. I had a feeling that we would
+get no information out of her and that Zombode was not any too anxious
+for the coronation.
+
+Tuys then asked for Sebuza and wanted to know where he was. The blind
+old queen let Lomwazi answer us, and the wily vizier said he did not
+know, but that he thought the crown prince was in the mountains being
+consecrated.
+
+According to the ancient customs, before the new king takes office he
+must go through a lengthy ceremonial in the mountains. This usually
+lasts for two months, or "two moons," and the priests, or
+witch-doctors, are in charge of the rites. In the case of Sebuza the
+sanctification was also the celebration of his attaining manhood.
+
+After Lomwazi's evasive reply--for I felt that he was
+lying--Labotsibeni began to ask questions. I knew that we must answer
+them in detail if we wished to get any further information, so we did
+so. She became quite peevish when the effect of the gin wore off and
+was nothing but a querulous old woman. But she asked the most
+extraordinary questions! I realized more than ever that she had
+brains, for she went from one end of the world to the other. Of course
+she had no education as we know it, but she asked about the Boers and
+British and how they were getting along together, "lying in the same
+bed," as she put it.
+
+She had heard that all the white men were at war with one another, and
+she asked question after question about the world conflict. It seems
+that aeroplanes had flown over parts of Swaziland during the war, and
+she was curious about these. They had been described to her as great
+birds carrying men and guns, and she wanted to know how it was done.
+
+Tuys and I kept our patience and answered everything we could, always
+trying to get a stray bit of information concerning Sebuza's
+coronation. She had several drinks of gin during the talk, which ended
+after about three hours with our being no wiser than when we came.
+Once or twice we thought the news was coming, but each time the
+watchful Lomwazi stepped into the breach and turned the subject. We
+were completely baffled.
+
+Finally we gave it up. As we made our farewell speech, in which we
+wished the old queen "long life and good health," I offered her the
+"going-away present." Then ensued an incident that showed how keen she
+was in spite of her great age and lack of sight.
+
+The gin bottle was an unusual shape; that is, it was long and tall,
+instead of being squat and square. When I handed it to her she passed
+her hands over it with rapidity and then asked what it was, for she
+had never had a bottle like it before.
+
+"It is royal gin," I assured her. "It is gin that is made only for
+kings and queens. It is the gin that the queen of the English drinks.
+It is the only gin worthy of you, Nkosikaas!"
+
+This satisfied her and she accepted our farewell, so we went back to
+our horses. Tuys was amused at the old queen's keenness and told me I
+had committed treason by making the Queen of England drink gin to
+placate a Swazi potentate. Lomwazi came with us to do the honors,
+though really he wanted to make sure we did not talk to any one and
+get information. He was still sullen and suspicious, and we pointedly
+did not present him with the gin he hoped for, although he saw that we
+had several bottles left.
+
+"It's no use, Owen," Tuys said, as we rode down the trail to the
+Valley of Heaven. "They are planning something, and I fear it means
+trouble for that cub, Sebuza. I have a feeling that we ought to get
+our outfit here and sit tight and watch events. Something is going to
+happen. It may be a new king or a dead crown prince. I can't tell
+which."
+
+That night we camped near a kraal of one of the minor indunas and
+noted that there was less cordiality than usual. Tuys strolled over to
+the great fire and talked for some time with the warriors. In a little
+while he came back quite excited.
+
+"Debeseembie, Lomwazi's brother, is over there," he said. "He is
+inside the kraal, but some of his men let out the fact that he was
+there. I wonder what he is doing? Suppose we try and find out."
+
+This seemed a good idea, and Tuys went about it in his own cunning
+way. He strolled over to the fire and told one of the warriors that he
+had a bottle of gin for Debeseembie, but that he would only deliver it
+to him personally. Then he came back to where I was stretched on my
+blankets.
+
+Now a Swazi, like all other kaffirs, will do anything for alcohol,
+even to the sacrifice of his royal dignity. Debeseembie was the son of
+a queen and the brother of the late King Buno; nevertheless, he was
+standing respectfully nearby within a few minutes.
+
+"Nkoos, you have a present for me?" he asked, and I could see his eyes
+flash in anticipation.
+
+"Yes, if you will sit and talk a while," I told him, and then produced
+a bottle. Tuys poured out a generous drink and gave it to him.
+Debeseembie choked it down, just as the kaffirs always do, and then
+gasped for breath for a moment.
+
+Then Tuys began talking about many things, none of them with much
+bearing on the information we wanted. In a little while Debeseembie
+had another drink. He is the most sincere of all the royal family and
+I have always found him to be very trustworthy. He is not a good liar
+and seems to know it.
+
+Gradually we led the conversation to the coming coronation and finally
+asked him the leading question: How soon will it be? He was not
+angered and gave us the first direct intimation of the trouble we had
+suspected.
+
+"My brother, Lomwazi, doesn't want it to take place," he said; "and he
+has great power over our mother. He frightens her by telling her that
+she will have to die when Sebuza is crowned. All the people of
+Swaziland want to have a king and are tired of Labotsibeni and
+Lomwazi, and Tzaneen is working for her son's coronation. No one can
+tell when Sebuza will be made king. It may be never!"
+
+That was what we wanted to know. Debeseembie, always at the old
+queen's elbow, ought to know what he was talking about and we felt
+that he had told the truth. A few moments later I gave him our last
+bottle of gin and he stumbled back to his kraal.
+
+Next morning we were up at dawn, striking back to Ermelo as fast as we
+could go. Again we skirted Mbabane, but nevertheless made good time.
+Tuys was very thoughtful during most of the trip, and I cannot
+remember that he had anything to say until we came in sight of Ermelo.
+
+"Well, it looks as if our friends in Swaziland need some one to make
+up their minds for them," he said in a musing way. "However, I don't
+want to have to do it!"
+
+I glanced at the cunning old man, but he was looking into the dust
+ahead and did not amplify his remark. It was an interesting thought,
+however, and it did offer one way out of our difficulties.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV
+
+Outfitting for Swaziland--Our cook becomes "Gunga Din"--Lomwazi's
+messenger--Off for Zombode--Rossman goes hunting--Too much rain--The
+oxen die and are replaced by donkeys--Sneaking liquor through
+Mbabane--Ezulweni mosquitoes rival New Jersey's--We are very unpopular
+in Zombode--Manaan's damage suit and settlement.
+
+
+Dr. Sugden and the others were waiting for me at the house. They were
+all ready to start and impatient to be off. The novelty of Boer life
+in Ermelo had worn away and they now were keen to be out among the
+Swazis.
+
+"Let's go!" was Sugden's chant. "Come on, let's start! All the things
+are packed, the wagon's set, and the oxen are eating their heads off.
+Come on, let's go!"
+
+I assured him that we would be off as soon as possible, and added that
+he would find plenty of hard walking to use up his surplus energy once
+we started trekking. Tuys and I, as the old-timers of the party, made
+a thorough inspection of the wagon and outfit. We had trekked
+practically all over the Transvaal and Orange Free State at various
+times and our equipment was all that could be needed for the job in
+hand.
+
+The wagon was one of the great freight-carriers used so extensively in
+South Africa. It was along the lines of the old American "prairie
+schooner," except that it was much bigger and heavier in every way. It
+was about eighteen feet long by ten wide and could safely be loaded up
+to three or three and a half tons. Its wheels were squat and heavy,
+with broad tires built to prevent their cutting into soft roadways and
+to roll over the dust of dry weather without sinking into it. The rear
+half of the wagon was covered with a top, or tent, under which a
+permanent bed was built. This bed was of the primitive plain-board
+kind, but saved us from having to sleep on the wet earth on many
+occasions. When we started out the wagon was drawn by eleven span, or
+twenty-two oxen. Three Swazi boys were in charge of it and were
+responsible for its animals.
+
+Then, chiefly for our personal convenience, I had pressed the
+wagonette into service, and this was drawn by six mules. Sibijaan and
+Tuis were in charge of this part of the outfit.
+
+I must not forget our cook. He was a most important member of the
+expedition and came through it in a most remarkable manner--always on
+the job and always ready to work a little harder. He was an Indian,
+that is, a native of India who had come to the Transvaal as servant to
+a British officer during the World War. His right name became lost
+early in our association. It was a long, three-barreled sort of name,
+quite melodious, but not handy for trek use. When I was inspecting our
+equipment I asked him his name again, and he calmly answered, "Gunga
+Din, Sahib."
+
+"Since when? When did you change your name?" I asked, surprised that
+he had relinquished his proud paternal patronymic.
+
+"Yesterday, Sahib. The sahib with the large hat says that he can't
+remember my name and tells me that from now on I shall be known as
+'Gunga Din.'"
+
+Investigation showed that Sugden became fed up on the long, beautiful
+name of our cook and had firmly given him one that was easy to remember.
+
+"Gunga Din's easy to remember," he explained. "Gunga Din and Rudyard
+Kipling go together, and you surely can't forget them both. G. Din
+made R. K. famous, and it's a cinch to remember the cook's name that
+way. Anyhow, we'll be calling him 'Din' as soon as we get going!"
+
+And he was right. The chef with a name like a great poet became "Din"
+and remained "Din" until we returned from Swaziland.
+
+The great wagon was heavily loaded with all the dunnage and
+impedimenta needed for our expedition, among which were gin and a
+number of mysterious cases I had personally seen packed in New York.
+My companions did not know what was in them until late in our
+expedition, but when they found that I had nearly one hundred pounds
+of glorious five-and-ten-cent-store jewelry they realized that I knew
+a bit about the kaffir character.
+
+Of course we had all the weapons we could use. The best sporting
+rifles and revolvers were part of the equipment, though I hoped that
+we should not have occasion to use them except for pot-hunting. Things
+will happen in Swaziland, however, and Tuys was a great believer in
+foresight.
+
+After our rigid inspection of the outfit we returned from the kraal to
+the house, where the whole party assembled for dinner. During the meal
+a discussion arose as to whether it would not be a good idea to start
+immediately and work our way into Swaziland on the chance of being
+able to get action. Tuys maintained that we ought to start at once and
+hinted mysteriously that the coronation might be arranged whether
+Labotsibeni liked it or not. Knowing his propensity for taking chances
+and his liking for trouble, I hesitated to encourage this idea.
+Sugden, of course, wanted action and rather welcomed the thought of
+trouble. Crespinell was neutral, taking the stand that anything was
+better than "sticking around Ermelo," while Rossman said he did not
+care whether he took pictures of peace or war. But the matter was
+taken out of our hands.
+
+At about dawn next morning Sibijaan came hammering on the door of my
+room. I jumped up and let him in.
+
+"Mzaan Bakoor, there is a messenger outside from Zombode," he
+announced. "He came in the night and would not wait any longer. He
+says he must see you now."
+
+I had the man in. He was one of the old "king's messengers," but
+without his distinguishing sign. His lean, hard body and muscular legs
+would have singled him out, though.
+
+"Nkoos, Lomwazi sends me to bring you a message," he said, with his
+hands outstretched in salute. "He says that Sebuza will be made king
+at the next new moon."
+
+Looking back, it seems to me that we must have made a peculiar tableau
+there in the bedroom dimly lighted by the coming sunrise. The savage,
+with his great shield, knob-kerrie, and assegai, and the white man in
+his pajamas! I will admit that the white man had his finger on the
+trigger of a little 44-caliber bulldog revolver during the first part
+of this interview. One does not take foolish chances in South Africa.
+
+I asked the messenger for further details about the coronation, but
+all I could learn was that Sebuza had been in the mountains undergoing
+sanctification for the last six weeks and would return to Lebombo
+before the new moon.
+
+Sibijaan took care of the Swazi and saw that he was fed and given a
+little drink. After which he took to the trail again, and I saw him
+fade into the distance at a dog-trot just about the time we were
+finishing breakfast.
+
+His news decided the argument of the night before. The oxen were
+inspanned, the mules also, and about noon we started off on our trek
+for Zombode. The expedition had been the talk of Ermelo for some time,
+and practically every white man and most of the kaffirs were on hand
+to cheer and give us a rousing send-off. Many of our friends walked
+with us until we crossed the little bridge and were lost in the
+willow-groves along the river trail.
+
+This first day the roads were excellent and we made the best speed of
+any day of the trip. Before night we had gone a full twenty miles,
+stopping at the fine farm of an old-fashioned Boer. Instead of camping
+in the open, as we had to do for practically all the rest of the
+expedition, we stopped with the farmer. I did this because I wanted my
+American associates to see how real Boers live. We had a regular Boer
+supper, consisting of grilled meats, such as chops, hearts, liver,
+kidneys, and Boer bacon; crushed mealies, rye bread, and coffee. There
+was an abundance of all this and it was cooked to the queen's taste.
+The twenty-mile trek, during which we walked every foot of the way,
+had given us wonderful appetites and we were able to do more than
+justice to the quantities of food set out.
+
+Following supper the old Boer became solemn, as is the custom after
+the evening meal, and led us in religious services. No matter how poor
+or how humble, the true Boer never forgets his "night prayers." This
+is his heritage from those Huguenot ancestors. It was impressive to
+see my American companions bow their heads silently as the old farmer
+recited his devotions.
+
+Prayers over, we went to the "parlor," whose chief ornaments were
+almost priceless relics and skins, and staged an amateur musicale.
+There was a good piano and we had our ukelele. What more could be
+desired? All the kaffirs in the neighborhood gathered outside and
+fairly wept for joy. It was a splendid concert, considering the
+talent, and made a great hit with the farmer and his wife.
+
+Next morning we were inspanned and on our way by dawn. It was raining,
+and this made it look like bad going all day. The farmer and his wife
+were up as soon as we, and had rusks and hot, strong coffee for us. It
+was chilly, and the coffee was a good "pick-me-up" before a day's
+trek. Before we left the Boer made us promise to stay a week with him
+on our return from Swaziland. He said he would arrange a feast for us
+and we would be able to play our "hand-fiddle" for all his neighbors.
+
+By ten o'clock we had made about seven miles, and camped for breakfast
+on the shores of a small lake. Our progress had been much delayed by
+the rain, and this made the walking disagreeable as well. We were very
+hungry for breakfast and Din performed wonders, considering that the
+rain continued until an hour after we had finished. After a short rest
+we started on again, and by four o'clock we had reached the banks of
+the Masuto River. Here we made a good camp, pitching two additional
+tents, so that we would have a mess-room and cook-house with which the
+rain could not interfere. This camp was chiefly memorable for the fact
+that Rossman almost had an "adventure." While Din was getting supper
+ready the camera-man took a rifle and went along the river with the
+intention of shooting something. He had been gone only a few minutes
+when we heard a shout, followed by a shot. Sugden and Crespinell
+rushed to Rossman's assistance, each with a rifle. They reached his
+side to find him gazing fearsomely at a large snake whose back had
+been severed by his bullet. It was a dramatic moment--especially when
+Sugden picked up the snake and pointed out the fact that it must have
+been dead for a week or more!
+
+That night we were all very tired and went to sleep as early as
+possible. Next morning, true to my Boer upbringing, I was up and about
+before dawn. Coffee and rusks were ready soon after, and my companions
+were awakened to face their third day's trek. Of course we could walk
+faster than the oxen, so I pushed ahead as I knew that there was a
+Mapor kraal a short distance away. We reached the kraal about five
+miles ahead of the wagons, and this gave me time to show the others
+their first native settlement.
+
+All the men were away, only women and children being at home. These
+all seemed to belong to a small chief of the tribe, and they informed
+me that he was away on a hunting trip. Sugden and the others were
+intensely interested in everything they saw and I arranged for them to
+inspect the interior of a number of the huts.
+
+I soon noticed that all the women were much taken with Rossman; in
+fact, they could hardly keep their eyes off him. I found by questions
+that they were fascinated by his great horn-rimmed glasses. The upshot
+was that we allowed a certain few of these dusky Eves to try the
+glasses on, and they were much amused thereat. We distributed about
+five shillings among them and they treated us to tswala and brought us
+a number of fresh eggs.
+
+In a little while the wagons hove in sight and camped near the kraal
+for breakfast. Scraps of wood and "buffalo chips" made our fire, and
+presently Din had a good "feed" ready. While the cooking was going on
+the little kaffirs gathered about the camp in numbers. Some of them
+even drove their goats close so that they might see the white men eat.
+By the time we began breakfast there were more than forty of these
+little beggars squatting on their haunches near the table. They
+watched every motion most intently and followed each morsel to its
+destination. Every now and then I would take a piece of lump sugar
+and, without looking, throw it in their direction. Instantly there
+would be the fiercest sort of a scramble for the tidbit. They were
+rough beyond reason, and every now and then one of them would be hurt
+and crawl away for a few minutes until he had recovered. Never,
+however, would he cry out or show that he felt the pain. No sooner did
+our wagons leave the spot than there was a wild rush to where we had
+been. They fought furiously over every scrap in the hope of finding
+food that the white men had thrown away.
+
+We kept steadily on until five o'clock that night, and then made camp.
+When Din gave the supper-call at about eight o'clock, Sugden and I
+went to the mess-tent to find Crespinell and Rossman sound asleep on
+the floor. They were worn out by the steady walking and I did not
+blame them for taking it easy. After a "shot" of Picardy brandy, we
+all sat down to the best supper Gunga Din had yet given us. There was
+soup, chicken curry, rice, vanilla pudding, canned fruits, and coffee.
+Truly, a feast for a trek supper!
+
+That night Sugden and the others were kept awake for some time by the
+howling of several jackals. They suggested that they take their rifles
+and go out and "get some of those infernal beasts!" I had to explain
+to them that it would be exactly like trying to shoot the shadow of a
+ghost, and they went back to bed grumbling heartily.
+
+The next day was a bad one, rain making our progress slow and
+miserable. I wanted to reach a certain point, and we forced the oxen
+until noon before stopping. This trek had been too long and hurt the
+brutes so that their spirit seemed broken. We camped among some very
+rugged hills, and here Dr. Sugden showed us all how to handle tents
+and ropes in wet weather. The ease with which he tied and untied knots
+in the ropes astounded our kaffirs and filled the rest of us with envy.
+
+The rain increased, and soon everything became soaked. It was such a
+downpour that we decided to wait for it to slacken and ended by
+remaining in this camp for two days. Our only amusement was to watch
+Tuis, the Basuto-Bushman kaffir, in his perpetual conflict with the
+other boys. Being of a different breed, he did everything in a way all
+his own and, in addition, was naturally antagonistic and sulky.
+
+[Illustration: ON THE WAY TO THE ROYAL KRAAL AT ZOMBODE
+
+Dr. O'Neil and party going through the Valley of Heaven. The barren
+mountains in the distance show the rugged nature of the country]
+
+[Illustration: THE SECOND TRIP INTO SWAZILAND
+
+The O'Neil caravan shortly after the draft-oxen had died and were
+replaced by mules and donkeys]
+
+[Illustration: MOTHER FEEDING HER BABY]
+
+[Illustration: MAIDEN SINGING TO THE CROWN PRINCE SEBUZA
+
+She is playing on the native instrument which consists of a bow and
+one string]
+
+In spite of the picturesqueness of this camp, we were very glad to
+leave it. We were now in the wild country, with no farms, and the only
+break in the monotony was a little wild goose shooting shortly before
+we reached the Swaziland border. Our real troubles began about this
+time. The oxen began to die, and it was not long before we were
+absolutely stalled. We were then in camp on the border, and it looked
+as though we would stay there unless I was able to get some other
+animals to pull the wagon.
+
+Finding further progress impossible, I scouted about and ran into a
+kaffir living on the border who had a horse. I hired this steed--a
+sorry one it was--and, following a tip given me by its owner, rode
+twelve miles to see if I could talk business with a small Swazi chief
+who was said to have a number of donkeys.
+
+At first this old chief did not want to talk about donkeys at all, and
+it was not until I began to talk payment first and donkeys last that
+he consented to get down to business. We finally made a deal, and it
+was this: I was to pay him the equivalent of one pound sterling in gin
+for every day I used his donkeys. This was not such a bad bargain
+because I had to have about forty of the little animals to make up for
+the oxen I had lost.
+
+The most interesting part of this transaction was to see the chief's
+men harness the donkeys to our big wagon. They used bits of weed-rope,
+rawhide, and a stout grass rope that they make themselves. The
+harnessing took a long time and we were delayed until I began to grow
+impatient, but there was nothing else to do but wait. Finally we were
+off, but it was a funny looking caravan. It had been raining hard for
+some days and we presently came to a little stream which was much
+swollen. Here we had a terrible time. The "harness" kept breaking, and
+the way the natives thrashed those poor donkeys was frightful. It
+seemed to be the only method, though, and eventually we took a hand in
+the punishment ourselves.
+
+The night of the second day saw us camped at the foot of the mountain
+that leads to the village of Mbabane. We found several other transport
+wagons there, with three white traders whose occupation was to carry
+goods from Ermelo and Carolina, the two rail stations, to Mbabane and
+vice versa. These traders were much interested in our outfit, and by
+treating them to drinks, fresh food, and the payment of one pound
+sterling I was able to hire twelve donkeys from their caravans to
+assist us to the top of the mountain. We started at dawn next day, and
+by noon had reached the summit. There we rested for the balance of the
+day.
+
+My object in delaying there all the afternoon was mainly on account of
+the great load of liquor in the big wagon. I did not want to bring
+this through Mbabane in daylight because I had no permit to bring it
+into Swaziland and I did not want to get caught doing so. I thought
+that I could get by practically unobserved if I waited until after
+dark and then went through the village with other wagons. Our camp at
+the top of the hill was about three miles from Mbabane, and I ordered
+Sibijaan to inspan and start on again at five o'clock. This would
+bring him to the village at about eight o'clock, or shortly after dark.
+
+We went ahead and called on Mr. and Mrs. Dickson, who gave us tea. It
+was real English tea and we enjoyed it immensely. The Dicksons had
+heard of our expedition and were much interested. Mrs. Dickson,
+however, was greatly amused at our capacity for tea, since we each
+drank between five and six cups. But we were dead tired and it was
+wonderful to shut out the whole of Swaziland and sit down in this cozy
+English home to drink decent tea poured by a white woman!
+
+After thanking the Dicksons, I went to the little store and bought
+some supplies. I also went to the hotel and bought some liquor, this
+being merely for camouflage, as I wished them to think I needed it.
+The supplies and liquor I gave to a native carrier, telling him to
+take it to the place where we expected to camp for the night. There
+were six packages in all, weighing about forty-five pounds, and it was
+amusing to see this kaffir summon five others to help him. Each Swazi,
+carrying his shield, knob-kerrie, and assegai, started for our camp
+with a little parcel on his head.
+
+The wagon was late. I began to be worried, for I had estimated that it
+would arrive in the village about eight o'clock. I spent a nervous
+hour or so waiting for it to show up, but it did not do so till about
+9:30. I told Sibijaan to proceed to the camping place about two miles
+further on, and we pushed ahead to be on hand when it arrived.
+
+Soon we ran into a typical wonder-sight of that part of the country. I
+had noticed a red glow in the sky off to the left, and on turning a
+little hill we saw that the whole side of a mountain was one
+tremendous fire. While this was at its worst, or most glorious,
+height, the great red African moon came up over the mountain like a
+huge ball of flame. The whole scene was so striking that Sugden
+insisted we ought to take a picture of it. We hurried back to the
+wagon and found a number of Swazis trailing it out of curiosity. With
+the aid of a box of cigarettes, I pressed twelve of them into service
+and got the cameras to the spot from which we wanted to take the
+picture. While we were doing this little Swazis seemed to spring up
+out of the ground, and before we had finished there must have been at
+least four score of them wondering what the white men were trying to do.
+
+Sibijaan saw a chance to air his superior knowledge and I heard him
+telling these little fellows a preposterous yarn.
+
+"You see those black boxes?" he said, pointing to the cameras. "Well,
+those are the magic boxes of Nkoos Mzaan Bakoor, the great white
+witch-doctor. He will look at the fire through them and soon it will
+go out. If he is offended, he can make the fire burn up the whole
+country and kill all the Swazis!"
+
+I was afraid to look back and note the effect of this beautiful lie,
+but I heard the kaffir exclamation of wonder--"Ou! Ou!"--from a dozen
+throats and decided that my trusty henchman had gotten away with it.
+
+By the time we had packed our cameras again the wagons had caught up
+with us and we went on. The spot I had picked for the camp was under a
+small grove of palm trees across a little stream, and we arrived there
+to find that the six carriers had started a fire. It was about
+midnight when our wagons reached camp, and soon after we rolled up in
+our blankets and dropped off to sleep just where we stood.
+
+Next morning we started down the steep slopes into the Valley of
+Heaven. This was a very dangerous descent for the wagons, so that it
+was after midday before we reached the floor of the valley. The poor
+donkeys were completely exhausted, and we camped there until next day.
+
+The Valley of Heaven was certainly living up to its name. It was never
+so lovely, and my companions were enthusiastic in its praise. I
+pointed out to them the Place of Execution and Sheba's Breasts as we
+came down the mountain, and they immediately decided they would visit
+both before returning to Ermelo.
+
+Although I remember the beauties of the Valley of Heaven as though it
+were yesterday, still the difficulties that befell us there made me at
+that time regard it as the "Valley of Hell." We had come down about
+two thousand feet and the climate was hot, moist, and uncomfortable.
+Our energy was sapped, the donkeys were worn out, and our kaffir boys
+were lazy beyond all use.
+
+The trail ahead consisted of a succession of low hills cut by little
+streams. Many of the inclines were steep, and I estimated that we
+would be lucky if we made five or six miles a day. It was practically
+impossible to judge distance, and this led me into error. I had picked
+out a camping spot seemingly about six miles away, and Sugden and I
+started to walk to it. The grass was six feet high in most places and
+full of deadly snakes. Few of the little streams were fit to drink,
+and the farther we walked the farther the chosen spot seemed to
+recede. Finally we saw a fair-sized stream which we thought was two
+miles away, but which turned out to be nearer four. When we reached it
+we drank, after straining the water through our handkerchiefs. We were
+very hot and uncomfortable, and were made supremely unhappy by the
+realization that the wagon could not reach us for at least two days.
+
+There was nothing to do but go back, and we finally reached the outfit
+at sunset. The donkeys were completely exhausted, so we camped right
+there. I realized that for the last thirty miles before reaching the
+royal kraal at Zombode we would be lucky if we made three or four
+miles a day.
+
+Because of this experience I changed our trek time. Instead of trying
+to make it in daylight, we did most of our traveling by dark. This
+helped a little, but we failed to make more than a mile every two
+hours, even when the going was good. To add to the misery of the trek,
+the mosquitoes tormented us continually. However, these pests
+introduced a little comedy into our suffering, for my companions would
+recall the mosquitoes of New Jersey, U. S. A. and compare them with
+those of South Africa.
+
+Crespinell summed up the comparison when he said:
+
+"For brutality and ruthlessness these 'skeeters take the biscuit, but
+the New Jersey breed have got 'em skinned a mile when it comes to
+technique!"
+
+At the end of five days of untold hardships we climbed out of the
+Valley of Heaven and reached the stream that divides the royal from
+the common ground at Zombode. We arrived there at about nine o'clock
+at night.
+
+Fires were burning in front of many of the huts and there was a hum of
+life in the air. The sounds were all the more noticeable because no
+one appeared to have any intention of meeting us or giving us a
+welcome. We pitched camp and Din prepared the evening meal. By this
+time we had a score of little visitors, all Swazi children of about
+ten or twelve years of age. Usually these little beggars are in bed at
+this time of night, but the noise of our wagons had aroused them and
+they had sneaked out of the huts to investigate.
+
+None of the indunas, warriors, or women came near us, and I soon
+realized that we were in disfavor for some reason or other. Only a
+direct command from Lomwazi or the old queen would have made the
+people avoid us in this manner. However, it was not fitting that I
+should visit the royal kraal without invitation, so I did not stir
+from our camp that night. In the morning I announced my arrival to
+Labotsibeni without the indignity of supplicating an interview. This
+came about in a peculiar manner.
+
+Shortly after dawn I was awakened by the deep bass of a native who
+seemingly was greatly annoyed. The voice was strangely familiar, but I
+could not place it for the moment. In a little while Sibijaan came
+into the tent with my coffee and announced that I had a visitor.
+
+"Ou Baas, there is a great induna outside," he said, "and he wants to
+see you. He says he is very angry. Shall I tell him to go to hell?"
+
+Thirsting for information regarding things at the royal kraal, I bade
+Sibijaan send him in. This my old playmate did with poor grace, since
+he would have preferred to be cheeky to the chief.
+
+To my surprise, Manaan--he of the savings-bank account--strode in. He
+was carrying his war tools and stood facing me for an instant in quite
+a belligerent attitude. I was wearing only a thin bathrobe and for a
+second or two the angry black man faced the white. Then the age-old
+supremacy of race asserted itself and Manaan dropped his eyes with the
+familiar "Nkoos!"
+
+"What the devil is the matter with you?" I demanded angrily. "Why do
+you make all this row so early in the morning?"
+
+"Peace, Nkoos, peace!" the old induna answered. "I did not know that
+it was you. I would not have made talk if I had known."
+
+Then he went on to explain that our donkeys had strayed across the
+stream during the night and had ruined his corn patch. He insisted
+that the poor beasts had eaten all the young corn and that he and all
+his wives faced starvation during the coming year. What he really was
+worried about, it developed, was that there would be no corn to make
+tswala and in consequence he would have to go without his beer until a
+new crop came in.
+
+I sympathized with him and told him that I would go over and see the
+damage as soon as I was up and about, agreeing to pay him for it. I
+felt sure that he was lying, but did not want to make an enemy of him,
+since I knew that he was said to be close to Labotsibeni. In the olden
+days he was leader of one of Buno's crack impis and was a noted warrior.
+
+In a little while I accompanied him to look at the ruined crop, and,
+as I suspected, found he had lied like a kaffir. The damage was about
+three shillings worth, and I told him so and offered to pay him the
+money. He became very indignant.
+
+"This is not right, Nkoos!" he almost shouted. "I am a great induna
+and cannot be treated in this way. I am one of the queen's most
+important chiefs and I shall report this injustice to her."
+
+Now this threat suited me. If the old fool reported that I was robbing
+him, he would also be notifying Labotsibeni that I was in the
+neighborhood.
+
+"I am willing to abide by what the queen decides," I said. "You tell
+her that I await her word. I shall state my side to her, and you can
+state yours!"
+
+This was what I really wanted. It would bring me before the old queen
+and allow me to ask her about the coronation. With this understanding
+Manaan left for the royal kraal, while I went to breakfast. Shortly
+after we had finished, Manaan returned.
+
+"I have seen the queen," he announced in an important manner, "and she
+is much offended because you have treated Manaan so unjustly. She says
+that you must pay me five shillings and a bottle of gin, and then the
+debt will be satisfied."
+
+To make the payment seem greater I protested for a moment and then
+gave it to the old fellow. I asked him how the queen was, but he
+answered evasively. This brought the suspicion that he had not seen
+Labotsibeni at all and had concocted the story about her decision as
+to the payment. Manaan would have been quite capable of this because
+he had lived for some time among the whites in Johannesburg and had
+been schooled in guile.
+
+Nevertheless, I was satisfied that he had brought word to the royal
+kraal that I was there, and I expected that I would soon receive a
+message from the queen to come and see her. When the sun showed that
+it was nearly noon I decided to force her hand and sent Sibijaan with
+presents, which means gin, to the royal kraal. He returned presently,
+saying that Lomwazi had taken them from him and that they had been
+accepted by the queen.
+
+Sunset came and yet there was no word from the old lady, and I began
+to grow anxious. I sent for Manaan and cultivated him in an attempt to
+get some information. He soon became drunk and told me many little
+things, none of which threw much light on my problem. One statement,
+however, was important.
+
+"All the people, except Lomwazi and a few of those close to the queen,
+want Sebuza to be king," he said. "They are tired of being ruled by a
+queen, and Lomwazi asks too much. He always wants more cattle and corn
+from each kraal, and the people are dissatisfied. Even now they are
+waiting for Sebuza to come down out of the mountains and it is said
+they will demand that he be made king then!"
+
+Part of this was very interesting. I was glad to know that the people
+wanted Sebuza, but I doubted that they would dare to ask for him to be
+appointed king. The Swazis are subservient to their rulers and it was
+unthinkable that they would assume to ask Labotsibeni to abdicate.
+They were very afraid of the old queen; she seemed to exert some sort
+of extraordinary influence over them. It was cheering, however, to
+know that I had public opinion on my side.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI
+
+Labotsibeni refuses to see me--Sugden and my men escape
+assassination--A fruitless conference--We flee to Lebombo--Oom Tuys
+turns up--We confer with Queen Tzaneen and Lochien--Five-and-ten-cent-
+store jewelry has persuasive powers--Sugden falls ill--We build his
+coffin--Sebuza returns from his sanctification.
+
+
+Next morning I got up, pocketed my pride, and decided to call on Queen
+Labotsibeni. When I reached the entrance of the royal kraal I was met
+by Lomwazi. He was furtive in manner and did not look me in the eyes.
+His voice, as usual, was quite low, and for once his dramatic gestures
+were lacking.
+
+I demanded to be allowed to see Labotsibeni. Lomwazi shook his head
+and spread out his hands deprecatingly.
+
+"The queen will not see you, Nkoos," he said, "and she sends word that
+you are not to camp on the royal ground."
+
+"But why won't she see me? I bring her presents and much gin," I
+protested. "She promised that I should attend the coronation of Prince
+Sebuza!"
+
+"She is very, very old, but still she doesn't want to die," added the
+wily Lomwazi, glancing at me out of the corner of his eye.
+
+At last I understood. Lomwazi had let the cat out of the bag and the
+delay in the coronation of Sebuza explained itself. Tempted by the
+great price I had offered for the picture rights--five hundred cattle,
+five hundred gallons of gin, and five hundred pounds in gold--the old
+queen had overlooked the fact that Sebuza's accession to the throne
+meant her death. At the time I made the bargain with her, or with
+Lomwazi as her agent, she had consoled herself with the thought that
+the British Government would be able to save her life. Now she was
+afraid that the government might not be able to do so and wanted the
+coronation delayed indefinitely, or put off for good.
+
+Labotsibeni and Lomwazi were in an uncomfortable position. They faced
+either the certainty of being sacrificed when Sebuza mounted the
+throne or the breaking of their contract with me. In addition, the
+sentiment of the people of Swaziland was against the old ruler and
+Lomwazi must have known it. Under Labotsibeni there had been more than
+twenty years of peace, and there had grown up a feeling that the
+nation was becoming decadent without a war, if only a little one
+against some inferior tribe. The British had backed the old queen in
+all her moves toward keeping peace within her borders, and the
+fighting men of Swaziland were unhappy at not having any opportunities
+to show their mettle. From the days of Ama-Swazi the Swazis had been a
+warlike people, and the bloodthirsty Buno had developed their ferocity
+by frequent raids and forays on neighboring tribes. The accession of
+Sebuza, young and warlike, made the Swazis feel that they would have a
+real leader again, and the fact that the crown prince was the son of
+Buno added to their desire for him to reign.
+
+I had left Oom Tuys in Ermelo with the understanding that he would
+join us in Zombode. I began to wish he would show up, since I seemed
+to be butting my stubborn Boer head against a brick wall and my uncle
+was the one white man in all the Transvaal in whom old Labotsibeni
+placed her trust. I knew that she would not refuse to see him and
+there was a chance of his getting her to agree to the coronation.
+
+Realizing that we were in for a delay that might last several months,
+Dr. Sugden and his companions decided to study the Swazis at close
+range and compile data concerning the tribe. To me was left the
+politics and "wangling" of the expedition, while they started out
+blithely one morning to catch Swazis.
+
+Their expedition was abortive, to put it mildly. Of course Sugden
+would only be content with Swazi life as exhibited in the royal kraal,
+and it was there that he decided to begin. I did not know this, and
+thought that he was going to visit some of the little kraals where the
+indunas lived.
+
+I was sitting in my tent thinking about sending a man to find Tuys,
+when Sibijaan came running in very much excited.
+
+"Ou Baas, Mlung Emantzi Eenui, Makofa, and the other white man are
+going to be killed at the royal kraal!" he cried.
+
+Now Sugden was called Mlung Emantzi Eenui--"The Man of Living and
+Burning Words"--by the kaffirs, and Crespinell was given the name of
+Makofa, which means "The Small Alert One." The other white man was
+Rossman, of course.
+
+I sprang out of the tent, across the little stream, and ran to the
+royal kraal. There I found my companions surrounded by a full impi of
+warriors who had hemmed them in with their assegais. The white men had
+drawn their revolvers and were ready to use them. It only remained for
+some one to make a sudden break and there would be a killing.
+
+"Make way! Make way!" I yelled, diving through the throng.
+
+In a second or two I reached Sugden, who had the grim look that means
+fight. He had Lomwazi covered with his revolver and I could see that
+the induna would be the first to go if the shooting started.
+
+"What's all this trouble?" I demanded, as though I were the chief of
+all. "Why are these warlike manoeuvers? Why have these warriors
+stopped my men?"
+
+Lomwazi hesitated for a moment, during which I could see the tension
+relax and the Swazis begin to drop their spear-points.
+
+"It is forbidden that white men enter the royal kraal," the chief
+said. "These men tried to force their way in. They said they wanted to
+see all things in the kraal. The queen sent her own impi to stop them
+and gave orders that they were to be killed if they did not go away!"
+
+Sugden was much disgusted, and gave his side of the affair.
+
+"I only wanted to take a look around," he said. "We were just inside
+the kraal when these men came running from every direction and
+surrounded us. I thought we would have to fight our way out and would
+have popped some of them off if Lomwazi had not come up. He told us to
+get out, and here we are!"
+
+That seemed to be all there was to it. However, it was a bad affair,
+as it put me in the position of trying to break into the queen's kraal
+without permission. Later I realized that it did not make much
+difference, since we were out of favor at Zombode anyway.
+
+I was well nigh desperate now. It seemed as though nothing could be
+accomplished through Labotsibeni or Lomwazi, but I decided to make one
+last appeal to him. I sent him a present by Sibijaan and asked that he
+come and see me at my camp.
+
+My boy brought back word that Lomwazi would see me next morning, but
+would meet me at the crossing of the little stream. "When the sun
+reaches the royal kraal" was the time set, which must have been about
+seven or seven-fifteen o'clock.
+
+The stream was only a short distance from our camp, and I watched
+until I saw Lomwazi coming to the rendezvous. I had expected that he
+would arrive with four or five of his indunas, and I had arranged that
+all my white companions should accompany me to the interview. Instead,
+Lomwazi brought practically the whole royal impi with him. The savages
+were in full war costume and made a splendid picture as they marched,
+the sun reflecting from their black shoulders and assegais. It was the
+first time that Sugden and the others had seen a whole impi in all its
+glory and they were much impressed. The warriors were drawn up in a
+sort of regimental formation at the meeting-place, with Lomwazi
+waiting in front, by the time I decided we should leave our tents.
+
+Since they had come armed to the conference, my companions and I
+shouldered our rifles--we always wore revolvers--and walked in a
+leisurely manner toward the little stream. As we came close Lomwazi
+raised his arms in greeting and the impi gave us the royal salute. It
+was the first time in some years that I had been thus honored. The
+shrill whistle following the heavy stamp of the thousand feet gave the
+Americans a real thrill.
+
+Lomwazi and I shook hands in a formal way and then sat down to talk
+things over. I little thought that this would be the last friendly
+conference I would have with him. Behind me sat my three companions,
+while behind the vizier sat four or five of his high men, all lesser
+indunas and leaders of warriors. It was an imposing gathering, much
+like many out of which peace has come during the various savage wars
+between the whites and kaffirs in the Transvaal.
+
+After the necessary conventional amenities, which have to do with
+health and the condition of wives, I came to the main question, but
+from a widely different angle.
+
+"Lomwazi, you and Queen Labotsibeni made a paper with me that shows I
+gave you five hundred cows, five hundred gallons of gin, and five
+hundred pounds in gold for the right to take pictures of the
+coronation of Sebuza," I began. "Now the queen will not see me and you
+will not tell me the truth when I want to know about the coronation.
+Other indunas have told me that you and the queen have plotted to
+prevent Sebuza becoming king--"
+
+"Nkoos, that is not so!" Lomwazi returned hotly, interrupting me. "We
+wish Sebuza to become king and will do nothing to prevent it. It is
+the government that does not wish him to become king; it is the
+government, and not my mother, Labotsibeni!"
+
+This I knew to be partly true, but I felt sure that the government
+would be willing that Sebuza should reign if the change in rulers was
+accomplished without bloodshed.
+
+"Then if the government refuses to let Sebuza be king," I went on,
+"you and the queen have obtained much wealth from me for something you
+knew you could not give. There is only one thing for me to do--that
+is, to hold you and the queen liable for the price of the rights she
+granted me. I shall notify the government at Mbabane and ask that it
+collect the money value of what you received from me. I am a friend of
+the government and close to the Commissioner, and he will send to
+Johannesburg for troops who will come and collect from you. If you do
+not care to have me do this, you can make restitution now by giving me
+the price in cows."
+
+Now this meant that Lomwazi would have to round up at least two
+thousand head of cattle and turn them over to me. This I knew he could
+do, but I also knew that he would not do it without such compulsion as
+I was unable to bring.
+
+He glanced keenly at me while I laid down the terms of my ultimatum
+and saw that I was in dead earnest. With his great cunning, Lomwazi is
+a keen judge of human nature, and he watched me to see if I was
+bluffing or not. He decided that I was not and listened in silence to
+the end. Then he raised his eyes and spoke in the same low, level tone
+he always used.
+
+"Nkoos, what you ask is unjust," he said. "Labotsibeni gave the word
+of a Swazi queen and her word cannot be broken. You will have the
+opportunity you have bought and I shall see that it is so!"
+
+"Yes? Then how soon will Sebuza be crowned?" I asked.
+
+"When Queen Labotsibeni, mother of Buno, gives the word the ceremonies
+will take place," he said, and this ended the interview.
+
+Lomwazi threw his leopardskin cloak about his shoulders and rose, and
+I got to my feet also, feeling that I had gone as far as I could, but
+had gained nothing. The indunas shook hands and the impi gave their
+salute as he raised his arms with the salutation, "Nkoos!" Then he
+turned and went back to the royal kraal followed by the great
+warriors, their plumes nodding in the sunlight.
+
+I realized that I had come to the end of my string at Zombode. The old
+queen would not give the word for the coronation to take place and
+undoubtedly Lomwazi was behind her refusal. Looking back, I do not
+blame them very much; the coronation would be their death warrant and
+the government was not prepared to send troops to protect them.
+
+That night I had a little talk with Sugden, who was feeling ill,
+explaining to him what we were up against.
+
+"It looks as if we are out of luck," was his comment, "but there must
+be some way to beat the game. I'd hate to lose out, now that we're
+here. It seems to me that you ought to be able to find a way to
+prevent Lomwazi from sitting on the lid much longer. Let's see if we
+can't get action by talking to the other indunas."
+
+This did not seem a good plan to me. Sugden did not know these people
+and underestimated the power of the old queen. She represented the
+established order of things, and the government always objected to
+anything new, particularly in the way of rulers.
+
+"No, I can't agree to that scheme," I told him; "but I believe I will
+have a look at the other side of this game. Queen Tzaneen is reported
+to be much incensed because Labotsibeni doesn't allow the coronation
+and I think I will have an interview with her."
+
+Having taken this decision, I made arrangements to start for Lebombo,
+the royal kraal of Queen Tzaneen and her son, the next morning as soon
+as it was light enough to trek. That night the donkeys were all driven
+in, so that they would be ready when wanted. During the weeks we had
+spent at Zombode these poor animals had greatly improved. There was
+good feed and water there, and they looked sleek and fresh again.
+
+Dawn saw us on the road to Lebombo. Camp for breakfast was made on the
+bank of the little river that separates the land belonging to the two
+villages, and we came in sight of the kraals after about two hours.
+
+Our reception here was very different. Lochien, who was the vizier, or
+secretary of state, of Queen Tzaneen, and one of the sons of King
+Buno, her late husband, came out to meet us. He had a number of
+indunas with him and was most cordial. His first words gave me great
+pleasure.
+
+"Welcome, Nkoos," he said. "Welcome to Lebombo! Last night the White
+King of Swaziland came to Lebombo and waits for you at the royal kraal."
+
+This was good news, indeed. Oom Tuys had arrived and was waiting for
+me! I thanked my stars that he had not gone to Zombode and thus missed
+me. At last it began to look as though we would get some action.
+
+A few minutes later, our great wagon creaking and the boys shouting to
+the donkeys, we approached the kraals and I saw a solitary figure
+coming out to meet us. It was a tall heavy white man, long bearded and
+wide-hatted, with the rolling gait of one whose only home is the
+saddle--Oom Tuys Grobler, my uncle, the "White King of Swaziland."
+
+He threw his great arms about me and gave me a "bear hug," and then
+held me at arms' length and looked me over.
+
+"So you are all right, Mzaan Bakoor?" he asked in his gruff voice.
+"This morning a kaffir came and said that last night a plan was made
+to stop you from coming here, and I was anxious. I only heard about it
+a few minutes ago, and was on the point of starting for Zombode when
+the runners came and said you were near."
+
+This was news to me. I did not know that Lomwazi had decided to
+prevent me from going to Lebombo. It showed that he was afraid to have
+me learn the truth from Tzaneen and Lochien. I was thankful that we
+had not had trouble, for our patience was well nigh exhausted and
+there would have been a battle if Labotsibeni's men had tried to bar
+our path.
+
+I asked Tuys about the lay of the land at Tzaneen's kraal, and he told
+me that she was very much excited over the situation.
+
+"The queen mother is very angry at Labotsibeni," he said. "It is
+another case of the mother-in-law over again. Tzaneen feels that the
+old lady will hang on to the throne as long as she lives, and as she
+is now in her second hundred years that is likely to be a long time.
+Only last night Tzaneen reminded me of the Swazi saying, 'If you live
+to be a hundred, you live forever,' and she spoke of Labotsibeni with
+bitterness.
+
+"Sebuza will soon return from the mountains and it will be a national
+scandal for him to have to wait for his kingdom. His mother is frantic
+over the situation and even talks of taking the throne by force. Of
+course such things have been done,"--and he smiled--"but I told her
+that the government would not stand for such action."
+
+Lochien then told us that the sanctification ceremonies were about
+ended and Sebuza would return within the next week. As these
+ceremonies also included the coming of age of the young crown prince,
+he was attended by the chief witch-doctors and made to undergo
+scarification and circumcision. He had to live on the barren slopes of
+the mountains, his only food being wild berries and the game he killed
+himself. Only the witch-doctors could visit him, and their visits were
+official and hedged about with much flummery and hocus-pocus.
+
+Tzaneen was waiting to see us when we reached the royal kraal, and I
+immediately sent her the regulation presents. A little while later
+Lochien ushered Tuys and me into her presence. She is a remarkable
+woman and has a very sweet and charming personality. Tall and
+splendidly formed, she is an ideal Swazi queen, just as she was the
+pick of the Zulu princesses at the time she became the royal wife of
+Buno. Her head is large and well shaped, and she has an active brain.
+With education, Tzaneen would have been a leader anywhere in the world.
+
+Her greeting to us was gracious and cordial. She asked if we had
+brought our wagons and camp outfit, and said she would send an impi to
+get them and bring them to Lebombo from Zombode if we had not. This
+gave me a clue to the feeling between the two queens, because I knew
+that Labotsibeni must have been annoyed when she learned that our
+entire outfit had left for the rival camp. After I had assured Tzaneen
+that we had arrived bag and baggage, Lochien introduced the subject of
+our mission to Swaziland. In this he seemed to have the approval of
+Tzaneen, who listened closely to my answers.
+
+I told them that I intended staying in the country until I had seen
+Sebuza crowned, and this statement met their approval. But there was a
+fly in the ointment, I found.
+
+"Queen Tzaneen is the rightful ruler of Swaziland," Lochien announced,
+"because she is the royal widow of King Buno. She is the mother of
+Prince Sebuza, who will soon be king. You want to see Sebuza made king
+and wish to look at the ceremonies with the black boxes on legs that
+you have with you. Is this not so?"
+
+Evidently he had heard about the cameras we had brought with us.
+
+"Yes, that is so," I assured him. "These black boxes make all things
+live again so that everybody may see them, and we want to show all
+people that Swaziland has a son of Buno for king."
+
+"Then, Nkoos, why did you pay Lomwazi and Queen Labotsibeni all the
+money, cows, and gin for the right to use the black boxes?" Lochien
+asked.
+
+The truth was out. They were jealous because Labotsibeni and Lomwazi
+had received the purchase price of the picture rights, while they had
+been ignored. I was thinking quickly and was about to smooth matters
+over, when Oom Tuys broke in.
+
+"Mzaan Bakoor has not yet paid you for your permission to do this
+thing he desires," he assured them. "He could not come to Lebombo
+before, but now he is ready to pay you even more than he gave
+Labotsibeni and Lomwazi."
+
+"The white king speaks truly," I added. "Even now I have in my wagons
+more precious and more beautiful presents than I gave to them. These
+presents I brought from America, across the great water of which you
+have heard. I bought them in the greatest city of the world and have
+carried them here for you, Nkosikaas!"
+
+This was a tall statement, but I knew that I could make good on it.
+Tzaneen was much interested and her curiosity was whetted. We dickered
+a little more, and I agreed to pay them a large amount of gin and a
+certain sum of money. Then, to avoid any further demands, I ended by
+going to the wagon and getting one of the mysterious packing-cases.
+This I opened before Queen Tzaneen. Very slowly I began taking from it
+quantities of the five-and-ten-cent-store jewelry. It fascinated her
+beyond words. She put it on, draping the tawdry necklaces about her
+full throat and loading her fingers with the gaudy rings. She was
+completely won over, and Lochien also was deeply impressed. So peace
+was restored on the subject of the price of the picture rights. Now
+the road was clear for taking the pictures, that is, if we could find
+the place of coronation of the savage king.
+
+Tuys motioned to me to leave soon after the jewelry episode, and we
+went back to our wagons.
+
+"One thing at a time, Owen," he said. "You wanted to ask about the
+coronation, I know, but we'd better wait until to-morrow. I want to
+see how the land lies and find out what is going on before we force
+that issue. To-morrow we'll see Tzaneen again and find out what she
+plans to do about Sebuza."
+
+Lochien soon came to the wagons and told us that it was the queen's
+pleasure that we camp a few hundred yards from Sebuza's kraal, which
+adjoined that of his mother. The spot chosen was in a small grove of
+tall trees among which were buried indunas who had died at Lebombo
+ever since the village was founded. This was a great honor to us,
+since it was sacred ground, the most sacred in the land with the
+exception of "The Caves" near Zombode, where only kings and queens are
+buried.
+
+[Illustration: DR O'NEIL AND COMPANIONS ARE RECEIVED BY QUEEN TZANEEN
+
+They had come to discuss the possibility of ceasing hostilities. As is
+the custom, she treated them to tswala and drank first from the
+calabash to show that it contained no poison]
+
+[Illustration: DR. O'NEIL, QUEEN TZANEEN, DR. SUGDEN, AND MR. CRESPINELL
+
+While Sebuza the crown prince was still in the mountains conforming
+with the religious rites on attaining his manhood Dr. O'Neil realized
+that both the British Government and Queen Labotsibeni were
+antagonistic to Sebuza and wished to repudiate his right to the throne]
+
+[Illustration: WIVES OF THE PRIME MINISTER TO SEBUZA]
+
+[Illustration: QUEEN TZANEEN AND LOCHIEN
+
+She was a Zulu Princess and is the only royal widow of the famous King
+Buno who had, in all, twenty-six wives. She is the mother of Crown
+Prince Sebuza. Lochien is her adviser in addition to being Sebuza's
+_charge d'affaires_ and commander-in-chief of all his impis]
+
+That night I became greatly worried over Dr. Sugden's condition. The
+water he drank in the Valley of Heaven had caused fever and violent
+dysentery, and he had rapidly grown worse during the last forty-eight
+hours. The heat during the day was severe, and it seemed to affect him
+so that he was hardly able to recover at night. I had given him
+medicine and done everything I could for him, but nothing seemed to
+help much. It was very discouraging to have him ill, because his
+unfailing optimism and ready wit had helped us over many a hard place.
+
+Next day Tuys and I called on the queen, and were received as
+cordially as before. As usual, she was surrounded by maids and other
+women of her kraal, and it was interesting to note how affectionate
+they were toward her. She is the best liked woman in Swaziland without
+a doubt, and this is strange, since it is seldom that these savage
+women display any affection for one another.
+
+We asked her how soon Sebuza would be made king. Her face darkened at
+the question and I could see that it touched a sore spot.
+
+"Until my son, Sebuza, returns from the mountains this matter is in
+the hands of Queen Labotsibeni, whom the government recognizes as
+regent," she answered. "But when the prince is a man and is ready for
+the throne, perhaps there will be a change!"
+
+I asked her what she meant, but she refused to be drawn out. Instead,
+she told us about her last attempt to arrange for the coronation.
+
+"Only seven days ago," she said, "I sent men to see the old queen and
+ask her how soon she would be ready to surrender the throne. She
+refused to see them, so they gave their message to Lomwazi. He told
+them that Labotsibeni would let them know when she was ready, and then
+dismissed them."
+
+"When they left the royal kraal at Zombode many of the warriors made
+menacing gestures toward them, and they came back glad to escape with
+their lives. That is Labotsibeni's answer to the mother of the
+rightful king of Swaziland and the royal widow of King Buno!"
+
+She was very indignant. After a little conversation, during which we
+complimented her, as was proper, we withdrew. I noticed that there was
+a gin-bottle in the corner of the royal hut and realized that Tzaneen
+was not different from other kaffir royalty.
+
+Sugden was very low when we returned. He was the finest sort of
+patient, however, for the worse became his physical condition, the
+more determined he was that he would live. He kept murmuring, "Don't
+give up the ship!" but I could see that he would hardly last until
+morning.
+
+I called Crespinell and Rossman into my tent and explained how sick
+the doctor was, telling them that I feared he did not have a chance.
+His cheery way of looking at things had fooled them, and they were
+shocked when I told them that I did not expect we would have him with
+us much longer.
+
+"I've done everything for him that I can," I explained, "but I can't
+get his fever down or stop his dysentery. He is so weak now that it is
+only a question of hours before he leaves Swaziland for good.
+
+"There is something I want you fellows to do, however. I shall remain
+with him all night and will call you if he wants to make a will or say
+anything. We've got to bury him like a white man, and I want you to
+knock a coffin together. Take some of the boards from the
+packing-cases and the big wagon and fix a decent sort of box. Don't do
+any hammering where he might hear you, because he's keyed up and might
+suspect what you were doing."
+
+A few minutes later I saw them sneaking off among the trees, with
+several of the black boys loaded down with boards. We were all blue
+over Sugden's illness and the thought that he was dying cast a gloom
+over the party that nothing could lift.
+
+That was a bad night. Sugden seemed to get weaker and weaker, and soon
+I was keeping him alive with brandy. Tuys and I sat beside him in
+turn, and the old Boer was as distressed as the rest of us.
+
+"He is such a fighting devil," he said in a whisper, when I came to
+relieve him shortly before dawn. "A few moments ago he opened his eyes
+and croaked that he was going back to New York when this expedition
+was over and have 'one hell of a time.' I told him that I'd go with
+him, and he began to tell me what we'd do. Right in the middle of a
+sentence he fainted through weakness. When I brought him to with
+brandy, he opened his eyes and smiled at me!"
+
+Dawn found Sugden still hanging on. I marveled at the vitality of the
+man. His body was wasted to a mere shell, but his courage burned
+bright and undiminished. Shortly after sun-up I realized that he was
+likely to live another day, but that seemed the most we could hope for.
+
+While I was at breakfast an induna came from Lochien with word that
+Sebuza had left the mountains and was on his way to Lebombo. This was
+exciting news, and I went over to the royal kraal to get details.
+Lochien told me that the sanctification ceremonies were over and that
+the crown prince was to arrive that morning.
+
+"We are almost afraid to see him, Nkoos," he said. "He is now ready
+for the coronation and will expect us to have all things waiting for
+him."
+
+I could see that Tzaneen and her trusted vizier were in a nervous
+condition. Sebuza was a reckless, impatient young savage and would be
+much put out at any delay. The royal kraal was in a ferment of
+excitement, and the warriors in Sebuza's kraal were chanting and
+dancing in preparation for the welcome to their commander.
+
+I returned to the wagons, realizing that, being a white man and an
+outsider, I was not wanted at the royal kraal when Sebuza arrived. I
+would see him when he sent for me, but until then I must remain quiet
+and control my impatience.
+
+Shortly before noon I saw the impis of both Tzaneen and Sebuza forming
+in lines outside the kraals. They were dressed in their most gorgeous
+costumes. The indunas and leaders wore the leopardskin cloaks, and all
+had on their great plumed headdresses. I felt that Sebuza must be
+close at hand, and it was not more than fifteen minutes before both
+impis began to dance. This they continued for a short time, and then
+came to a sudden stop. There was utter silence and at length I saw the
+crown prince striding down the road, followed by at least a dozen
+witch-doctors. These halted some distance behind.
+
+Sebuza came to a stop in front of his impi and raised his hands.
+Instantly the thousand warriors raised their shields and war-clubs
+above their heads and the deep-throated shout "Nkoos!" rang out. This
+was followed by the thunder of their feet and then the air was split
+by the shrill whistle. Three times they gave the royal salute, Sebuza
+standing like a statue.
+
+Then, strutting like a turkey-cock, the young prince passed through
+his men into his kraal. The witch-doctors followed, and then the
+indunas went in. Finally his warriors broke ranks and this concluded
+the homecoming of the son of Buno.
+
+The impi of Tzaneen still remained on duty in front of the royal
+kraal, and I waited to see what they would do. In a little while I saw
+Lochien go into the prince's kraal, and shortly after he and Sebuza
+came out together. Sebuza pointed to our wagons, and I could see
+Lochien telling him about us. Then they went to the queen's kraal and
+her warriors gave Sebuza the royal salute, which he received in the
+same manner as before, standing motionless before them.
+
+After Sebuza had entered the kraal the impi dispersed. I returned to
+Sugden's side, to find him wide awake and talking faintly. He seemed
+weaker than before, and I expected he would cease speaking forever any
+moment. Crespinell and Rossman were with him, and he was trying to
+tell them some of the stories of the Far North which he had seen acted
+out when he was a surgeon in the Northwest Mounted Police. His grip on
+life was extraordinary. Here he was living over in spirit the wild
+days in the frozen North, while his body was practically dead and his
+coffin lay behind the wagon!
+
+I was standing thus, quite overcome by the situation, when Sibijaan
+pulled my sleeve.
+
+"Ou Baas, Lochien is here and wants to talk to you," he said. "He has
+a message from the queen."
+
+Outside I found the induna dressed up in his war costume and carrying
+his arms. He greeted me very formally and then told me that Tzaneen
+wished me to attend a conference between Sebuza and herself, asking me
+to bring Oom Tuys along. After delivering his message Lochien unbent
+and we had a few words together concerning Sebuza. He informed me that
+the prince was much annoyed that his throne was not ready and was
+eager to pay an armed visit to Labotsibeni.
+
+Tuys and I were received with royal honors when we reached the queen's
+kraal. There was the usual delay in observing the proper formalities,
+and then we entered the royal hut, to find Sebuza sitting by his
+mother. Tzaneen was as cordial as usual and seemed proud to have the
+future king by her side.
+
+Sebuza, whom Tuys told me later was the perfect picture of Buno in his
+youth, was haughty and seemed suffering acutely from a sense of his
+own importance. He was wearing a peculiar headdress and several
+strings of the five-and-ten-cent store beads I had given his mother.
+
+Since we were in the presence of royalty, it was not fitting that we
+begin conversation, except to receive and give the usual greetings.
+Tzaneen started the ball rolling.
+
+"My noble son," she said, turning to the prince, "these are the white
+men who were the friends of your father, the great King Buno. The big
+one with a beard is Oom Tuys, whom Buno called 'The White King of
+Swaziland' and whom your father made the guide and guardian of our
+people when he died. The other, he of the shaven face, is Mzaan
+Bakoor, who makes wonderful magic with little black boxes on thin
+legs. The white men are our friends and come to Lebombo to assist in
+your coronation."
+
+During this introduction Sebuza regarded us keenly, and his scrutiny
+seemed to satisfy him. When Tzaneen had finished Oom Tuys made a
+little speech.
+
+"Sebuza, son of Buno and of Tzaneen, rightful Queen of Swaziland," he
+said impressively, "your father at his death made me your guardian,
+and I promised him that I would watch over and protect you. I am 'The
+White King of Swaziland' and the government holds me responsible for
+all that takes place here. With my nephew, Mzaan Bakoor, I have come
+to see you placed on the throne of your father. We have pledged
+ourselves to assist you in every way, except to provoke war. We shall
+remain here until you have been made king."
+
+Tuys said much more than this, but what I have translated is about the
+sense of all of it. Sebuza thawed quickly, once he had found out what
+we were in Lebombo for, and then we all had a pleasant talk. He asked
+innumerable questions and was much interested in what had happened at
+Zombode.
+
+His answer to one of my questions was very typical. I had asked him
+how many people were his subjects in Swaziland. He thought for a
+moment, and then answered, "Mzaan Bakoor, can you count the blades of
+grass in a field?"
+
+The interview ended immediately after we informed Sebuza that we had
+presents for him in our wagons. He said that he wanted to see our
+outfit and would go with us, and a few moments later we all left for
+the camp.
+
+Several indunas accompanied us, and the stately head witch-doctor,
+L'Tunga, also went with us. I regarded this as rather impertinent, but
+was very glad of his presence shortly.
+
+Crespinell and Rossman were much interested in Sebuza and were only
+too willing to gratify his curiosity concerning the "little black
+magic boxes on thin legs." They took a number of pictures of him, some
+of which filled him with awe when they were given to him next day. I
+produced a box of the "jewelry" and presented it to him with a great
+flourish. He was fairly overcome by its gorgeousness. Soon he had
+bedecked himself much after the fashion of a Christmas tree and
+strutted about like a peacock. Tuys told me to "go slow with the gin,"
+so I only gave him a few bottles. Strange as it may appear, Sebuza was
+not enthusiastic about the liquor, and later I found that L'Tunga had
+taught him that it was a kind of "white man's poison."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII
+
+L'Tunga's "muti" cures the sick white man--Sebuza chooses his wives--I
+receive a message from His Majesty's High Commissioner for
+Swaziland--A flying trip to Mbabane--The Government refuses sanction
+to Sebuza's coronation--How witch-doctors smoke dagga weed.
+
+
+Sugden was wide awake when we reached the camp and despite his
+condition was overcome with curiosity. He could see nothing, being
+shut in by the tent-walls, and was too weak to get up and look out.
+Suddenly, while we were watching Sebuza enjoy his ornaments, I saw the
+side of the tent being feebly punched from within. I raised the flap,
+and there was Sugden regarding us with his fever-bright eyes. He hated
+to be left out of the party and had signaled for me to count him in. I
+went to him, but my heart sank. He was the sickest man I have ever
+seen. Except for his blazing eyes, he had all the look of a dead man.
+
+Every one looked at us, and a second later L'Tunga leaned over me and
+asked what was the matter with the "sick white man." I held Sugden's
+poor head in my arms as I told him. The witch-doctor nodded and then
+straightened up.
+
+"Nkoos, I will cure him!" he said. "I will make a magic that will make
+him well. I go, but I will come back soon and bring the muti."
+
+He left, and I laid Sugden down and pulled the tent flap. He was
+exhausted by his effort to join the party and was nodding with the
+sleep that was nigh unto death.
+
+Now I was very curious about the "muti" of the witch-doctor. I knew
+that their rites and rituals were all humbug dressed up in feathers,
+but every now and then they did something that was quite amazing. It
+was certain that they knew things about the herbs of their country
+that we white men did not, and I never felt sure that they were the
+fakirs we thought them to be.
+
+In a few minutes L'Tunga returned, and this time he carried a wand
+tipped with feathers. He stood for a moment regarding us, and then
+went to the side of the tent and drew up the flap, showing poor old
+Sugden asleep but barely alive. Then L'Tunga motioned me to help him
+move the cot out into the sunlight.
+
+Carefully, for this savage was as gentle as a woman, we placed Sugden
+with his head facing the sun, and then L'Tunga got busy. We stood back
+to give him room, and he certainly needed it. He started to dance and
+chant, circling the sick bed and waving his wand round and round. I
+could not understand what he chanted, but it seemed to be something
+about it being time for the "devil" to leave the sick white man, since
+he, L'Tunga, had come.
+
+This ceremony must have lasted fully fifteen minutes, and Sugden slept
+through it all. I watched his breathing, for I was afraid that he
+would not live. The show ended with the witch-doctor picking up a
+handful of dust and holding it to Sugden's nostrils. After a moment he
+threw the dust to the winds and then drew from his loin-cloth a small
+package wrapped in skin. This he undid, and then asked for "emantzi,
+emantzi," meaning water. Crespinell brought him a little mug full of
+it, and he poured all but a few tablespoonfuls on the ground. Then he
+took some of the contents of the little package and mixed it with the
+water in the mug.
+
+I had been thinking rapidly. He could not hurt Sugden, since the white
+man was beyond all human aid, and was only living through sheer will
+power. There was a faint chance that he might do him good, and I made
+up my mind to let the witch-doctor alone.
+
+A moment later L'Tunga had forced Sugden to drink the contents of the
+mug. Immediately he dropped off to sleep, as though drugged. After
+watching him a moment L'Tunga turned to me and said:
+
+"At sunrise to-morrow I will come and give him more muti. In three or
+four days he will be well!"
+
+Then, with all the dignity of a great civilized specialist, he
+shouldered his magic wand and withdrew.
+
+Sebuza and the rest of us had watched his operations with great
+interest, and the young prince left shortly after, his indunas
+carrying the "jewelry" and gin.
+
+We were all curious to see the effect of the witch-doctor's
+prescription, and had quite an argument about it. I found that Tuys
+was sure that it would cure Sugden, and both Crespinell and Rossman
+were inclined to agree with him. I remained skeptical and sent for
+Sibijaan to ask him what he thought. I knew that my old playmate was
+in touch with many things that a white man could not know and I asked
+him about the "muti" that L'Tunga had given Sugden.
+
+"Ou Baas, it is a magic leaf," he told me, "and only the head
+witch-doctor knows where it grows. They say it is found in only one
+place, and that is near Sheba's Breasts. He gets it when the moon
+dies, and always goes alone. But it will cure 'Mlung Emantzi Eenui.
+The 'muti' is only for royalty and some of the great indunas. L'Tunga
+would not give it to the common people."
+
+He was so certain that the medicine would save Sugden that I began to
+find myself half-believing that it would. That night I sat by the
+latter's bedside for many hours. He never stirred. All night long he
+slept as though heavily drugged, never once making a move. Next
+morning the fever had much abated and his pulse was nearly normal. He
+did not awake, however, and when L'Tunga arrived to give him another
+dose, he only came to enough to swallow it. I noted, though, that the
+dysentery had stopped.
+
+Four days later Sugden was well. He was weak as a cat, but food soon
+remedied that, and within ten days he was on the job and as cheerful
+as ever. I made up my mind from that time on not to scoff at
+witch-doctors. I tried to get L'Tunga to give me a little of his
+"muti," but this he resolutely refused to do, even when I offered to
+buy it with all sorts of things dear to the savage heart. Some day I
+am going to get some of that "muti" and have it analyzed; it may be a
+drug that will be of value to all of us who live in that section of
+South Africa.
+
+During Sugden's recuperation Tuys and I had visited the royal kraal
+every day and had always had pleasant talks with both Sebuza and his
+mother. But we did not succeed in getting any nearer to the
+coronation. The queen was entirely at a loss what to do and Sebuza
+kept growing more impatient every day. As he was a man now, he felt
+entitled to start housekeeping, and his mother set about procuring
+wives for him. Lochien assisted in this delicate operation, and it was
+rather an interesting event. The Swazis follow about the same
+procedure in this business as their civilized white brethren. The only
+difference is that the Swazi method does not employ so much camouflage.
+
+The fact that Sebuza had reached manhood and would soon become king
+was known throughout practically all the savage tribes of South
+Africa, though it naturally was of paramount interest in his own
+country. All the indunas and his relations, such as Umzulek,
+Debeseembie, Vilakazi, and others, knew that he would have to have
+wives. Their children were logical candidates for this honor, so that
+there were many conferences at Lebombo between Tzaneen and those who
+had daughters to sell.
+
+Now the Swazi, from the highest to the lowest, sells his women. Women
+are the "pound sterling" among all the savage tribes, and the unit of
+value is five cows for an average maid who is young, sound in limb and
+wind, and trained to the primitive duties of her race. These consist
+chiefly in ability to do a decent day's work in the fields, the making
+of tswala, and the cleaning of a hut or kraal. Of course the care of
+children is considered important.
+
+A Swazi's wealth is measured by the number of wives he has. The number
+of his cows and other livestock is secondary. For instance, Umzulek is
+regarded as a millionaire because he has sixty wives and more than two
+hundred and forty children. The average Swazi induna has five or more
+wives, and some have many more.
+
+The price of a woman depends greatly on her birth and beauty. All the
+Swazi women have fine bodies, and many are very handsome, according to
+the native standard. Princesses sell for as much as fifty cows apiece,
+and a wife is always proud if she brings more than the market price.
+In fact, her importance as a wife is usually based on her purchase
+price.
+
+When the time arrived for Sebuza to choose some wives, there were
+quite a number awaiting his inspection. The morning that he looked
+them over they were assembled in the "Sacred Bathing Pool," a sort of
+market-place. Their owners, mostly parents, stood beside the crown
+prince and extolled the virtues of their offspring. The maidens were
+lined up along the banks of the pool and the prince examined them most
+minutely.
+
+It was almost pathetic to see how these dusky belles bore up under his
+inspection. Each looked appealingly at Sebuza, much after the fashion
+of a dog that hopes to be petted, and almost quivered with the hope
+that she would be selected. The thought came to me that the rejected
+ones must face a hard life when they were brought back to their home
+kraals.
+
+Sebuza chose five of the girls, and they were straightway sent to his
+kraal. The rejected ones were immediately clothed and their owners
+took them away. Later in the day Lochien told me that all the girls
+selected by Sebuza were exceptionally high caste and that between
+forty and fifty cows had been paid for each.
+
+My companions were sadly disappointed over Sebuza's wholesale
+marriage. They had expected a wild ceremony and much savage
+celebration, but I explained to them that the Swazis did not go in for
+that sort of thing. There are no marriage ceremonies whatever--the man
+pays for his wife and she belongs to him from that hour until he dies.
+He may accumulate other wives, and this custom is so old that all the
+wives live together in peace, such a thing as jealousy of the white
+kind being unknown. From what I have seen of the toilsome lives of
+these wives, it would seem to me that their contentment is based on
+the old saw which sagely observes that "misery loves company." Another
+advantage of plural wives is that each additional wife lessens the
+labors of the others.
+
+Although there are no marriage rites beyond payment for the wife,
+there are very strict customs in regard to widows. If the deceased
+husband is an induna of importance or a connection of the royal
+family, it is customary for the king to take his pick of the widows.
+If, however, he has no interest in them, the nearest male relation who
+can afford to keep them inherits as many as he wishes. Of course, when
+a husband dies all his wives shave their heads in token of mourning.
+As they have trained their hair to grow in a sort of pyramid, the hair
+is shaved clean up to this structure. Daughters of the dead man have
+their hair shaved right off; if they are already wives, this does not
+apply, since the claim of the husband is greater than that of any
+other relative.
+
+We did not pay our usual visit to Tzaneen the day Sebuza married his
+first installment of wives. Instead, Tuys and I remained in camp
+planning some way to accomplish our mission and my companions made
+good their threat to learn something first-hand about Swazi life.
+
+Next morning trouble of another kind occurred. A government messenger
+arrived with a communication for me. He had located me at Zombode,
+where they told him that I had gone on to Lebombo. This messenger was
+a Swazi induna with six warriors, and he carried himself with a good
+deal of swank. Evidently he was impressed with his importance. I know
+he snubbed Sibijaan, and my boy was breathing fire when he came to
+announce this arrival.
+
+The messenger waited for me in front of the tent, with his warriors
+drawn up behind him. It was quite a military turnout, and he saluted
+me with gravity and impressiveness. Across one shoulder he had a small
+despatch-case on which were the arms of Great Britain in well-polished
+brass. From this he took an official looking envelope and handed it to
+me with a flourish.
+
+It was a communication from His Majesty's High Commissioner for
+Swaziland, and it "begged most respectfully to call to your attention"
+the fact that I had passed through Mbabane without acquainting the
+government officials with the details of my expedition into British
+territory. At once I realized my mistake, and could have kicked myself
+for not calling on the Commissioner and telling him about my project.
+I knew how these British officials work. First they are punctiliously
+polite and request information. If they do not get it speedily, they
+remain polite but make certain definite demands. If still unsatisfied,
+they become annoyed in a polite manner and take "proper measures."
+These latter oftentimes consist of a "flying column," which makes it
+decidedly uncomfortable for the object of their well-bred attentions.
+
+I read the missive from the Commissioner and for a moment intended
+replying to it. Then I realized that any reply would seem impolite and
+possibly evasive, so I decided to make a quick trip to Mbabane and
+make the laggard call on the Honorable Mr. Honey. I gave directions
+that the messenger and his men should be fed, and then had Sibijaan
+inspan the six mules and prepare the wagonette for the trip.
+
+Oom Tuys was missing and I suspected that he had gone to the royal
+kraal. I went over there and found him sitting with Lochien outside
+the royal hut. The queen was asleep inside and several of her maids
+were busily engaged in hairdressing, a most important function among
+high class Swazi women.
+
+I told Tuys what I intended doing and he agreed that it was the right
+and proper thing. One caution he gave me, however.
+
+"Forget I am here, Owen," he admonished. "The British don't like it,
+as you know. If Honey asks about me, you will have to lie. I am not
+here!"
+
+We talked in Dutch, and he told me that he would keep the kettle
+boiling while I was away and try to gain a step or two in my absence.
+He seemed quite happy and enjoying himself with Lochien, so I left him
+after he had reminded me that it would be a good thing to get the
+messenger and his men out of the camp as soon as possible.
+
+We all started together for Mbabane. I had practically nothing in the
+wagonette and the mules were in fine fettle after their long rest.
+Sibijaan drove, and it was not long before we left the messenger and
+his escort far behind. The Valley of Heaven was as beautiful as ever
+and the trip a pleasant one. We arrived at Mbabane on the evening of
+the second day, having made better than twenty miles a day.
+
+I stopped at the little hotel and the mules were turned into the kraal
+of the livery-stable across the way. After washing the travel stains
+away, I reported to the Commissioner's office. Owing to the midday
+rest, or siesta, he usually remained at his desk until about seven
+o'clock, and I caught him shortly before he closed up shop.
+
+The interview was typical of governmental business as conducted by
+such officials. My name was taken in by his clerk and shortly after I
+entered the comfortable office with its large screened Windows. Mr.
+Commissioner Honey sat at his English desk writing with a scratchy
+pen. After a moment he looked up.
+
+"Well, Doctor O'Neil?" he said with a rising inflection.
+
+It was just as though he had reminded me that I was guilty and was
+waiting to hear me plead. There were a dozen other meanings, all
+unpleasant, in that little word "well." I never realized before that
+one monosyllable could mean so much. I knew that he had me right, as
+it were, and I decided to act as innocent as possible.
+
+"Mr. Commissioner, I received your letter," I said, "and I considered
+it would be best and more polite to reply to it in person than to send
+an answer by your messenger."
+
+"Very good, Doctor, very good," he answered. "Now will you be so kind
+as to tell me what you are doing at Zombode?"
+
+I did so. I told him all about the plan to take pictures of the
+coronation of Sebuza and how I was meeting obstacles which appeared
+insuperable. I told him that I had moved my outfit to Lebombo and gave
+him satisfactory reasons for the change. I could see that my candor
+impressed him favorably. There was no reason why it should not. What I
+told him was the truth. Of course I related how L'Tunga had saved Dr.
+Sugden's life, and this impressed him deeply. He let me talk for some
+twenty minutes, and then leaned back in his chair and gave me some
+advice.
+
+"If I were you, Doctor," he said, "I would not waste more time waiting
+for Sebuza's coronation. It is my opinion that this will not take
+place for some time, possibly a year or so. You may not know it, but
+the young gentleman is not in the best graces of His Majesty's
+Government and it may mean a long delay before official permission is
+granted for him to reign.
+
+"Your expedition is costing you a lot of money and it seems a shame
+for you to remain in Swaziland with no chance of fulfilling your
+mission. If you will take my advice, you will return to Ermelo and
+wait until I send you word that the coronation has received the
+official sanction of our government."
+
+This was a blow to my hopes. I had no idea that Sebuza would not be
+recognized by the authorities and it began to look as though my
+expedition were a wild goose chase after all. We talked a little while
+longer, but I was not able to find any specific reason for the
+government's dislike of Sebuza. Apparently there was a general feeling
+that he would try to follow in the footsteps of his father, Buno the
+Terrible, and the government regarded Swaziland as a sleeping dog that
+it would be unwise to awaken.
+
+Our talk ended when Mr. Honey rose to his feet with the remark, "Of
+course you are dining with me tonight?"
+
+I assured him that I would be most pleased, and he told me that eight
+o'clock was the hour. This barely gave me time to get back to my hotel
+and dress, but I made it. I got into my dinner-coat and fresh linen
+while I cursed the habits of the English. They will take
+civilization--particularly of the "dinner" kind--with them no matter
+where they go!
+
+Dinner proved a delightful affair. There were half a dozen people
+there, including several of the minor officials and their wives. It
+was a gay party and the food was excellent, being served in London
+fashion by several silent-footed Indians. The thought came to me that
+British officials certainly "do themselves well." We talked about many
+things, none of them concerning Swaziland or its coronations, and it
+was a pleasure to have my worries banished for a few hours.
+
+After dinner we played "bridge," and then I went back to my hotel
+feeling as if I had stepped out of an English drawing-room into the
+heart of Swaziland. At his door the Commissioner shook hands and gave
+me a parting word.
+
+"Better come back and avoid trouble, Doctor," he said. "There isn't
+likely to be any coronation this year and you always run the change of
+getting into a fight. If you stay, be careful! His Majesty's
+Government is interested in the peace of Swaziland. Goodnight and
+cheerio!"
+
+[Illustration: PRINCESSES AT THE SACRED BATHING POOL
+
+Previous to being offered for the choice of Crown Prince Sebuza of the
+Swazis]
+
+[Illustration: A SCENE AT THE ROYAL BATHING POOL]
+
+I was rather blue that night as I went to sleep. It looked as though
+my voyages, privations, and trouble had all been for nothing.
+
+Next morning Sibijaan and I set off bright and early. He told me that
+a kaffir had chummed with him at the kraal and had enquired whether
+Oom Tuys was with my expedition. Sibijaan had lied, as he knew he
+must, and then I understood why the Commissioner had carefully
+refrained from making me perjure myself. My only hope was that
+Sibijaan had been a convincing liar. Otherwise, the fact that Tuys was
+with me would make the Commissioner watchful of my activities.
+
+On the way back through the Valley of Heaven I came to the conclusion
+that something had to be done, and done quickly, if Sebuza was to be
+made king. What this something was, however, I only had a vague idea.
+I wanted to talk it over with Tuys before taking any action, since his
+help would be necessary.
+
+My uncle was waiting for me when I reached camp and seemed anxious to
+know what the Commissioner had said about him. When I told him that he
+had not mentioned his name, his pride seemed hurt, but he cheered up
+when I related how the kaffir spy had tried to pump Sibijaan.
+
+"I would hate to think that the British have ceased to worry about
+me," he said. "I have had a good deal of fun by teasing them, and I'm
+not ready yet to settle down and become a farmer all the time!"
+
+There was not much harm in Tuys, but he was Boer enough to enjoy
+worrying the British and the fact that he was not wanted in Swaziland
+made his sojourns there all the more enjoyable.
+
+Next day we visited Tzaneen, and I found that she was much interested
+in my sudden trip to Mbabane. Her indunas had told her that I had
+received a summons to visit the Commissioner and she was curious to
+know all about it. I told her why Mr. Honey wanted to know about me
+and then repeated his advice.
+
+"Yes, Mzaan Bakoor, I know all about the government opposition to my
+son becoming king," she said. "He has so many followers that they are
+afraid of him. The British fear Sebuza because they would sooner have
+a weak old woman like Labotsibeni in Swaziland than a strong man and a
+son of Buno."
+
+"How many followers has Sebuza, Nkosikaas?" I asked, for this was part
+of what I was thinking.
+
+"Mzaan Bakoor, you of great magic, can you count the blades of grass
+in the field?" she replied.
+
+Then she assured me that all Swaziland was behind the young prince.
+She further told me that this was the chief reason why Sebuza was
+disliked by the government and added that he had been impudent to some
+British officials. I had heard rumors of this, but had placed small
+weight in them. Now, it seemed, Sebuza must have over overstepped the
+mark and no reconciliation was possible for some time. This, added to
+what I had heard in Mbabane, made me despair of accomplishing the
+object for which I had come to Lebombo. There was more talk along the
+same line and we treated the queen to a bottle of gin. This led to a
+peculiar incident.
+
+That night Sebuza came to our camp and asked to see me. I thought he
+might have something of importance to communicate, but all he asked
+was that I stop giving gin to his mother! This, of course, was
+impossible. She was in authority until he became king and her request
+for liquor was a command we dared not disobey.
+
+Sugden had spent the afternoon with L'Tunga and had watched the
+witch-doctors smoke dagga weed. I had forgotten to tell him about this
+and he was much excited over the discovery. With his faculty for
+observation, he had made a serious study of how the Swazi uses the
+weed and was much interested in its effects.
+
+"L'Tunga took me to his witch-doctors' school," he told me, "and I
+watched them smoke dagga. It is a small leaf that must be something
+like tea before it is dried. Believe me, it has a 'kick.' There were
+about twenty of these witch-doctors sitting in a circle in their
+kraal, all hitting the pipe. They have a crazy way of smoking it, too.
+You've seen the pipe, haven't you? It's a great long thing, very badly
+made, and it takes a strong man to make it draw.
+
+"The way they smoke is this. The first man takes a calabash of water
+and then drops a coal into the pipe, thus lighting it. He next sucks
+on the pipe until he gets his mouth full of smoke. Then he attempts to
+fill his mouth with water, all the while trying to prevent any of the
+smoke from escaping. When he can no longer hold the smoke and water in
+his mouth, he blows them out together. It is a sort of smoky
+shower-bath!
+
+"Most of them could only do it once. Almost before they could pass the
+pipe on to the next doctor, they would keel over and go sound asleep.
+For some reason or other the smoke did not affect them all in the same
+way. Some of them became happy and began to chant, but they, too, soon
+grew drowsy. For plain unadulterated 'kick,' the dagga weed has it
+over anything I've ever seen, though it resembles hemp in its action."
+
+It seems that L'Tunga did not join this smoke-party, but took Sugden
+to where he could see the common Swazis indulge in the same pastime.
+Not being allowed the great pipe of the witch-doctors, they had a
+method of their own.
+
+First they dig a little hole in the ground. Next a narrow trench is
+scraped out of the earth leading from this hole to another of about
+the same size. At the bottom of this trench is placed a freshly cut
+stick, and this is buried in the hard soil by covering it with wet
+clay. When the clay is firmly packed the stick is drawn out, leaving a
+little tunnel. Then clay is used to build a small mound over the
+second hole, through which an opening is made which connects it with
+the little tunnel. This is the mouthpiece of the pipe, the tunnel is
+the stem, and the first hole is the bowl.
+
+"The Swazis filled the hole with dagga weed and lighted it with a hot
+cinder from the fire in front of the kraal," Sugden concluded. "Then,
+one by one, they sucked the smoke through the mouthpiece. They used
+the water method, also. It was an amazing sight! One after another
+they would fall over, the next man at the pipe usually having to drag
+the body of the last one out of the way."
+
+I had seen these dagga orgies before and knew what they were like.
+Sugden, however, thought it a most unusual spectacle and would have
+taken a whiff of the dagga himself if he had been urged. His interest
+was purely scientific, of course, and he succeeded in obtaining a few
+leaves of the plant which he proposed to have analyzed when we reached
+civilization again.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII
+
+Witch-doctors of Swaziland--How they brought a famine--L'Tunga's
+school of witch-doctoring--The "Poison Test" to settle ownership--The
+professional witch-doctor's equipment--L'Tunga decides a murder
+case--Some genuine cures.
+
+
+Dagga weed was Sugden's most interesting discovery up to that time and
+it whetted his appetite. I pointed out to him that the witch-doctors'
+craft would be a good thing to investigate and he went after this like
+a bloodhound on a hot scent. We all became interested, and I soon
+found myself whiling away the tedium of waiting for the coronation by
+running down evidence of the art of "witch-doctoring."
+
+What we discovered made me realize the wisdom of the government, which
+had recently passed strict laws against the witch-doctors. For a time
+L'Tunga regarded our curiosity as a great impertinence and did
+everything possible to prevent our getting more information than was
+readily available. Finally, one night, he grew confidential and told
+us why the government had set its foot down on his brothers of the
+craft. He did this chiefly because Dr. Sugden and I had shown him that
+we were "white witch-doctors" and thus had established a sort of
+fraternity among fellow practitioners.
+
+"The bad witch-doctors caused all the trouble," he said, "and it was
+their own fault that the government made laws against them.  None of
+the doctors in my 'lodge' were guilty of these offenses, but we have
+to suffer with the rest. Like you white doctors, I cure the sick and
+drive out evil spirits."
+
+I had not claimed to drive out spirits, but I am not sure that Sugden
+had not made such a statement. He always did things in a thorough
+manner and L'Tunga might have misunderstood him when he told him what
+healers we were.
+
+"The trouble began a little while ago," the witch-doctor went on,
+"when a number of strange doctors came among us. They were from the
+gold country to the west and they had many queer tales to tell. They
+told our people that they were fools to work for the white men and
+that they ought to rise up and drive them out of the country.
+
+"I do not know where they received their learning, but they said that
+our people were as good as the white men and told them that they were
+fools to let white men govern them. Our people listened and became
+much excited. They talked of making war and there was much unrest. The
+warriors began to gather, and the Boers and other white men sent
+messengers and spies to find out what was going on.
+
+"However, these strange witch-doctors talked too much and made too
+many promises. Soon they began to tell our people that they need not
+grow any more corn nor breed any more cattle. They promised that there
+would be a great rain of corn and that millions of cows would come
+into the country for any one who wanted them. The people were
+convinced and sat about in idleness, waiting for the free food. The
+end of this was that there was much hunger in our land and many of the
+people starved to death.
+
+"I went about when these strange witch-doctors told these lies and
+warned our people that starvation would come. But they scoffed at me
+and would not even bow to my most sacred charms. They said I belonged
+to the old order and that the new witch-doctors were the only ones
+worth following. For some time--too long a time--I had no honor and it
+was not until starvation came that the people again listened to me.
+
+"Then the government learned of all these things and sent food to the
+people, so that not so many died. Some of the strange witch-doctors
+were caught and killed, but most of them escaped.
+
+"Making starvation was not the only crime they did. So foolish were
+the people that they believed in them and for a time would do anything
+they said. Some of the doctors told them to commit murders and sold
+them charms that were to prevent them from getting caught. A number of
+killings took place and many women were stolen. When the murderers
+were caught and brought to court, they told how the doctors had
+advised them to kill and even named the number of cows they had paid
+for the charms that were supposed to protect them. When the government
+heard of this they became very angry and passed laws against
+witch-doctors."
+
+L'Tunga was full of this invasion of Swaziland by these strange
+witch-doctors and told us stories about it for several hours. One was
+as amusing as it was illuminating. It seemed that two young indunas
+had a difference of opinion over a woman. They both tried to buy her
+and bid against each other, so that the successful one had to pay
+three or four times her market value. This hurt the purchaser's
+feelings, while the loser was angry because he had been outbid. The
+result was that the latter went to one of the witch-doctors and bought
+a charm to protect him while he unostentatiously murdered his rival.
+At about the same time the other induna bought a charm from another of
+these witch-doctors and started out to slay his enemy. Before they
+could meet the two witch-doctors compared notes and decided it would
+be a bad thing for them if there was a killing. The doctor whose charm
+proved valueless would lose prestige in the villages he was
+plundering. So they agreed to prevent bloodshed, and did so by proving
+that the woman in question was bewitched and thus only fit to serve
+them! One of them took her, and the indunas decided to forget their
+differences. However, when the crash came, after the starvation
+episode, they hunted up these witch-doctors and promptly killed them.
+
+"I have never heard what became of the woman," concluded L'Tunga, "but
+I fear she is no longer in danger of being bewitched."
+
+Before leaving us that night L'Tunga agreed to tell us everything
+about his profession--with reservations, I suspected. He invited us to
+visit his school where he trained the young witch-doctors, and we
+decided to do so next day. His invitation, he explained, included only
+Sugden and myself, as he knew that none of the rest of my party were
+"white witch-doctors." He was extending to us a sort of "professional
+courtesy," as it were.
+
+We learned more about witch-doctoring at the school in a short hour
+than we had during all the weeks we had been in its proximity. The
+school was in a small kraal set apart from the others, and we found
+about a score of would-be "doctors" in attendance. We must have
+arrived at a slack moment, for they were all smoking dagga weed and
+enjoying it to the full. L'Tunga, nevertheless, showed us all over the
+place and painstakingly explained everything of interest. One small
+hut, however, was forbidden to us. He explained that it was the
+sanctuary where the charms were kept, and that if white men entered
+it, none of the charms would ever be of any use. "We'd put a curse on
+'em!" Sugden tersely put it.
+
+It was at the end of this tour of inspection that we received a
+practical demonstration of how a regular witch-doctor works. We were
+beginning to examine L'Tunga's professional equipment when one of the
+neophytes approached and with the utmost respect informed him that he
+was wanted. Of course we went along, and found quite a gathering at
+the gate of the kraal. In the center were two large and indignant
+warriors. They were all chattering away at a great rate, but all talk
+ceased immediately when L'Tunga stepped out of the gate. He was
+absolute master of the situation, and the deference with which these
+common people treated him showed that they knew it.
+
+"Why do you disturb L'Tunga and his white friends?" he demanded. "Do
+you not know that these are white witch-doctors of great magic and are
+too great to even look on such lowly people as you?"
+
+Properly rebuked, the crowd dropped its eyes, and then L'Tunga quickly
+found out what was wanted. It seemed that the two warriors each
+claimed to own a certain cow. Instead of fighting over its possession,
+they had decided to ask L'Tunga to find the rightful owner by means of
+the "Poison Test." I had often heard rumors of this test, but had
+never seen it performed. L'Tunga talked with them a little while and
+arranged that the loser was to pay him one cow for his services in
+determining the ownership of the animal. After this was decided, each
+of the warriors sent one of his people to get a cow. While these cows
+were being brought L'Tunga prepared himself for the test.
+
+We went to his hut and he allowed us to squat nearby and watch him
+dress. Two of the would-be witch-doctors acted as valets for him, and
+when he had finished he was certainly a striking and awesome figure.
+First, he was plentifully smeared on the forehead, face, and body with
+a sort of red-and-white clay pigment. With his black skin, this gave
+him a weird appearance. When sufficiently painted, he put on a
+magnificent headdress consisting chiefly of porcupine quills some
+fourteen inches long. This headdress is known as the "ekufue" and is
+only worn by witch-doctors who are masters of the craft. The white
+pigment is known as "ocikela," while the red is called "onongo." Both
+have other uses which we were soon to learn.
+
+To complete his costume L'Tunga wound a wide strip of antelope skin
+about his middle. This contains a large pouch and is known as the
+"uya." In it are carried a number of medicines and some charms. When
+fully dressed for his work our friend looked every inch a leader of
+his profession.
+
+On our return to the kraal gate we found the two cows waiting. L'Tunga
+looked them over and said they would do, although he was far from
+enthusiastic. Sugden and I thought they were fine beasts, but it would
+not have done for the witch-doctor to have admitted this.
+
+Then came the test. The warriors were told to stand together in front
+of L'Tunga, who knelt on several small but fine skins which his
+assistants had placed on the ground. When all were in place an
+assistant handed L'Tunga a small hollow gourd, or "okapo," partly
+filled with water. In this he mixed several drugs the nature of which
+we learned later. First came a form of "ombambu," which is said to be
+so deadly that birds die when they light on the limbs of the tree from
+which it is obtained. Then came another drug of the same nature, said
+to be obtained from the roots of the tree. Lastly L'Tunga dumped
+"onsunga"--a mixture of powdered herbs the ingredients of which we
+were never able to ascertain--into the gourd. Then he stirred the mess
+with the foot of an antelope. While he stirred it he chanted in a low
+voice.
+
+During all this performance the crowd remained absolutely silent, as
+were we. The only noise was the lowing of one of the cows who seemed
+to disapprove of the proceedings.
+
+When the "hellish brew," as Sugden called it afterward, was thoroughly
+mixed, L'Tunga handed it to one of the warriors and told him to drink
+it. Without hesitation the man did so, and it seemed to me he took a
+good half of the mixture. L'Tunga then retrieved the gourd and passed
+it to the other warrior, who drank the remainder.
+
+Next came the climax of the test. Both warriors appeared to grow
+violently ill. L'Tunga chanted in a louder tone, while the crowd
+pressed close. Sugden and I did not know what was going to happen and
+watched anxiously. The warriors swayed back and forth and there was an
+air of tense expectation that became constantly more acute. Suddenly
+Sugden caught my arm.
+
+"Look, look! He's going to vomit!" he said, pointing at one of the
+warriors. He was right. A second later the man retched and vomited. As
+he did so, the crowd cried out so loudly that I caught the words, "He
+is the loser! It is not his cow!"
+
+L'Tunga immediately stepped to the man and smeared him with red
+pigment, placing it mainly on his forehead and arms. Next he turned
+quickly to the other and smeared him in similar manner with the white
+pigment. Then with all haste L'Tunga mixed "asangu" and gave some to
+each man. This, we learned later, was a powerful emetic and it
+certainly acted without delay.
+
+When the warriors had calmed down they were rather weak and weary.
+L'Tunga directed an assistant to take the cow of the man who became
+sick, and we thus understood that he had lost in the "Poison Test."
+While L'Tunga was divesting himself of his ceremonial trappings he
+explained to us that there was no doubt that this man was wrong about
+the ownership of the cow over which the dispute began--if he had owned
+the animal, he would not have vomited!
+
+"This is no country for a man with a weak stomach," Sugden remarked to
+me. "It looks as if a strong constitution counts even more here than
+in the U. S. A."
+
+L'Tunga also explained that both warriors would have died forthwith,
+had he not given them the emetic. The mixture he had compounded caused
+sure death after a short time. He told us that he considered the cow
+he had received in payment not much of an animal and adopted the pose
+that his talents had been poorly remunerated.
+
+By sympathizing with him in these complaints we made L'Tunga feel that
+there was a further professional bond between us, and he became even
+more willing to assist us in our study of witch-doctoring. When he had
+removed his paint and other marks of his profession, he offered to
+show us the stock-in-trade of a real witch-doctor.
+
+"We must use many wonderful and powerful charms in our work among the
+poor and ignorant people," he said. "Many of them have come down to us
+from the old witch-doctors who knew much more than I do, and I know
+more than any other in the whole of South Africa. My father was a
+witch-doctor, and his father was one, too. He was the head
+witch-doctor for King Ama-Swazi, and his word was law with the king as
+well as the people. In his day there was much honor for a real
+witch-doctor and he had many wives. He was very, very rich. He was
+also very powerful, so that the king was glad to have him with him
+when he made war and governed his people."
+
+I had already heard tales of his respected ancestor, but I regret to
+say that few of these reflected credit on him. It seems that Ama-Swazi
+allowed him the right to inflict the death penalty, and it was his
+habit to remove any induna whose wives he coveted or who might possess
+anything else he could use. In addition to these civic activities,
+this old devil added a number of new charms to the outfit carried by a
+professional witch-doctor and L'Tunga was proud of the fact that he
+had some of the original ones his ancestor had invented.
+
+One of the most interesting things that L'Tunga showed us was his
+charm-case, or "uhamba," which all properly accredited witch-doctors
+carry. This corresponds to the familiar little black bag carried by
+white physicians when making their calls. The "uhamba" he used was a
+tightly woven basket, roughly one foot broad, two feet long, and
+perhaps ten inches high. In this was a queer collection of charms. The
+chief thing, however, was the "ongombo", or small gourd used in
+divination. This was very sacred and L'Tunga would not allow us to
+touch it. In it were the most potent charms, and he exhibited these to
+us one by one.
+
+There were a few rough images of wood, very crudely made but yet
+unmistakably representing human beings. They were both male and
+female, and were used to symbolize persons who were doing business
+with the witch-doctor. Then there was a lion's tooth, a horn of a
+goat, some chicken-bones, a pig's foot, and the hoof of an ox. More
+interesting than these were a chicken's head dried with the mouth
+open, which was used to symbolize a gossip, and the dried nose of a
+hyena, which L'Tunga used when he "smelled out" crime. There were a
+number of other odds and ends, but they had no special significance.
+All these charms played a part in various rituals, and L'Tunga told us
+that none of the would-be witch-doctors in his school were allowed to
+practice until they were able to use each and every one correctly.
+
+[Illustration: INTERIOR OF THE ROYAL KRAAL
+
+This shows the details of its construction, and also warriors and
+children]
+
+[Illustration: CHIEF WITCH-DOCTOR OF SWAZILAND
+
+He is holding the latest addition to his family. He is a very
+influential man and is the personal doctor to the queen and the
+prince. He has thirteen wives and sixty children]
+
+[Illustration: A SCHOOL OF WITCH-DOCTORS]
+
+[Illustration: A SWAZI SEMINARY OR SCHOOL FOR YOUNG WITCH-DOCTORS
+
+These are being taught the secrets of their profession, one of them
+being in the act of smoking a Swazi pipe]
+
+Next he showed us a number of other charms of a different character.
+One of these was the "ombinga," which was the horn of an ox, full of
+medicines, herbs, and drugs. This was a very valuable and potent
+charm, and only kings and great indunas were allowed to possess it. It
+was supposed to prevent lightning or disease from striking the owner,
+and its wonderful power also extended to his family and possessions.
+In addition, it was supposed to prevent wild animals from attacking
+those under its protection.
+
+"That is some charm, believe me," Sugden said, when L'Tunga had
+reverently explained it. "It is a combined lightning-rod and accident
+policy, and must cost a lot."
+
+L'Tunga assured us that the "ombinga" cost many cows, and this was the
+reason why only kings and chiefs could afford to own it. Following
+this, he showed us a rain wand, but refrained from demonstrating its
+power. This he called an "ocifungo." It was made of the tail of an ox,
+with two small deer horns inserted in the end. There were some magic
+oils in the tail, also, and he explained that he could drive rain away
+by blowing the little horns and waving the tail at the rain. Sugden
+asked him in all solemnness if the wand worked, and L'Tunga assured
+him that it was infallible, provided the right payment had been made.
+The payment, it seems, consisted of a number of cows, and young women
+would not be refused. Sugden remarked that we ought to get one of
+these rain-dispellers and have it around all the time so that we would
+not have any further trouble with wet weather.
+
+Last of all, L'Tunga unwrapped a bundle of skins and produced a number
+of neck-charms, known in the singular as an "umbanda." These were for
+the use of any one willing to buy them, and were most potent as a
+protection against injury in battle. The "umbanda" consists of two
+bottle-shaped objects about four inches long and is made of woven
+grass-string. From the end of each there protrudes a tuft of feathers
+about two or three inches long, and each one contains magic medicines.
+The Swazi warriors wear the "umbanda" around the neck and believe that
+they stand a poor chance in battle unless they do so. However, I had
+seen natives wearing them at times when there was no war, and this
+prompted me to ask L'Tunga about it.
+
+"There is always a reason, Mzaan Bakoor," he said. "When a warrior
+puts on his 'umbanda,' he fears that he may meet the assegai of an
+enemy. Then again, he may be going to destroy an enemy and wishes to
+be protected."
+
+Further development of his explanation showed that when a Swazi
+appeared wearing his "umbanda," it was generally understood that he
+was off to a killing. They always go armed, so that weapons mean
+nothing, but when they put on this charm there is bloody work afoot.
+
+After inspecting L'Tunga's equipment we strolled over to the school,
+where a class was in session. The details of this we missed, however,
+as the instruction halted as soon as we came in sight. L'Tunga talked
+for a moment with the "professor" and then told us that the fact that
+we were white men would prevent us from seeing the novices receive
+their instruction.
+
+"But it would not be worth your time to see these young men at work,"
+he added to console us. "They are only learning certain rituals. First
+the instructor explains the charm to be used, and then he shows them
+how it is done. They try to do as he does, and when they have learned
+he explains another charm."
+
+Sugden and I were sorry not to see this class at work. It would have
+been entertaining to watch them, and I wondered how they would have
+compared with my classes in the Harvard Medical School. Of one thing I
+felt certain--these savages were just as much in earnest as any of us
+back there in Cambridge.
+
+It appears to take a long time to make a bona-fide witch-doctor. The
+course given in L'Tunga's school is most thorough--at least, that is
+what he said--and no candidate receives his "uhamba" until he knows
+all the tricks of the trade. It astonished us to find this intelligent
+savage taking his profession so seriously; it all seemed such
+frightful nonsense to us. Still, the thought came to me that L'Tunga
+might think the same about some of our most sacred medical practices.
+When we left him he promised that he would send for us the next time
+he was to work.
+
+Three days later he did so. One of his students came to tell us that
+his chief was about to make a divination and that we could witness it
+if we wished. Naturally, we accepted. We had been eager to see a
+divination, which we understood to be a ceremony where the
+witch-doctor really went through his paces.
+
+L'Tunga was waiting for us in his hut. He was cordial, but very solemn.
+
+"This is a serious case," he said. "I am about to ask the spirits to
+decide the life or death of an induna. He is accused of murdering
+another induna, and there is no way of proving his guilt or innocence
+except through the spirits who work for me. To-day you shall see the
+most important work I do!"
+
+We were properly impressed. Sugden, in fact, was so interested that he
+forgot to make his usual caustic comment. It struck me as the most
+barbaric thing we had yet encountered that this witch-doctor with his
+foolish bag of tricks should be called upon to decide the fate of a
+fellow-being.
+
+L'Tunga dressed himself as before, the only difference being that he
+put on his paint and ornaments with more care. When he was dressed he
+called out, and several of the young witch-doctors entered. These he
+loaded with various queer things the nature of which developed at the
+ceremony. When we were all ready, our party solemnly marched out to
+the entrance of the kraal.
+
+There we found a large crowd of people, the great majority being
+warriors and indunas. Standing apart from the rest, facing the gate,
+was the induna whose fate was to be decided. He was a tall, heavy-set
+man of middle age, and his face was that of a killer. He looked as if
+he might be accused of a dozen murders, instead of only one.
+
+"If looks count for anything, that gentleman ought to be shot on
+sight!" was Sugden's remark.
+
+L'Tunga halted just outside the entrance of the kraal, and an old
+witch-doctor stepped out of the crowd and addressed him.
+
+"O L'Tunga, greatest of witch-doctors," he began, "you are called upon
+to decide the guilt or innocence of Makeza, this induna, the owner of
+many cows and women. Three days ago an induna was found dead with many
+wounds. Makeza was his enemy, and the people of their village say that
+Makeza killed him in the night. Oktela was his name, and now Makeza
+has taken his wives and there is much outcry in the village. Makeza
+says that he knows nothing about Oktela's death, but you, L'Tunga the
+Great, can decide!"
+
+While he stated the case against Makeza the induna Stood gazing
+defiantly at L'Tunga, and I had a feeling that he was not helping his
+case.
+
+"My spirits will decide whether Makeza is guilty or not!" L'Tunga
+announced in a loud voice.
+
+The witch-doctor waited while the little skins were placed and then
+knelt down facing Makeza, who also knelt at a sign from L'Tunga. Next
+the assistants placed two roughly carved wooden figures, about a foot
+high, in front of the witch-doctor. These are known as "ovitakas" and
+are supposed to represent the spirits that are to be invoked for the
+divination. It was plain to see that the figures were male and female.
+L'Tunga then put on a necklace which was handed him by an assistant.
+This seemed to be made of teeth of various wild animals, those of the
+lion being most noticeable. He next picked up a gourd and handed it to
+Makeza, who immediately commenced to shake it. It was full of seeds of
+some kind and made a loud rattle. L'Tunga produced a similar gourd and
+also started to shake it.
+
+This rattling was really the beginning of the ceremony. After a short
+time L'Tunga commenced blowing on a whistle, which gave a loud shrill
+sound. It was a horn of a small deer set in the end of an ox-tail
+which was wrapped with broad bands of red, black, and white beads. The
+whistle was to call the spirits and we noted that the people seemed to
+get much excited when they heard it. After a few moments L'Tunga began
+to vary the whistling with a sort of chant in a minor key. The sound
+of his voice struck terror into the audience, and I could see that
+they were terribly afraid. Makeza showed his fear by rattling his
+gourd with what almost amounted to frenzy.
+
+The whistling, rattling, and chanting went on and on, all the time
+rising in a crescendo. The excitement of the crowd became more and
+more intense, until it seemed to me that something must happen soon.
+L'Tunga appeared to be quite mad, and Makeza shook his gourd as though
+his life depended on the noise he made.
+
+At the exact moment when the situation became unbearable, and when I
+felt as though I would go mad also, L'Tunga stopped his noise. A
+second later there was silence, broken only by the deep breaths of the
+audience. The sudden silence came with such a shock that it quite
+unnerved one.
+
+Presently L'Tunga raised his empty hands above his head and slowly
+brought them down over his "uhamba," which lay on the ground in front
+of him. He held his position for a moment, Makeza's eyes riveted on
+him. Then L'Tunga slowly waved his hands back and forth, and I could
+see Makeza following their every movement.
+
+This must have lasted for a few moments only, but it seemed an age.
+Suddenly the hands stopped, remained still for the space of a breath,
+and then swooped down on the "uhamba." With one motion L'Tunga picked
+up the charm-case and shook it above his head. Three shakes, and he
+held it motionless!
+
+Slowly, very slowly, he brought it down and laid it on the ground.
+Makeza watched, his eyes bright and big with dread. L'Tunga looked at
+him fixedly for a brief space, and then slowly lifted the top of the
+"uhamba" and glanced into it.
+
+"Guilty! Guilty!" he shouted in a ringing voice. "The red horn stands!
+The spirits have decided! Makeza is guilty!"
+
+The induna seemed stunned for a second, and for about the same space
+the crowd remained quiet. Then everything broke loose at once. Excited
+cries rose from the warriors; Makeza sprang to his feet; L'Tunga
+jumped up and back to where we stood. The condemned man looked wildly
+about and then, snatching up his knob-kerrie, assegais, and shield,
+made a wild dash to escape.
+
+It was all over much more quickly than it can be told. The thud of
+knob-kerrie on shield, the flash of steel, and Makeza lay there in the
+bright sun, a bleeding, mangled thing!
+
+L'Tunga was the least excited of all of us; he seemed to take the
+killing as a matter of course.
+
+"Makeza had killed," he said later, when we returned to his hut, "and
+his life was forfeit. He knew that he would have to die, so he
+attempted to escape. I understand that he would have been joined by a
+number of warriors if he had been able to get into the hills."
+
+Sugden and I were curious to know about the "red horn," and L'Tunga
+removed the top of his "uhamba" and showed it to us. The horn was a
+short piece of one from an antelope, with the top painted red. In the
+basket, also, was a small figure of about the same size as the horn,
+on the head of which was a cowry shell.
+
+"If the spirits had decided that Makeza was innocent," L'Tunga
+explained, "the figure would have been standing when I took the top
+off the 'uhamba.' But they knew that he was guilty, so the red horn
+stood at their command."
+
+This seemed a poor way to determine a case of life or death, but
+Makeza was the only one who had any objections. It was the custom, and
+thus was quite all right in the eyes of Swaziland. On theory, Makeza
+had an even chance, which is a good deal more than he would have had
+before any civilized jury. His appearance alone would have convicted
+him. I had about convinced myself that the induna had received a fair
+deal, when Sugden insisted that the bottom of the little image of
+innocence was round, so that it could not stand.
+
+"Makeza never had a chance!" he exclaimed. "The cards were stacked
+against him. The poor devil!" Immediately Sugden became sorry for the
+induna, although he agreed with me that he could not have been
+anything but a murderer.
+
+Before we returned to camp L'Tunga explained some of the work an
+accredited witch-doctor is supposed to be able to perform. He said he
+could do all the things he talked about. According to him, a real
+witch-doctor can recover stolen goods; he can read the past and
+future; he can cast out spells and provide charms against them, and
+can "smell out" the witches that cause other than violent deaths. The
+genuine witch-doctor can cause the corn to grow; he can make or stop
+rain and can cause the cows to give milk when they have been bewitched
+and their milk dries up too soon. This last is accomplished by boiling
+some of the affected cow's milk and whipping the animal severely with
+a sjambok while the milk boils.
+
+Among the hocus-pocus and humbuggery of the witch-doctor's trade we
+found several genuine "cures" which they used to alleviate suffering
+among their people. I do not know the nature of these "cures," but
+they are all drugs. As an emetic, and a most efficient one, L'Tunga
+gives his patient "asangu"; for rheumatism he prescribes "amatoli" and
+sometimes "ovihata," and the distress of a mother in labor is greatly
+lessened by giving her "oluvanga" to chew. This is a leaf, while the
+rheumatism "cures" are both powders, as is the emetic.
+
+One stock remedy of which L'Tunga was very proud greatly amused us
+both, but we concealed our amusement lest he think we were making fun
+of him. This was "ekulo," a love medicine which he said was most potent.
+
+"When a wife wishes to be preferred above all other wives of an
+induna," he explained, in telling of its use, "she comes to me and I
+give her 'ekulo.' This she mixes with the food of her husband, and
+from that time on he cannot resist her and she becomes his favorite
+wife and is mistress of all the others."
+
+L'Tunga explained other uses of "ekulo," but these are "too intimate,"
+as Sugden said, to be set forth here.
+
+After our investigation of witch-doctoring as it is practiced in
+Swaziland, Sugden and I came to the conclusion that the British knew
+what they were doing when they placed a ban on it. Even L'Tunga,
+kindly soul that he was, ought to be suppressed.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX
+
+Wearisome delay in coronation--War suggestions from Umzulek--My plan
+to bluff Labotsibeni--The bluff is called--A ticklish situation--
+Labotsibeni refuses to surrender the throne--Our demonstration
+fails--Night murders provoke war.
+
+
+During the next two months Tuys and I had almost daily interviews with
+Tzaneen and Sebuza, but we got no nearer the coronation. The situation
+was becoming a scandal in Swaziland and was hurting the prestige of
+the royal family at Lebombo. Indunas kept coming in from the outlying
+districts and asking how soon the coronation would take place. With
+them came their warriors, and there was much murmuring because of the
+delay.
+
+We, too, were growing more and more impatient, and to add to our
+distress Rossman, my camera-man, became ill. I could do little for
+him, and he was thoroughly disgusted with the lack of action. Finally,
+on his urgent request, I sent him out through Portuguese territory to
+Delagoa Bay, where he caught a steamer for his home in America. Oom
+Tuys took him to the coast and was gone nearly two weeks. He returned
+to find us just where we had been when he left, except that the
+population of Lebombo was increased by several hundred more expectant
+warriors. These had all come for the coronation and were unable to
+understand why Tzaneen did not go ahead with it.
+
+Tuys brought word from some one he had talked to at Delagoa Bay that
+there was a general understanding among the Portuguese that Sebuza
+intended taking the throne by force. In fact, traders were warned not
+to go into Swaziland for fear that they might get mixed up in the
+impending civil war. Rumors of war always lead to "gun-running" in
+South Africa, just as they did in Cuba in the old days, and I asked
+Tuys if he had heard whether anything of this nature was taking place.
+
+"The authorities there are not taking any chances," he said. "They are
+not anxious to become embroiled with the British and have posted extra
+guards at many places along the border. If anyone tries to get guns to
+the Swazis, he will have to be very clever or he'll be caught."
+
+It is absolutely forbidden to sell guns to the kaffirs anywhere in the
+Transvaal, but there are always venturesome traders who find it
+impossible to overlook the chance of making a big profit, for a gun is
+worth more than its weight in silver to any native able to pay for it.
+I remembered my experience with King Buno years before, when Oom Tuys
+allowed me to present him with a Mauser rifle.
+
+The monotony of the delay in the coronation was hard to bear. As
+already stated, we visited Tzaneen and Sebuza nearly every day, but it
+was weeks before anything happened.
+
+It was about four months after we came to Lebombo that Tzaneen sent
+for us one day. We found her surrounded by a number of strange indunas
+who seemed to be friendly with Vilakazi, one of the sons of Buno and
+therefore an uncle of Sebuza. It seemed that we had been summoned to
+attend an important conference. I was glad of this, for it might mean
+that some action was about to be taken. We entered the royal hut with
+the usual formalities, and the strange indunas saluted respectfully.
+
+"Nkoos, these great chiefs have come from Stegea," the queen said.
+"They have been sent with a message from Umzulek. They are the leaders
+of his impis and he has directed them to counsel with me for the
+purpose of taking the throne by force. Umzulek has talked much with
+Vilakazi, who has explained to him all the difficulties that surround
+us. Umzulek declares he will send all his warriors to our assistance,
+if we will drive Labotsibeni from the throne and make my son king."
+
+During this speech Tuys watched me keenly. I could feel that there was
+war in the air. The people of Swaziland had come to the end of their
+patience and were determined to set up their king whether Labotsibeni
+and Lomwazi liked it or not. On my part, I was practically pledged to
+keep peace in Swaziland and could not be party to a war, even if it
+meant the success of my enterprise. Keeping this thought in mind, I
+addressed the queen before Tuys could reply.
+
+"Nkosikaas, Mother of the King," I said as impressively as I could,
+"this is talk of war! We must not have killing. Your son must not gain
+his throne through bloodshed.
+
+"This would be a poor business, Nkosikaas. The government would not
+sanction his taking the throne by force and he would be driven out by
+the rifles of the English. War must be avoided at all costs, since
+Sebuza would lose, even if he won!"
+
+I went on at length, pointing out the foolishness of war and trying to
+get the queen and the indunas to change their minds. I could see that
+the indunas were set on war, and they had convinced Tzaneen that it
+was the only way. Down in my heart I had a sort of feeling that they
+were right.
+
+Tuys also backed me up and talked of the mistakes made by the Swazis
+when he was young. He explained that they must obey the government and
+told them how impossible it would be for them to wage war against
+Labotsibeni without its consent. He made a good argument against
+killing and practically converted the queen.
+
+Then Sebuza came in! With him was Lochien and a number of the younger
+indunas. Immediately the debate became heated. Lochien took our side,
+but Sebuza and his men sided with the indunas from Stegea. The queen
+remained neutral, though I felt she would have liked to come out for
+war. It was Sebuza who made the deciding speech.
+
+"Who am I that I am kept out of my kingdom?" he almost shouted. "I,
+the son of Buno and grandson of Umbandine! I have thousands and
+thousands of warriors, and all the people of my country wait for me to
+become king. All my indunas and warriors wait for me to give the word,
+when they will sweep over the land and crush Labotsibeni and Lomwazi!
+
+"I call for war! I call to my people to come to me and destroy those
+who hold the throne from Sebuza, son of Buno!"
+
+With this kindly thought the prince sat down, and I could see that
+practically all the indunas were in favor of his suggestions. It
+looked as though we were to have a civil war whether we wanted it or
+not. But I thought of Commissioner Honey's remarks and decided to make
+another effort to avoid a conflict.
+
+I suggested to the queen that the indunas be dismissed and that we
+hold a conference to decide the question of whether or not there
+should be war. When the indunas had gone, there was a sort of
+"executive session" attended by the queen, Sebuza, Lochien, Vilakazi,
+Oom Tuys, and myself.
+
+Tuys and I brought up the question of what would happen to all present
+if the indunas of Tzaneen and Sebuza were allowed to precipitate war.
+We told them of the misery it would cause their people, and finally
+reminded them that the British Government would take a hand and that
+they would either be driven out of their country or executed. This
+last thought struck home. Nevertheless, they were so exasperated at
+the state of affairs that it looked as though they were almost willing
+to take a chance.
+
+"But we have more than five thousand warriors here now," Sebuza
+objected. "These brave men are loyal to me and came here to see me
+crowned. They are willing to die for me, and I dare not send them home
+to their kraals to say that I, the son of Buno, am afraid to take my
+throne. Labotsibeni has few warriors, and I have heard that these will
+desert her if there is a war. We could seize the throne with little
+killing. Only Lomwazi, perhaps, need be killed!"
+
+That last statement came from the heart. I could see that Sebuza had
+hard feelings for his uncle and he looked as if he would enjoy the job
+of removing Labotsibeni's able counsellor.
+
+His remark about there being so many warriors at Lebombo gave me an
+idea. It flashed through my troubled head that it might be a good idea
+to "pull a bluff" on Labotsibeni, as the Americans say.
+
+"You say you have more than five thousand warriors here waiting for
+you to give the word for war," I said, turning to Sebuza. "Are you
+sure that Labotsibeni has few warriors and that these will not remain
+faithful?"
+
+Sebuza repeated his statement, and both Lochien and Vilakazi agreed
+with him.
+
+"Then let us make a demonstration on Zombode," I went on. "Let us get
+all the warriors of Sebuza and the queen, and also those of Umzulek,
+and march on the royal kraal of Labotsibeni. When we arrive there, let
+the impis deploy so that their number is so many that it cannot be
+counted."
+
+[Illustration: CROWN PRINCE SEBUZA IN FESTIVAL DRESS
+
+The headdress consists of anything that is colored, perhaps a few
+colored feathers or colored paper (probably removed from a jam-tin).
+The necklace consists of beads worked into various ornaments and
+patterns. The anklets are made from the hides of wild beasts]
+
+[Illustration: CROWN PRINCE SEBUZA
+
+This picture was taken immediately after his return from the mountains
+where he attained his manhood. During the space of two moons, or two
+months, he lived in complete isolation among the barren mountains. He
+was later subjected to various religious rites, including
+circumcision, and went through all the ceremonies incidental to his
+sanctification for the throne]
+
+"When all is ready, the warriors will dance as though for war. After a
+little we shall send messengers to Labotsibeni and demand that she
+abdicate. Lomwazi will see that we have an overwhelming force and will
+advise her to do so, and thus Sebuza will receive the throne of his
+father!"
+
+My suggestion met with the unqualified approval of all the Swazis,
+particularly Sebuza and his mother. Oom Tuys, however, spoke quickly
+to me in Dutch.
+
+"Remind them that this is only a demonstration, Owen, and that there
+must be no killing," he said.
+
+I turned to the others again.
+
+"Nkosikaas, you must instruct your indunas that this is to be only a
+peaceful demonstration," I told the queen. "You must tell them that
+the warrior who makes an attempt to kill will be executed. There must
+be no mistake about this. Prince Sebuza must also tell his indunas
+this, and they must understand fully that this is not war--it is only
+make-believe."
+
+All promised to see that these instructions were carried out, and then
+we arranged the details of the demonstration. It was set for the day
+after the next new moon, or about ten days hence. In the meantime all
+the warriors that could be notified were to be rallied at Lebombo, so
+that the impis of the queen and Sebuza would be as large and imposing
+as possible. At the time I did not realize that this last suggestion
+was a mistake. I ought to have remembered that it would be impossible
+to muster the warriors loyal to our faction without those of the
+opposite persuasion knowing about it.
+
+The day of the demonstration dawned bright and fair. It was also very
+hot. Tuys and the rest of our party were up early, and even then the
+kraals of Lebombo seemed alive with fighting men. Lochien came over
+before breakfast and said that they would set out so as to reach
+Zombode before noon. This meant about half-past nine, since
+Labotsibeni's kraal was about a two hours' march distant.
+
+It was an imposing spectacle to see the various impis assemble in such
+formation as they knew. Tzaneen and Sebuza each had their own impis,
+wearing a distinguishing headdress. In addition, the men from Stegea
+wore plumes that showed they were the "household troops" of Umzulek.
+The other impis were more or less nondescript, but their warriors were
+picked men. Every man had on his full war costume and they made a
+brave array. The indunas could be distinguished by their more splendid
+regalia and bearing, and even I was surprised to see what fine types
+of savages these were.
+
+Sugden, Crespinell, Tuys, and I bore our rifles and side-arms so as to
+carry out the semblance of war, and we four marched at the head of the
+army. The impis were strung out along the roadway, and when I looked
+back I felt certain that we had many more than five thousand fighting
+men behind us. With us at the head of the troops went L'Tunga,
+Vilkazi, Lochien, and Makets, the latter the head induna of Umzulek's
+impi.
+
+We halted at the little stream that marks the dividing line between
+Zombode and Lebombo and I took occasion to again impress on the
+indunas the fact that we were about to make a peaceful demonstration.
+I knew that word must have reached Lomwazi that we were coming, and I
+hoped his spies had exaggerated our numbers so that he would realize
+how hopeless it was to resist.
+
+Sebuza had remained with his mother at Lebombo. This was to show that
+he had nothing to do with our warlike strategy. He was to stay there
+until sent for by his people to take over the throne.
+
+I had one bad moment when we deployed in front of Zombode. We were
+stretched out for more than a quarter of a mile--it must have been
+nearer a half--and the formation was made while we were at least five
+or six hundred yards from the kraals. With my field-glasses I could
+see great numbers of warriors lying or sitting in front of the
+village. The grass was high, so that I could make no actual estimate
+of how many there were. I could glimpse thousands of headdresses above
+the grass, however, and there appeared to be a bank of men on the
+ground surrounding the kraals.
+
+Now it had been planned that our army should advance in solid
+formation right across the little plain until it came within about two
+hundred yards of the huts. When it halted a signal was to be given,
+and then the war dancing would begin.
+
+We went forward, our little party between the impis of Tzaneen and the
+prince, and I could feel the excitement growing. On both sides of me
+grim warriors fingered their weapons and their eyes flashed. I had the
+feeling that I was on top of a powder-magazine with lightning striking
+all around.
+
+Lochien was several paces in the lead, and it was he who was to give
+the signal. On we went, until I began to think he had lost his head
+and forgotten the orders. Suddenly he threw up his hands, his shield
+gleaming dully in the sun, and halted. Instantly the whole army
+stopped--and then came my bad moment!
+
+Diamond-points of sunlight flashed from a thousand spearheads as impi
+after impi rose from the ground around Zombode. In that brief moment
+there seemed to be countless warriors, fully armed, standing guard at
+the old queen's kraal.
+
+We fairly gasped with astonishment. Tuys threw his rifle forward and I
+heard the breech-lock click. He was as amazed as the rest of us, and
+his instinct warned of trouble.
+
+"What a surprise!" he said, turning quickly to me. "Now we're in for
+it! Keep close, lad, and we'll win through!"
+
+Before I could reply, Lochien began dancing. In another moment our
+entire army was chanting and springing up and down like madmen.
+
+"Soukbulala! Soukbulala!--I will kill you! I will kill you!" they
+shouted. From individual shouts this quickly fell into a sort of rude
+rhythm, its heavy bass rolling away across the plain.
+
+Immediately the warriors at the kraals commenced their dance, and
+their shouts reached us with the snap of gunshots. Our men waved their
+knob-kerries, assegais, and shields in the air, and Labotsibeni's home
+guard did the same. The air was full of murderous tools and we were
+surrounded by giant savages who seemed to have suddenly gone mad.
+
+This awful bedlam lasted for some time. Actually, it was six minutes
+by my watch, but such a six minutes! Every second I expected to see
+some of our warriors dash forward and attack the enemy.
+
+L'Tunga came to himself first. He sprang out to Lochien, who still
+danced in front of us all, and caught him by the arms. Lochien stopped
+dancing, and a second later he turned to our army and threw up his
+arms. Like a statue he held the great shield above his head, standing
+there as though suddenly turned to bronze.
+
+This was a signal for the dance to cease. In a little time our
+warriors saw him and quieted down, only their agitated plumes showing
+that their excitement was not wholly dead. Labotsibeni's warriors
+caught the change, and soon they, too, became quiet. They swayed to
+and fro in front of the kraals, but remained as silent as our impis.
+
+L'Tunga and Lochien came back hurriedly to us for a conference.
+
+"Nkoos, this is not what we expected," Lochien said to me in an
+anxious tone. "We didn't believe Labotsibeni could muster so many men.
+What shall we do now? Shall we go through with the plan, or fight?
+Perhaps it is better to fight. We have more than five thousand
+warriors, and they cannot have more than about three thousand. Shall
+we fight?"
+
+"No! No!" I replied most emphatically. "Go through with the plan as
+arranged. Tell Labotsibeni that you have many more warriors than she
+has. Tell her that you don't want to have any killing, but that she
+must surrender the throne."
+
+"Wouldn't it be better to fight?" Lochien insisted, and I could see
+that the blood-lust had him.
+
+I threw my rifle to my shoulder with the muzzle dangerously close to
+his head.
+
+"I shall kill the first man who tries to fight," I said. "If he is a
+warrior, I'll shoot him once; if an induna, twice; and if he is one of
+the royal blood, I'll fill him full of holes!"
+
+This settled the question. Lochien thought my threat was real--and he
+was not fooling himself much, either.
+
+L'Tunga, who had a wide reputation throughout Swaziland as a
+witch-doctor, then went forward, accompanied by Lochien, Makets, and
+several others. They made the peace sign and went halfway across the
+debatable ground between the two armies. Here they waited for a few
+moments only, and then Lomwazi and half a dozen indunas came to meet
+them. I would have given much to have heard that conversation. After a
+short talk Lomwazi led our envoys into the village.
+
+No sooner were they out of sight than Labotsibeni's men again began
+dancing and shouting their war-cries. I could feel our warriors
+tightening up, and shouted for Vilakazi. I told him to watch closely
+and prevent any warrior from breaking ranks, and demanded that he stop
+them from dancing. He went along the ranks and spoke to the indunas,
+who turned and yelled at their men. In spite of this, I could see the
+plumes beginning to sway and felt that it would not be long before
+they were at it again. This time I doubted whether we could stop them
+if the "enemy" began taunting them.
+
+Labotsibini's men shouted and jumped, and presently one or two began
+running forward a short distance. A warrior would seemingly be
+overcome by his emotions and would make a quick dash into the "No
+Man's Land" between the forces, using up his energy by a particularly
+violent fit of dancing. When this was spent he would hop back to his
+place near the kraal, yelling all the while.
+
+I realized the danger of this sort of thing. If these enthusiastic
+savages came far enough, they would tempt some of our men to dance out
+and meet them. This would mean a killing. There would be some rapid
+blows with the knob-kerries, accompanied by the hollow thud when the
+shields caught the strokes, and finally one blow would go home and the
+victim would drop. Like a flash would come the stab of the assegai and
+there would be a dead man on the ground!
+
+Our indunas knew this better than I did, and they walked up and down
+before their excited warriors watching for the first man to break
+ranks. Tuys and I held our rifles ready, fully intending to shoot the
+first warrior who started for the middle ground. It was a ticklish
+position and my white companions stood nervously waiting for the break
+they felt was coming.
+
+At the moment when it seemed as though the dam must burst and our men
+get beyond control, a sudden silence came over the shouting lunatics
+at the kraals. I understood the reason when I saw our envoys coming
+out of the royal kraal, still escorted by Lomwazi and his indunas.
+Amid deep silence they walked slowly to the spot where they had met
+before and stopped long enough to ceremoniously salute each other.
+Then Lomwazi and his bodyguard returned to the village and L'Tunga and
+the others came to where we stood.
+
+They appeared angry and worried. Lochien also looked dejected, and
+Tuys and I listened while L'Tunga made his report.
+
+"Queen Labotsibeni sends word that she will not surrender the throne,
+Nkoos," he said. "She told me to tell our queen that she must die
+before the throne passed to Sebuza, and not after."
+
+Evidently the old queen had made up her mind that the government could
+not protect her from the sacrifice if she allowed Sebuza to become king.
+
+"When I told her that we had many more warriors than she had," the
+witch-doctor went on, "she declared that her indunas would fight to
+the death, that so long as she held Zombode she was Queen of Swaziland!"
+
+I could picture the old queen when she delivered this defiance. Blind,
+too weak to stand, and more than one hundred years old, her spirit was
+still unbroken, her courage undiminished! She had lived like a queen
+and evidently had made up her mind to die like one.
+
+Both armies remained quiet while we held a council of war. Makets
+insisted that we attack Zombode; he thought we could rush the village
+and take it. I could see that he was carrying out instructions that
+Umzulek had given him when he sent him to Lebombo. His advice was
+given in a torrent of words that I had difficulty in stopping. He had
+the attack all planned.
+
+"Attack with fire!" he almost yelled, for he was much excited and in
+deadly earnest. "First the impis of Tzaneen, Sebuza, and Umzulek will
+attack those on guard. After them will come the others, carrying fire.
+While we fight, the torch-bearers will break through and burn the
+kraals!"
+
+He had it all planned out and I could perceive the cunning mind of his
+chief at work. Makets wanted a bloody holocaust that would bring back
+the old days with a vengeance. I had heard of such attacks when the
+Boers and British wiped out offending tribes, and I knew what such a
+thing meant--a massacre, with the women and children burned to death!
+
+I finally silenced Makets, but barely in time. He had almost fired the
+others with his bloodthirstiness, and for a moment I was afraid they
+would bolt and start the carnage. L'Tunga came to my assistance, and a
+moment later Lochien joined the anti-war party which Tuys and I
+headed. Our argument lasted a long time, but finally we prevailed.
+
+"Indunas and leaders of the true king's impis," I said at the
+conclusion of our council. "We have shown Queen Labotsibeni and
+Lomwazi that their nonsense must end. They know now that a majority of
+the loyal warriors of Swaziland are behind the son of Buno and they
+are afraid! Let us take our impis back to Lebombo, and to-morrow we
+will send to Labotsibeni and demand that she give up the throne. She
+is afraid that she will be killed, according to the ancient custom,
+and for that reason refuses to abdicate. We white men will pledge
+ourselves to guard her and escort her to Portugese territory, where
+she will be safe. When she hears this, she will have no hesitation in
+permitting Sebuza to be crowned."
+
+This reasoning seemed good to Lochien, L'Tunga, and the others, except
+Makets, who grumbled a bit and still wanted to end the business then
+and there. I suspect that he hated the thought that he would have to
+report to Umzulek that there had been no fighting and that Lomwazi had
+escaped.
+
+Our warriors were squatting on the ground when the command was given
+for the return to Lebombo. They rose at once, and Labotsibeni's
+watch-dogs also sprang to their feet. These expected that we were
+about to attack, and so were greatly puzzled when our army turned
+about and started off slowly for Lebombo. Their silence lasted only a
+few minutes, however. Then they broke out into revilings and taunts
+that would have made a saint fight. Our impis grew more and more
+sullen under this volley of insults, and went away from Zombode with
+murder in their hearts and the feeling that they would have many
+explanations to make when they returned to the home kraals.
+
+I was sorry that our bluff had failed, but very thankful that we had
+pulled through without bloodshed. Tuys walked along beside me, silent
+and thoughtful. When Lebombo's kraals came in sight he told me what
+was on his mind.
+
+"Owen, my lad, I know these people," he said, "and I'm afraid that
+your peaceful ruse will cause trouble. The Swazi warrior is a proud
+man and does not like to be called names. I pray that we may get
+through the next few days without an explosion."
+
+I made light of his forebodings, though probably my attitude was due
+to our having withdrawn without a battle. Had I known what was going
+to happen, I would not have been so lighthearted.
+
+Tzaneen and Sebuza were angry at our failure. The prince, of course,
+was indignant that we had accepted the insults of Labotsibeni's troops
+and was quite rude to Oom Tuys and me for preventing the capture of
+Zombode.
+
+"It would have all been over by this time," he said, "and I would be
+king! My impis have lost faith in me for permitting you white men to
+do this thing. I shall lose my warriors. They will go over to
+Labotsibeni and Lomwazi because they are not afraid."
+
+Then I explained to him and his mother about our plan to send a
+message to Labotsibeni on the following day. When they heard that we
+white men would guard the old queen and escort her to safety, they
+thought that it might succeed. Sebuza, though, very pointedly
+mentioned the fact that according to custom the old queen ought to
+die. I protested that she was too old and feeble to do him any harm
+after he became king, and he agreed that I was right.
+
+He was insistent, however, that Lomwazi should die. He felt that
+Lomwazi would be a menace to the throne and, it seems, had some old
+scores he wanted to pay off. We argued over this for some time, and
+Sebuza, on the urging of his mother, finally came around to our point
+of view. Yet I had the feeling that we would have to move fast to
+prevent an accident happening to Lomwazi.
+
+I little realized that all this talk was for nothing. My nice little
+plan, which sounded so simple, would never even be tried!
+
+That night Tuys and I arranged the details of the next day. We planned
+to take the wagonette and use it to transport Labotsibeni and Lomwazi
+to Portuguese territory. We would walk beside it with our rifles ready
+and protect the old queen with our lives. We both felt that the safest
+thing to do with Lomwazi would be to hide him inside and we spent some
+time arranging the vehicle so that he could be concealed within. Of
+course he would be found easily if the wagonette was searched, but we
+intended to prevent that, even if we had to fight off curious kaffirs.
+
+In high hopes that we had reached the end of the trail and that the
+coronation was at last in sight, we went to bed. Sugden and Crespinell
+were glad, too, since they had had their fill of Swaziland and wanted
+to go home.
+
+But our real troubles were only beginning.
+
+Tuys waked me roughly next morning before day-break. He was much
+excited, and I could see that he was fully dressed and had his rifle
+in his hand.
+
+"Get up! Get up at once, Owen!" he said hoarsely. "There is the devil
+to pay! War has broken out and there has been killing already!"
+
+I jumped out of bed and into my clothes in one motion. While I pulled
+them on he told me what had happened.
+
+"Some of Sebuza's indunas started for their kraals last night," he
+said. "They went by way of Zombode, and when they passed the little
+hill just before you reach the plain they were attacked by several
+score of Labotsibeni's warriors and every one of them was killed! It
+was cold-blooded murder. They must have been outnumbered about ten to
+one!"
+
+It seems that an induna and his men had lagged behind the others and
+had seen the ambush. From their description it was a most unexpected
+and brutal attack. Sebuza's indunas tried to put up a fight and
+resisted for a short time. Then the enemy overpowered them and stabbed
+them to death.
+
+So it was war after all! In spite of my efforts to prevent it, the
+question of who should be ruler of Swaziland was to be settled in the
+old-fashioned way.
+
+Tuys and I went to the royal kraal and found Tzaneen and Lochien
+already up. Thousands of warriors and scores of indunas were on guard
+and the whole place was in whirl of excitement. As we forced our way
+to the royal hut, Sebuza came marching in surrounded by his young
+indunas, all of whom were officers in his impis. The prince pushed by
+us into his mother's hut and a second later Lochien came out and
+beckoned us to enter.
+
+As soon as she saw us, Queen Tzaneen motioned us to her side.
+
+"It is war now," she said decisively. "There is no other way! Our
+indunas have been murdered and my warriors cannot be restrained. You
+white men did everything you could to keep peace, but Labotsibeni
+makes war against us and we cannot help ourselves. It is war!"
+
+The others echoed the word "war," and I could see that they were all
+pleased at the prospect. Even Lochien, peace-loving though he was,
+realized that there was no help for it and counselled quick action to
+secure the capture of Zombode. Makets was in his glory and I knew that
+the smell of blood was already in his nostrils.
+
+But I would not give up. I could not see these people go to war and I
+made one last attempt to prevent it.
+
+"The government will avenge the murder of your indunas, Nkosikaas," I
+declared. "The government will send rifles to Zombode and will hang
+all those who did the killing. There is no need for you to meet murder
+with murder--then you will be also punished by the government's
+rifles! Thousands will be killed, and needlessly, for those at Mbabane
+will send white troops to catch the murderers and hang them."
+
+They listened while I spoke, but I could feel that I was talking
+against a flood that was irresistible. Tzaneen answered me, and her
+words met the hearty approval of all the others.
+
+"We do not need the government to avenge our dead," she said, holding
+her head erect with pride. "Our dead are our own and their blood cries
+to us for revenge!"
+
+That seemed to settle it. They asked us to take part in the war, but
+we flatly refused. We told them that it was not a "white man's war"
+and that we would have nothing to do with it. Then Sebuza, with his
+customary impudence, asked me to lend him my rifle. I refused, and he
+grew quite huffy about it.
+
+"You gave my father, King Buno, a rifle," he retorted. "I shall soon
+be as great a king and then you will be sorry you refused!"
+
+I realized he might be speaking the truth, but nevertheless would not
+let him have the gun. I would have felt guilty of any killing he did
+with it and I know the government would have taken the same view.
+
+When Tuys and I got back to our camp we immediately held a council of
+war. Our position was dangerous. If Labotsibeni's men attacked
+Lebombo, we might have to fight for our lives. We were known as
+friends of Tzaneen and Sebuza, and our taking part in the
+"demonstration" of the day before had shown all Swaziland that we were
+not friendly to Labotsibeni and Lomwazi. Realizing that we might have
+to fight and not caring to take advantage of the slim protection of
+the kraals, we built up the sides of the great wagon so that it became
+more like a fort than anything else. In addition, we arranged for
+night watches, so that there would always be at least one white man on
+guard, with several of the black boys to assist him. Of course I had
+Sibijaan assigned to my watch, while Tuis was to watch with Oom Tuys,
+with whom he had become a favorite. Crespinell and Sugden each had
+their boys, and we felt that there would be little chance for a
+surprise attack on the wagon, if matters worked out as planned.
+
+An interesting development in our preparations for defense was the
+sudden discovery that "Gunga Din" was a soldier. He came to me, asked
+for one of the spare rifles, and handled it like a veteran. Like all
+Indians, he had a great contempt for negroes, and he seemed delighted
+over the prospect that he might have a chance to shoot a few Swazis.
+Instead of being worried about the turn of affairs, Din was bucked up
+by it and produced a large crooked knife from among his effects,
+sticking in his belt where it could be readily reached. It developed
+that our chef was a fighting man, after all.
+
+[Illustration: LOCHIEN, COMMANDER-IN-CHIEF OF PRINCE SEBUZA'S IMPIS
+
+On either side stand two of his indunas, or captains]
+
+[Illustration: WARRIORS OF PRINCE SEBUZA'S IMPIS STARTING OUT TO BATTLE
+
+The enemy was but a short distance away and his warriors were coming
+forward in like manner to meet those of the Prince]
+
+[Illustration: ONE OF THE ROYAL IMPIS
+
+These regiments of about one thousand men are led by indunas, or
+captains. These soldiers are preparing to go into battle. They are
+beginning the excitement-producing dance, to be followed by a
+succession of single combats which are always fought to the death]
+
+All that morning excitement prevailed at the kraals. There was much
+dancing, and the chanting was continuous. I could see thousands of
+warriors on hand and during the afternoon a fresh impi arrived from
+the direction of Stegea. These, however, did not look like Umzulek's
+men, for they wore no distinguishing mark.
+
+We were all curious to know what was going to happen. I made another
+visit to the royal kraal late that afternoon and was met by Vilakazi.
+He was friendly enough, but professed to be ignorant of what was
+planned and ended by advising me to return to my camp. He gave me to
+understand, politely but firmly, that only those who intended fighting
+were desired at the royal kraal. Finding that I was not wanted, I took
+his advice and returned to camp to tell Tuys about it.
+
+"Vilakazi has more sense than you have, Owen," he commented. "You said
+that this was not a white man's war and you'd better live up to that.
+Don't worry about what's going to happen; it will be bad enough when
+it gets here."
+
+So I decided to mind my own business and try to meet whatever trouble
+was coming our way when it arrived. It was as well that I did. I could
+do nothing except hope that the conflict would be as short and
+bloodless as possible. I had done everything possible to keep peace.
+
+Late that afternoon I saw a number of small impis--bands of warriors
+numbering about one hundred and fifty men--leave the kraals and take
+to the hills in the general direction of Zombode. These, Tuys
+explained to me, were ambush parties whose work it was to lie in wait
+for warriors who might be rallying to the assistance of the old queen.
+
+"They are murder parties," he repeated, calling them by their right
+name, "and they will also act as scouts and spies. If they can waylay
+parties of inferior numbers, they will do so and kill every one of
+them. Of course there are undoubtedly a number of such parties abroad
+now who belong in Zombode. There will be a carnival of murder and
+assassination until one side gets up nerve enough to attack the
+headquarters of the other. All I hope is that Tzaneen's indunas screw
+their courage to the attacking point first. I'd prefer to have this
+war fought out at Zombode, and not here!"
+
+We all agreed with him and turned in that night "all standing." I did
+not go to sleep until very late, and it seemed only a few minutes
+before Tuys routed me out to take my watch. I was on duty from about
+midnight until dawn, but nothing disturbed us.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XX
+
+Lebombo threatened with attack--Tzaneen flies to us for
+protection--Victory for Sebuza--Labotsibeni's mysterious
+death--Lomwazi spared for execution later--Funeral sacrifice of the
+old queen--Queen Tzaneen in state--We are forced to join the royal impi.
+
+
+There must have been important developments during the night. Shortly
+before sun-up I saw several thousand warriors leaving Lebombo in the
+direction of the enemy. They marched swiftly and silently, and when
+they had gone the kraals appeared deserted. I wanted to send Sibijaan
+over to find out what this movement meant, but was afraid to do so for
+fear that he might be mistaken for an enemy.
+
+When Tuys waked, I told him about the impis leaving for Zombode. At
+once he became intensely interested.
+
+"That is the end!" he declared. "We'll know who wins the war by noon.
+Tzaneen's impis have gone to attack Zombode, and I hope they take it.
+The sooner this business is ended, the better for all of us."
+
+Shortly before noon a kaffir came out of the royal kraal and shouted
+in our direction. He waved his shield, and I sent Sibijaan to see what
+he wanted. Through my glasses I recognized him as one of the few old
+indunas I had seen in Swaziland. There are practically no old men or
+women in the country. This is due to the rigid belief in the doctrine
+of the survival of the fittest, the old ones usually being removed
+when unable to protect themselves. This old induna was some sort of an
+officer for the queen and acted as a tutor for Sebuza. His age
+prevented him from taking part in active warfare.
+
+Sibijaan talked with him for a few minutes, and then turned and raced
+back to me. He was terribly excited and could hardly deliver the
+message.
+
+"Ou Baas, there is great danger!" he gasped. "Queen Tzaneen sends to
+you for help. She has received word that the impis of Labotsibeni are
+coming to attack Lebombo. Thousands of warriors are now in the hills
+and will soon attack!"
+
+Tuys and I were puzzled what to do. Sugden decided for us. With his
+ready Yankee wit, he hit upon the solution.
+
+"You haven't any chips in this game," he said, "and you've got to keep
+out of this war. But there's nothing to prevent you from offering
+sanctuary to a fugitive king, queen, ace, or jack! Send to Tzaneen and
+tell her to come over here, and we'll take care of her if the enemy
+comes! We'll have to fight for our own lives anyway, and it won't
+matter much if we add her to our responsibility."
+
+I sent Sibijaan running with this message, and it was only a short
+time before Queen Tzaneen arrived with quite unseemly haste at our
+camp. In spite of her precarious position she kept her dignity, and we
+helped her up into the big wagon, where she hid under the cover with
+four of her maids-of-honor. To calm her nerves we gave her a bottle of
+gin.
+
+Then followed one of those periods of suspense that seem as though
+they would never end. I searched the hills with my glasses, scanning
+every tree and boulder for the oncoming enemy. Every now and then I
+would start when I saw a movement, but invariably it turned out to be
+caused by either a cow or a sheep. We practically held our breath for
+about four hours, waiting for an enemy which might wipe us out. That
+was a long long afternoon!
+
+About the time the shadow from the barren mountain fell across the
+royal kraal, which means shortly after five o'clock, our suspense came
+to an end. It ended with a shock that I will never forget.
+
+Tuys and I were still searching the hills when Sibijaan suddenly
+gripped my arm, his hand trembling so that I almost dropped my
+field-glasses.
+
+"Look! Look, Mzaan Bakoor!" he cried, pointing down the road which led
+to Zombode. "There they come! Shoot quick! Shoot!"
+
+Through the glasses I could see what looked like several impis
+straggling up the road. They marched fast, but without much attempt at
+formation. As I watched I could see that many of the warriors were
+dancing.
+
+I felt myself grow cold and hot by turns. Our time had come! It was
+the army of Labotsibeni advancing to attack Lebombo and kill Tzaneen
+and her white friends. Tuys had the same thought, and he lowered his
+glasses and looked at me. A veteran campaigner, nothing flustered him,
+but he wanted to see how it affected me. A second later he put out his
+great hard hand and I shook it solemnly.
+
+"Well, Owen, we'll show them how white men can fight--and die, if need
+be," he said gruffly. "It has been a good game and we have done our
+best!"
+
+Sugden and Crespinell were watching the oncoming impis and coolly
+comparing the sights on their rifles, trying to agree on the proper
+distance to set them. This spoke for their courage, and I turned my
+glasses on the impis again. Tuys was studying them, and suddenly he
+began to laugh in that deep bass way he has when he is highly amused.
+
+"We're damn fools, Owen, damn fools!" he rumbled, with a chuckle.
+"Those niggers are the impis of Tzaneen and Sebuza. The war is over!
+They are dancing with joy! They must have taken Zombode and are coming
+home to tell us about it!"
+
+My glasses told me that he was right. My eyes are not so good as his
+or I would have known this before. Now I could see that the warriors
+were drunk with triumph and were dancing to celebrate their victory.
+As they drew closer I could distinguish Lochien and Makets at their
+head.
+
+I called to Queen Tzaneen to come out, and informed her that her army
+was victorious and approaching. She climbed down from the wagon, and a
+moment later we all went forward to meet the impis. We reached the
+royal kraal shortly before Lochien and Makets, and we white men stood
+back while she received them.
+
+Seeing the queen awaiting them, the indunas halted the warriors and
+they fell into formation. Lochien paused until all were in place and
+then raised his arms in salute. The impis followed his lead and three
+times the royal salute was given, with the shrill whistle at its
+conclusion. Tzaneen acknowledged the salute, and then Lochien and
+Makets stepped forward.
+
+"Nkosikaas, Zombode is ours! Labotsibeni is dead and the war is won!"
+Lochien cried. "Even now Sebuza is king in Zombode and throughout all
+Swaziland. King Buno's son is king and our work is over!"
+
+"Lochien, faithful induna and counsellor," Tzaneen replied, "Is my
+son, the king, wounded or hurt in any way? And did he carry himself in
+battle as should the son of Buno?"
+
+Lochien's answer satisfied her and she beamed with pride and joy.
+There were a few more leading questions and presently we went into the
+kraal. It was only then that I noted Makets closely. He staggered as
+he walked and I was startled to see that he was bleeding from several
+wounds in the breast. I turned to help him, but he would have none of
+it.
+
+"Nkoos, I am a warrior! I am an induna and a leader of warriors!" he
+boasted in a tired voice. "These wounds are nothing! To-day I have won
+seven scars of honor. Seven of Labotsibeni's warriors, great fighting
+men, fell before me!"
+
+He seemed much pleased with himself and had not fully recovered from
+his slaughter madness. I knew that he could take care of himself and
+paid no more attention to him. There were important things to be
+learned. I wanted to know how Labotsibeni came to be killed and what
+had happened to Lomwazi.
+
+Tzaneen was almost beside herself with curiosity and began questioning
+Lochien as soon as we were seated.
+
+"How was Labotsibeni killed?" was her first question.
+
+"Nkosakaas, I cannot answer that," Lochien replied, and I could see
+that he was telling the truth. "Strict orders were given that she be
+spared, so that the government might not hold King Sebuza to account
+for her death. Sebuza told the indunas that the man who harmed the old
+queen would die! All our warriors understood this.
+
+"When we came to her hut, however, she was dead. I think that some
+enemy in her own kraal stabbed her when we broke in and they all fled.
+Perhaps some woman she had offended did it. Labotsibeni was helpless
+and could be easily killed."
+
+It seemed a pitiful thing to me that Labotsibeni, after ruling
+Swaziland for so many years, should be murdered in this way. I was
+thinking about her when Tzaneen asked about Lomwazi.
+
+[Illustration: A VIEW OF THE KRAAL
+
+Awaiting the arrival of the white men for their initiation ceremonies.
+The latter are returning from their sanctification ordeal in the
+mountains prior to their induction into the royal impi]
+
+[Illustration: PRIESTS BUILDING THE SACRED FIRE
+
+On this pyre the body of Queen Labotsibeni was burned after Sebuza
+seized the throne. This is the Swazi custom and strictly adhered to.
+It is the Swazi belief that those surrendering power should be done
+away with in this manner, since if they continued to live they might
+still retain a certain amount of influence which would be antagonistic
+and detrimental to the new ruler]
+
+"Lomwazi is a prisoner, Nkosikaas," Lochien answered. "He will be
+killed after he has officially surrendered the throne. These are King
+Sebuza's orders, and Lomwazi is under guard in Zombode until the
+coronation celebration is held."
+
+That settled the cunning Lomwazi. Clever as he was reputed to be, he
+had not been able to escape his fate. It later transpired that it
+was Lomwazi who had sent the false alarm that Lebombo was to be
+attacked. Evidently he thought that the impis of the enemy would be
+kept on guard there and that he would be able to increase his army by
+delaying the attack he knew would be made on Zombode. However, his
+word reached Tzaneen too late, as the impis were already on the warpath.
+
+Lochien next gave us an account of the taking of Zombode. The old
+queen's opinion concerning the fighting quality of her impis was not
+far wrong. It seems there had been several hundred single combats,
+after the custom of the Swazi warriors, and finally a rush upon the
+kraal. Of course Lochien exaggerated a great deal--no kaffir can tell
+the exact truth--but there must have been between four and five
+hundred killed. There were practically no wounded; there never are
+when Swazis fight. As soon as a warrior wounds his enemy so that he is
+unable to fight back, he kills him.
+
+It developed that there had been an attempt to burn the kraals, but
+Sebuza stopped it. It was he, also, who intervened to save Lomwazi's
+life after that good fighter had killed several of Sebuza's own men.
+Lomwazi was not spared, however, through any mistaken sense of mercy;
+he was kept to be executed as part of the coronation ceremonies. When
+I heard this I made up my mind to save him if I could. If there was no
+other way, I would buy his life. This is often done, and it might be
+possible in Lomwazi's case.
+
+Lochien gave us many other details of the fight, remarking that there
+were many women in Zombode and much loot. Sebuza was to decide on the
+disposition of all enemy property and would have his hands full for
+some time to come. When Lochien had finished Queen Tzaneen praised him
+highly for his loyalty and generalship, and, realizing that the story
+was told, we went back to our camp. I felt thankful that the war was
+over so quickly, and said as much to Oom Tuys. He quickly undeceived me.
+
+"Maybe it is over in Zombode and Lebombo," he said, "but it is only
+beginning in the outlying districts. It won't be over for some time,
+perhaps for months. The news of this war will not reach lots of places
+for days, and when it does the factions will clash. Wherever there are
+any indunas or warriors who are loyal to Labotsibeni, there will be
+killing. It will be bad killing, too,--mostly murders done at night.
+It takes a long time to end a war in Swaziland; that's one reason why
+the government is so set against it. By the way, I wonder what His
+Majesty's Royal High Commissioner for Swaziland thinks of things now?"
+
+This idea had occurred to me several times, but I always put it away
+because I had a feeling that the Commissioner would place much of the
+blame for the war on my shoulders. Tuys prediction about war
+continuing proved only too true. For weeks after the fall of Zombode
+there were killings in the neighboring districts. The only battle of
+any importance took place at Stegea, the kraal of Umzulek. Needless to
+say, the forces of that much-married potentate were victorious. Of
+course many of these killings were due to personal feuds, the war
+being only an excuse for them. It is safe to say that Swaziland was in
+a ferment for some time after Sebuza seized the throne, and this came
+to the notice of the authorities in Mbabane and Johannesburg.
+
+The following day we went to Zombode. Word had come that the body of
+the old queen was to be burned on the sacrificial pyre and we wanted
+to witness the ceremony.
+
+There was not much to it. The burning took place shortly after dark
+and L'Tunga arranged the ceremony. During the day we saw the huge pyre
+of dry wood on which the body was to be laid and the witch-doctors
+were still adding to it late in the afternoon.
+
+Soon after sunset the impis of the king and his mother gathered about
+the great pile, which had been built up in a regular pattern. We were
+with Lochien and Vilakazi and were beginning to get bored when there
+came a commotion and King Sebuza arrived with his bodyguard. There
+were a number of fires near the kraals and these were beginning to
+light up the darkness.
+
+After standing about a little longer it was dark enough to suit Sebuza
+and he sent one of his indunas away in the direction of Labotsibeni's
+brick-walled hut. Shortly after there arose the cry "Make way! Make
+way!" and I saw the warriors draw back and leave a lane to the pyre.
+
+A moment later six witch-doctors arrived, two and two, bearing a rude
+stretcher on their shoulders. On this was a large bundle roughly
+resembling a body. It was the remains of Queen Labotsibeni, the most
+extraordinary native ruler South Africa ever knew.
+
+L'Tunga was waiting at the pyre and directed the witch-doctors how to
+place the body on its summit. When this was done, he stepped back and
+moved to the nearby fire, where he picked up a flaming brand in each
+hand. These he raised above his head with wide sweep and held them
+steady for a moment. Then swiftly he brought the torches down and the
+warriors gave the royal salute--the last tribute to the murdered
+queen! This salute was repeated three times, and then L'Tunga,
+assisted by the other witch-doctors, lighted the funeral pyre. The
+wood was dry and burned fiercely, and soon the leaping flames met over
+the body of the queen.
+
+That was the last of Labotsibeni.
+
+Next day we tried to have a talk with Sebuza, with the idea of finding
+out how soon he planned to be officially installed as king. This was
+very important to me, since his coronation would mean the attainment
+of the object for which I had come to Swaziland. I would be able to
+make an historical record of ceremonies which would be valuable as a
+vivid page out of the life of old South Africa--the life that is
+passing so quickly now that white men are coming into the country in
+such numbers.
+
+Sebuza sent word to us that he would see us in Lebombo in two days,
+and we went back there to our camp. While we were finishing lunch
+Lochien came with a request from Queen Tzaneen that we visit her.
+Thinking that she was probably more interested in a bottle of gin than
+in us, I gave Lochien one for her. He caught my thought and explained
+that the queen really wanted to see "all the white men."
+
+"She has important business to talk over with you, Nkoos," he said,
+"and desires that you come to her at once."
+
+Tuys thought it would be a good thing to do, since we were so near the
+coronation ceremonies, so we all put on our hats and followed Lochien
+to the royal kraal. There was a noticeable change in manners there
+since Sebuza had become king. Instead of the former informality, we
+had to go through the salute and all the other ritual. Tzaneen had
+revived the formal glories of old Labotsibeni and I was amused to see
+how she enjoyed being kowtowed to. She had at least fifteen
+maids-in-waiting about her and had set up quite a court. Even Lochien
+was on his best behavior and went through the ceremony of presenting
+us to her with a neat little speech in which he made it appear that we
+had come as suppliants for her favor. I caught Tuys's eye while this
+was going on and there was an amused twinkle in it. The wise old
+burgher had seen savages of all sorts and nothing they did astonished
+him so long as they continued to behave like grown-up children.
+
+When we were finally seated Tzaneen explained the "important
+business." After we heard it we realized that Lochien had spoken truly.
+
+"Mzaan Bakoor, 'Mlung 'Emantzi Eenui, and Makofa," she said,
+addressing me, Sugden, and Crespinell by our native names, "you have
+seen a queen die and a king made in Swaziland. You know much about how
+these things are done. You know many things about the war that
+Lobotsibini made against me and of which you were a part, for did you
+not carry out the demonstration that led to the killing?"
+
+I attempted to take her up on this statement, but Tuys signaled me to
+keep quiet. Nevertheless, I maintain that she was not just in blaming
+the first killings on us.
+
+"Now you know that the government has set its face against my son,
+King Sebuza," she went on, "and it may be some time before it will
+recognize him as the rightful king. When the news reaches Mbabane that
+Sebuza has seized the throne, the white chief there, who belongs to
+the government, will ask many questions. He will want to know much!
+
+"When you go to Mbabane, or to your own home, the government will
+question you and ask how Labotsibeni came to be killed. Perhaps the
+government will want the truth, when a little lie would work much less
+harm here in Swaziland. Is it not so?"
+
+I began to see what she was driving at. Tzaneen was afraid that the
+government would get after Sebuza for taking the throne by force and
+she wished to make sure that we would protect her son as much as
+possible. She had been talking at me, but now she turned to Tuys.
+
+"Nkoos Tuys, you are the brother of Buno," she said, "and Buno gave
+his people into your care. You are the white king of my country and
+you will protect us from the government if need be. I need not ask you
+to be careful when they question you. I only ask that you advise Mzaan
+Bakoor and his men how to avoid rousing the government against us."
+
+"Nkosikaas, I will answer for Mzaan Bakoor and his men with my life,"
+Tuys answered. "Mzaan Bakoor is blood of my blood and inherits my
+trust as guardian of the Swazis when I die. Buno decreed this as he
+died."
+
+Tzaneen nodded her approval at this brave speech of Oom Tuys and then
+was thoughtful for a time. I could see that she was still doubtful and
+that the fear of the long, slow, but dreadfully sure arm of the
+government was still upon her. Presently she raised her head and
+looked at me, and her eyes flashed a sudden resolve.
+
+"There is one way that I can be certain of your loyalty, Mzaan
+Bakoor," she said, without mincing words, "and that is by making you
+an induna of the Swazis. You and your two men shall become indunas in
+the royal impi. Never before has a white man been worthy to be taken
+into a Swazi impi, and you shall be the first!"
+
+This was a decided shock. I had never thought I would like to be a
+Swazi, even if I were an induna. In fact, I would not have enjoyed
+being King of Swaziland, with all the power that Buno had. But here we
+were face to face with the proposition of being forced to become
+indunas in the crack impi of the new King of Swaziland. Even the
+distinction of being the first white men to be admitted did not lessen
+the blow.
+
+I was at a loss what to say to Tzaneen. She had the air of having
+conferred the highest possible honor on us, but I sat there
+speechless, wondering how to avoid becoming a Boer-Swazi. It was good
+old reliable Tuys who saved the situation, but ruined us.
+
+"Nkosikaas, you have done Mzaan Bakoor and his men the greatest
+honor," he said, "and they will gladly become indunas of your impi.
+They will go to their homes proud to say that they are your indunas!"
+
+Then the wily old Boer poured out a lot more flattery which Tzaneen
+swallowed without blinking an eye. While he talked I thought the
+matter over. It looked like a hopeless case; I could see no way out of
+it. If we wished to see Sebuza crowned, we would have to go through
+with this induna business.
+
+"Oom Tuys has spoken for us," I told Tzaneen, after Tuys had finished
+complimenting her. "For the rest of our lives we shall be proud to say
+that we are indunas of your impi. Our children will also be proud of
+it and will tell their children!"
+
+Tzaneen appreciated this, too, and liked it. Then I asked a question
+that was close to my heart.
+
+"When is it planned to hold the formal ceremonies of making Sebuza
+king of Swaziland?"
+
+"In about fourteen days," she answered. "The celebration of his
+coronation will take place at the same time that you are made indunas.
+You will return from the mountains after ten days, and by that time
+all the people of Swaziland will have come to Lebombo and there will
+be the greatest celebration any one has ever seen."
+
+So this had all been planned, I thought, and then it came over me with
+a jolt that we must go into exile in the mountains for a "puclandi,"
+or space of ten days, before we would be sufficiently sanctified to
+become indunas.
+
+"L'Tunga will take charge of you until you return from the mountains,"
+the queen added, "and he will prepare you for your indunaship."
+
+This ended our chat, and we went back to camp most unhappy in mind.
+Sugden was furious and so was I, but Crespinell regarded it as rather
+a joke. Tuys declared we would have to go through with it and had
+better make the best of it. That night he cheered us up by telling us
+how we would have to live, what we would have to eat, and what L'Tunga
+would do to us. I think the old fellow had more fun chaffing us about
+our becoming "white Swazis" than he had had in a long time. Some of
+his remarks were pointed, and Sugden promised him that he would set
+his impi after him just as soon as he became a "sanctified induna."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXI
+
+Our sanctification in exile--Hardships in the hills--Oom Tuys saves
+Lomwazi's life--The celebration--Lomwazi formally surrenders the
+throne--Sebuza acknowledged as king--We are inducted into the royal
+impi--Mbabane sends for information--We escape through Portuguese
+territory to America.
+
+
+There was even less humor about the induna business next morning.
+Bright and early L'Tunga arrived at our camp with a solemn expression
+on his face and a corps of assistant witch-doctors. We had eaten the
+largest breakfast possible, because Tuys had advised us to eat one
+more white man's meal "before you go into the mountains and fight the
+goats for their food." I remember thinking that there were times when
+the rough and ready humor of this burgher was in very bad taste.
+
+L'Tunga had little to say. He told us to follow him, and we three
+white men meekly did so. On either side of us was our escort of
+witch-doctors, and I had all the sensations of being marched to my
+execution. We were taken to L'Tunga's kraal and into a large hut,
+where we were ordered to take off all our clothes. I thought Sugden
+would explode, but he shut his mouth and took it out in murderous
+looks. Crespinell, being a modest soul, was unhappy about removing his
+garments, but there was nothing to do except to follow instructions.
+
+I tried to cheer Sugden by remarking in English to him that he would
+soon be an induna if his luck held. His only reply was, "Induna?
+Hell!" Crespinell was too far gone for words. When we had stripped
+L'Tunga presented each of us with a full Swazi warrior's costume,
+telling us to put this on. Thankful for anything to cover our
+nakedness, we did so as quickly as we could. Then our witch-doctor
+friend ordered us to come out of the hut, and we did. We certainly
+were the handsomest white Swazis that ever carried a shield!
+
+Tuys was hanging around the kraal, and the twinkle in his eyes when he
+saw us marched out to start on our long walk to the hills was worth
+seeing. We did not appreciate it, however, for the hot earth hurt our
+feet.
+
+It would be impossible to detail our experiences during this exile. I
+am sure no white men ever suffered more than we did. We were bitten by
+insects, scratched by a million thorns, scorched by the sun during the
+day and nearly frozen at night, and our feet were in constant agony.
+In spite of L'Tunga's tutoring, we could not find enough food, so that
+we nearly starved.
+
+There was only one bright spot. Some young women traveling across the
+mountains ran across us and gave us food. Except for this aid, I feel
+sure we would never have survived the ordeal. After the first day or
+two the only fun we got out of it was enjoyment of each other's
+misery. In addition to our actual physical suffering, we were in
+constant dread lest we be bitten by some poisonous snake, of which
+there are many in these hills.
+
+But such suffering must have an end. On the appointed morning L'Tunga
+and his assistants arrived and escorted us back to Lebombo. How we
+ever got there I cannot understand. Our feet were practically useless,
+and we must have walked on sheer nerve. No sooner did we arrive at
+Lebombo than we were ushered into the presence of the queen.
+
+We were a sorry looking group. Each had a ten days' growth of beard
+and a famished look in his eyes. Tzaneen was very cordial and assured
+us that we had come through our sanctification with flying colors. She
+congratulated us on our hardihood and said we would make brave
+indunas. When I interpreted to Sugden later the "brave indunas" part
+of her speech, I thought he would have a fit.
+
+"If I get through this alive," he exclaimed, "I'll never see a Pullman
+porter without wanting to kill him! I don't care how soon the British
+send a flying column and wipe out all the Swazis. I hope they start
+with L'Tunga, and make Tzaneen and Sebuza close seconds!"
+
+Tzaneen had been right when she told us that all Swaziland would come
+to see Sebuza made king. All the kraals at Lebombo were crowded, and
+there were thousands of people camped out around the village. Tuys
+estimated that there must have been nearly thirty thousand Swazis
+there, a good half of whom were warriors. During our exile in the
+hills word had gone throughout the land that the celebration would
+take place at the end of ten days, and the people had flocked in from
+all directions.
+
+The celebration began the day after our return from the hills. Tuys
+had learned that the first event would be the official turning over of
+the throne by Lomwazi, who had been brought from Lebombo for that
+purpose. Following this, there would be a giant reception to Sebuza,
+during which all the warriors would acknowledge him as king.
+
+I was curious about Lomwazi. If Sebuza ran true to heredity, his life
+was not worth much.
+
+"What will happen to Lomwazi when he has turned over the kingdom to
+Sebuza?" I asked Tuys. "Sebuza was very anxious to kill him a little
+while ago. Is Lomwazi going to be executed as part of the festivities?"
+
+"While you were away I made up my mind to try and save Lomwazi's
+life," Tuys said; "not from any love for him, but because he is the
+ablest Swazi I know and may be useful to me some day. I have worked on
+Tzaneen and Sebuza until they have agreed to spare his life. To tell
+the truth, I frightened them into it. I told them that the news of
+Lomwazi's death would surely bring the government rifles into
+Swaziland and that the first targets they would seek would be Sebuza
+and his mother. It took a long time, but they finally agreed to turn
+Lomwazi over to me. I am to be responsible for him and see that he
+makes no trouble for Sebuza or his mother. Lomwazi does not know about
+this, and he won't until after he has turned over the throne."
+
+When the ceremonies started Sebuza stood on a small mound of the
+little plain in front of the kraals, with his "cabinet" behind him.
+L'Tunga was there and all the principal indunas, among whom were
+Lochien, Vilakazi, and a number of those who had taken part in the
+capture of Zombode. Grouped in a tremendous semi-circle about them
+were thousands of the Swazi people. They were waiting patiently for
+the affair to begin.
+
+We white men remained a little to one side, and soon we saw a small
+body of men coming from the kraals. When they drew closer we could
+discern Lomwazi in their midst. He was not bound, but carried no arms
+and wore no ornaments. All the men guarding him were indunas. They
+marched their prisoner in front of Sebuza, and we came nearer so that
+we might hear.
+
+"Lomwazi, brother of Buno and traitor to his son," Sebuza began. "You
+have lost in the war you started against me and now your life is mine.
+Labotsibeni is dead and I have sent for you to surrender the throne to
+me so that the people of Swaziland may know who is king. Do you give
+up the throne?"
+
+Lomwazi was game. He knew that he faced death, but he never dropped
+his eyes or lowered his head. He looked straight at Sebuza and squared
+his shoulders.
+
+"Now that Queen Labotsibeni has been murdered, the son of Buno is the
+rightful heir to the throne," he replied in his deep voice. "Nkoos,
+you are that son and the throne is yours!"
+
+That was all he would say, and I saw Sebuza catch Tuys's eye. He
+seemed to change his mind suddenly, and then spoke to Lomwazi again.
+
+"Your life is mine," he said, with a certain amount of petty triumph,
+"and I can do with it as I please. I have given it to Oom Tuys, the
+White King of Swaziland, the friend of my father, who will do with you
+as he desires."
+
+Tuys then stepped forward and motioned the indunas to move away from
+Lomwazi. The savage regarded him fixedly for a moment, and Tuys
+stretched out his hand. Lomwazi was stunned by the change in his
+fortunes, but a second later gripped the hand and followed Tuys as he
+retreated into the group behind the mound on which Sebuza stood.
+
+Next the warriors formed into impis and, led by their indunas in all
+their savage trappings, began marching past the young king. Each impi
+would halt in front of him and give the royal salute, thus
+acknowledging him as their ruler. It seemed to me that there was an
+endless procession of these savages, all of them fully costumed and
+armed for battle.
+
+When this march past was over and Sebuza had thus been officially
+recognized as king by the Swazis, the royal impi was sent for and
+lined up in front of the "reviewing stand." We were in the background,
+waiting at the appointed place, and L'Tunga came and beckoned us to
+follow him. I remember how my feet still hurt as we swung in behind
+him, carrying our shields like real warriors and trying to step out as
+though we were kin to these savages.
+
+[Illustration: MR. CRESPINELL AT HOME AMONG HIS BLACK BRETHREN]
+
+[Illustration: DR. SUGDEN, PRINCE LOMWAZI, AND DR. O'NEIL]
+
+[Illustration: DR. O'NEIL, MR. CRESPINELL, AND DR. SUGDEN AFTER THEIR
+INDUCTION INTO THE ROYAL IMPI
+
+This was one of the conditions insisted upon by Queen Tzaneen to prove
+their allegiance to her. Clad in this fashion, the three white men
+lived in the mountains for ten days, their only food consisting of
+what they could gather or kill in the wilderness. They are the only
+white men who have ever been accepted officially into a Swazi impi]
+
+We halted in front of Sebuza and there followed a moment's silence. I
+could see the thousands upon thousands of Swazis watching us, and it
+gave me a peculiar, isolated feeling. Sugden and Crespinell kept their
+eyes on Sebuza, and I knew exactly what the doctor was thinking. If
+his wishes had come true, Sebuza would have choked right there.
+
+Then Sebuza made a speech.
+
+"White indunas of the royal impi," he said, addressing us in a loud,
+clear voice. "You have proved worthy to be blood brothers of the
+warriors who guard the king. You have been sanctified and have borne
+the ordeal without flinching. From now on you are Swazis and entitled
+to all the privileges of my chosen indunas."
+
+There was a good deal more, for Sebuza liked to hear himself talk. As
+he rambled on I heard Sugden make a remark out of the corner of his
+mouth to Crespinell, which brought a blush to that young induna's
+tanned cheek.
+
+"He's going to tell how many wives we can have in a minute," he
+whispered. "I hope you get nice fat ones!"
+
+When Sebuza finally finished, he motioned to me to come forward. I did
+so and stood just below him on the mound. An induna handed him a
+plumed headdress and he placed it on my head. It was much as though he
+were conferring a decoration. I stepped back, and Sugden took my place
+and received his headdress. Crespinell followed, and then we turned
+and faced the royal impi. Sebuza gave a sign and the impi saluted us.
+Then we stepped into its ranks and we all saluted the king.
+
+That was the end of the ceremony that made us the only white men to
+hold commissions in the royal impi of Swaziland. After leaving the
+"parade ground" we were only too thankful to hobble back to camp and
+minister to our numerous scratches, cuts, and abrasions. But we had
+not yet come to the end of our torture! Din, however, practically
+saved our lives by rubbing some concoction he made on our abused feet.
+It eased them wonderfully and made it possible for us to get through
+the rest of that day.
+
+The same afternoon the real celebration started. Every one had been
+drinking tswala, some of which runs as high as twelve per cent. in
+alcohol, and this seemed to add to their desire to dance. The warriors
+danced before the royal kraal, and we had to perform with our impi. In
+spite of Din's treatment, it was agony. The ground was hard and
+blistering hot. Sugden's remark that "the hobs of hell have nothing on
+this" was fully justified.
+
+But we went through with it somehow. In addition, we were able to get
+many pictures of the dancing, and Crespinell even took some of Sugden
+and myself doing our best to be true Swazi indunas.
+
+The dancing continued all that afternoon and late into the night. As
+soon as it became dark hundreds of great fires were lighted, and it
+was a weird sight to see these thousands of savages leaping and
+prancing in their light.
+
+The celebration lasted for three full days and nights and on the
+morning of the fourth the visiting tribesmen set off for their homes.
+There was a general exodus, so that by nightfall Lebombo had returned
+to its wonted calm. When I saw how empty it was, I realized that
+Tuys's estimate of the number of people who attended the celebration
+was very conservative.
+
+We were resting and recuperating after the ordeal of becoming "white
+Swazis" when Lochien came in haste to see us. We were about packed up
+and expected to leave Lebombo within a few days. Lochien was troubled
+and wanted our advice.
+
+"A messenger has come from Mbabane," he said. "He says that the
+government will not allow Sebuza to be king. The government chief has
+heard that Labotsibeni is dead and wants to know how she died. Tzaneen
+wishes you would tell her what to say to the messenger."
+
+This was unpleasant news. I had not believed that the government would
+interfere when it heard that Sebuza had actually been made king and
+that all Swaziland was rejoicing over it. There was only one thing to
+tell the messenger.
+
+"Tell Tzaneen to speak the truth to the messenger," I directed. "Tell
+her to say that she does not know how Labotsibeni was killed. If the
+messenger asks about the war, tell the queen to explain how
+Labotsibeni's warriors attacked her indunas and killed them, and that
+she made war only to protect her people."
+
+Lochien took these instructions to Tzaneen, but the event gave me food
+for serious thought. If the government was sending messengers to ask
+questions, it would soon send white investigators--and then would come
+trouble.
+
+That night I called on the queen and informed her that I intended
+leaving Swaziland as quickly as possible. She seemed much upset at
+this and besought me to stay for several moons more. I gathered that
+she was afraid to face the authorities alone. I pointed out to her
+that my return to my own world was imperative, and finally she agreed
+to let me go.
+
+"Nkoos, you will always remember that you are a Swazi induna," she
+said, in parting. "Now you are one of my people and must always remain
+loyal to me!"
+
+I promised. I shall always remember her last words. She drew herself
+up to her full height and threw out her arms in an eloquent gesture.
+
+"When you go, Mzaan Bakoor, all the sunshine goes out of my life!" she
+said, and then turned to enter her hut.
+
+Sunrise next morning saw us trekking for Delagoa Bay. Oom Tuys brought
+Lomwazi with us, and it was understood that he would return to his
+kraal, far removed from Lebombo, as soon as it was safe for him to
+re-enter Swaziland.
+
+Ten days later we reached Delagoa Bay, where we were lucky enough to
+find a steamer on which I engaged passage for our party to New York.
+
+
+THE END
+
+
+
+
+
+
+End of Project Gutenberg's Adventures in Swaziland, by Owen Rowe O'Neil
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ADVENTURES IN SWAZILAND ***
+
+***** This file should be named 38447.txt or 38447.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/3/8/4/4/38447/
+
+Produced by Juliet Sutherland, Richard Prairie and the
+Online Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.